Home

User`s Manual 64 Bit PCI Fibre Channel RAID Controllers

1. 79 C8 Example 3 Installing a RAID 5 Disk Array 86 C9 Example 4 RAID 5 Disk Arrays With a Hot Fix Drive 106 C10 Trying to Answer The Initial Questions 111 10 1 How Many Hard Disks Should be Integrated Into the Disk Array C10 2 Which Level of Redundancy is Needed C 10 3 Do we Need Hot Fix drives nnns 112 C11 States of a RAIDYNE Disk 112 C 11 1 Idle State RR 112 C 11 2 Build 112 ETES ORT Si ou ec UE LM E 112 EISE a Slo cet tune ia aia MEME 112 113 11 6 Expand 113 C 11 7 Error 113 D USING MICROSOFT 005 116 Y Intelligent Computer Peripherals rm D 1 Transparency of Host Drives 116 0 2 Partitioning a Host Drive and Transferring 6 005 116 0 3 CONFIG SYS and the Driver 60 000 120 D 4 Expanded Memory Managers c ccsssssesssssssssesscssssssesscsssssssesesssssesessessssssssssssssesecssssseeesee
2. 144 F 4 4 Installation of a new GDTX SYS Driver Version 144 F 5 Installation of a Removable Hard Disk nnns 144 c uc cC ne LM ee MEL E 145 F 6 1 ICP Controller not Found During Windows NT Installation 145 F 6 2 Installation and Upgrade of Windows NT 3 5x 146 F 6 3 Adding Additional Capacity After An Online Capacity 146 F 6 4 Windows NT Error Messages and Possible 50 147 ARR UT 150 6 1 Transparency of Host Drives sette 150 6 2 Available Drivers and Tools tnnt 150 6 3 Updating the driver using the driver 0 1 150 6 4 Driver installation or update using a patch snnnnnn 150 6 5 GDTMON Monitoring Tool 15 6 6 gdth driver parameters use prt ste ee perdidit bn 152 4 m 153 USING SCO UNIX Nerei on ds tareas ee 156 HT Transparency of Host Drives anne ee 156 H 2 General Tips for Installation tnnt 156 H 3 Instructions on mkdev ADM for 3 2v4 x stent 157 H 4 Instructions on mkdev ADM for 3 2v5 x Open Server 160
3. have to he stopped until the Hot Plug is completed This affects Host Driye s Please onk IR the new disk drive with SCHI ID 4 Check if 5051 bus terminators have to he added or removed The new disk drive must have at least 200 MB capacity Fress RETURN to stop the 5051 channel for unplugging plu PCI 9 9 PCI 0 9 PCI 6 9 GD In Local_Sys Sampling Rate Now we have entered the actual Hot Plug procedure Disconnect the drive to be exchanged by plugging it off from the I O channel first and then from the power cable We immedi ately connect the new drive to the plugs that are now free first to the power supply and then to the I O channel After having reconnected the new drive properly press lt ENTER gt GDT Controller Monitor 25 Computer Peripherals TM isk Drives Position Chn ID Status Vendor Type Atte Size MB Drive B 0 3 6 1 SEAGATE 132 168N RH 2068 valid Eig chann B Plug in the new disk drive at SG channel C SCSI ID 4 YOU MUST NOT DO ANY UNPLUGGING OR PLUGGING N mE SCSI CHANNELS DOING 50 MIGHT CAUSE SERIOUS HARDWARE DAMAGE All data on the new disk drive will he iestroyed After confirming unplugging or plugging is not allowed ardware damage This Coce 561015 GD in Local Sus Sampling Katez Intelligent Computer Peripherals 192 GDT Controller Monitor 25 i Computer Peripherals isk Drives Position Chn I
4. Nane Status Nane 2 EMITE 0 3 DISK_B3 invalid 1530 MB Disk 4 IRU 1 2538 MB Disk Priv Hot Fix Two changes have occurred The Hot Fix drive DISK B3 has the state invalid and has jumped into the position of DISK B2 it will change its status from invalid to OK as soon as the Ar ray Drive is becoming ready again DISK B2 is missing this is the drive we let fail discon nected it from the DC power Since this disk array was configured to have a hot fix drive this position is still in the list with the attribute missing Intelligent Computer Peripherals 111 C 10 Trying to Answer The Initial Questions Now after having demonstrated with examples 3 and 4 how RAID disk arrays are created with RAIDYNE we hope you enjoyed it we would like to return to the questions set down at the beginning of this chapter When planning a disk array it is essential that you have precise ideas on how you intend to configure the disk array 10 1 How Many Hard Disks Should be Inte grated Into the Disk Array To answer this question let us have a look at the delimiting parameters that is the maxi mum and minimum number of drives The maximum number of physical drives in a disk array is determined by the number of physical drives the ICP Controller can control In this context we cannot analyze the many various factors which influence the decision of whether to integrate all Host Drives into one single RAID Host Driv
5. ccccscccssseecsscssssseesecssssssessecssssesessessssessssesssveesssssssseesesssssneessesssseeseet 135 E 5 2 cache memory allocator out of available memory in PCI ISA Systems 135 E 5 3 Installing NetWare 4 1 Wrong Drive Name 136 E 5 4 NetWare Server Not Stable When High 136 E 5 5 ICP Controller and Non ASPI Compatible 136 E 5 6 Last Status Niemals een 137 E 5 7 Adding Additional Capacity After An Online Capacity 137 ra een 137 EONO S 140 F Transparency of Host Drives ttt 140 F 2 General Information on Windows NT 140 oerte pcena M epo ped eb pee et etes odere 140 F 4 The Installation RE ERR E RERUM 142 F 4 The ICP Controller is the only Controller in the 142 Y Intelligent Computer Peripherals F 4 2 The ICP Controller is the Secondary Controller in the 143 F 4 3 Using the Hot Plug Function with RAID Host
6. a Information This event is not critical It only informs the system admin istrator about certain events like the completion of an array build P Warning This event is critical an may not be ignored It occurs for exam ple if an Array Drive s state changes from ready to fail e Error An error occurred This might be the failure of a drive The second column lists how often this event occurred Some events may occur quite often so this counter helps to keep an overview The next column lists the date and the time when the event occurred The last column describes the event At the bottom of the window there is the Settings button Here you can change the polling interval and enable the auto save function Logs that are not saved on the hard disk are lost when the system is reset The auto save function saves the current log in the time intervals selected there The de fault name for this logfile is edtevt evt The Save As button allows you to write the con tents of the event log to a specific file on the hard disk The Load button loads an older event log and displays it The last two buttons delete the log file and clear the event buffer on the ICP Controller AICP RAID Navigator Controller Events LJ File View Window Help os 181 8 Mon Feb 08 20 34 08 Adapter 0 Array Drive 1 drive build started Mon Feb 08 20 33 03 Adapter 0 Array Drive 1 drive build finished successfully Mon
7. 2 ISIS SAOJDUIWAIE SN ISIS 1 adl Intelligent Computer Peripherals 46 Two Internal SCSI Devices 16 Bit and 8 Bit 9j o11u0 d I JO ISIS 01 1535 1 1 1 0 931 9p ISIS 10jDuimi9J SAQ ISIS Intelligent Computer Peripherals 47 B 6 ICP Controller Installation Make sure that the ICP Controller is equipped with an appropriate DIMM at least 8MB As already mentioned in section B 3 of this User s Manual it is not possible to operate the ICP Controller without an ICP ECC SDRAM Module Step 1 Switch off the PCI computer system and remove all cables first of all the power supply Step 2 Following the instructions in the computer manual open the case of the PCI computer so that you have easy access to the PCI expansion slots Step 3 Select a free 64 Bit PCI bus master slot and remove the metal bracket following the in structions in your PCI computer manual It is essential that the ICP Controller is plugged into a bus master slot it will NOT work in a slave or non bus master slot Some mother boards have only 1 bus master slot Make sure that the selected slot has a sufficiently cooling airflow Permanent overheating of electronic devices decreases their life time dras tically The ICP Controller can be also operated in a 32 Bit PCI bus master slot Make sure that the unused card edge connector of the ICP Controller has no contac
8. 70 the I O channel to which a device is connected this be a SCSI or a FCAL channel which ID the drive has the entry I O Processor stands for the corresponding I O channel of the ICP Controller It has the default ID setting 7 for SCSI and 125 for FCAL The IDs of the FCAL drives are normally assigned through the backplane of the Fibre Channel Enclosure the initialization status the names of the drives the Read Write Status RW Read Write the gross capacity membership in a Logical Array or Host Drive Use the cursor keys and 4 to select the drive you wish to initialize We take the first drive of FCAL A in the list With this drive selected press ENTER GDTSETUP Version 3 04 Apr H2 1998 Copyright 1997 98 ICP vortex Computersysteme GmbH elect Physical Drive Cho ID LUN Vendor Product Atty Cap MB Drive SCSI h 6 ESG SHU Sch HSBP M SCSI h A B i FUJITSU MAB3B915C 8782 Drive B 551 1 i SCHI 1 0 Processor FCALA 2 A SEACHTE STIS171FC FCAL A 124 B SEAGATE ST19171C FCAL A 125 B FC 1 0 Processor Rescan for neu device F2 Extended Information Note On SCSI A ID 0 and ID 6 are devices which are not relevant for our examples The Configure Disk menu appears which shows various options For our example we choose the SCSI Parameter Initialize menu option and press ENTER The parameters within this menu can be changed by pressing lt ENTER gt and selecting the new setting
9. Data Striping Parity Drive RAID 4 Host Drive RAID 5 Data Striping with Striped Parity Unlike RAID 4 the parity data in a RAID 5 disk array are striped in all hard disks The RAID 5 disk array delivers a balanced throughput Even with small data blocks which are very likely in a multi tasking and multi user environment the response time is very good RAID 5 of fers the same level of security as RAID 4 When one hard disk fails all data are still fully available the missing data are recalculated from the data still available and the parity in formation RAID 4 and RAID 5 are particularly suitable for systems with medium to large capacity requirements due to their efficient ratio of the installed and actually available ca pacity Intelligent Computer Peripherals 61 ABCDEF m ICP vortex GDT Disk Array Controller 1 Data Striping Striped Parity RAID 5 Host Drive RAID 10 Combination of RAID 1 and RAID 0 The idea behind RAID 10 is simply based on the combination of RAID 0 Performance and RAID 1 Data Security Unlike RAID 4 and RAID 5 there is no need to calculate parity in formation RAID 10 disk arrays offer good performance and data security As in RAID 0 op timum performance is achieved in highly sequential load situations Identical to RAID 1 5096 of the installed capacity is lost for redundancy ABCDEF ABCDEF ICP vortex GDT Disk A
10. Copyright 1997 98 ICP vortex Computersysteme GmbH Array Drive Change Drive Expand Array Drive Add RAID 1 p Replace Array omponent Remove RAID 1 Component Remove Array Drive ect Arra Attrib Capacity No Name Status 4 Build Rebuild Progress Press ENTER GDTSETUP Version 3 04 Apr 1998 Copyright 1997 98 ICP vortex Computersysteme GmbH Array Drive Change Drive Name Array Drive Add RAID 1 rg Ha Replace Tw omponent Remove RAID 1 Component h Remove Array Drive p T I Attrib apacity Nane Status GDTSETUP offers two different Hot Fix types A private Hot Fix drive is only available for one specific disk array A Hot Fix drive in a Hot Fix Pool can be made available to several disk arrays presuming that the capacity fits In our example we choose the Private Hot Fix drive and press ENTER Intelligent Computer Peripherals 108 GDTSEIUP Version 3 04 Apr H2 1998 Copyright 1997 98 ICP vortex Computersysteme GmbH Array Drive Change Drive Expand Array Drive Add RAID 1 p omponent 1 Component Remove Array Drive el pray Drive z to Hd Hot 00 you want to add the drive to the array N U Attention By turning a Logical Drive into a Hot Fix drive all its data is irretrievably lost GDTSETUP Version 3 04 Apr 1998 Copyright 1997 98 ICP vortex Computersysteme GmbH Configure Controller Co
11. Single channel systems cost less but they have the disadvantage that if the cable itself or FC Hard Disk Enclosure FC Controller FESTER cs sta Tess Single FC Arbitrated Loop FC Hard Disks TX Transmitter RX Receiver some other connecting component fails the controller can no longer communicate with the FC devices A dual port controller allows a system to be constructed with each device attached to both cables so that if one cable fails the other takes over all IO operations Intelligent Computer Peripherals 30 Hard Disk Enclosure Dual FC Arbitrated Loop TX Transmitter RX Receiver B 4 1 Fibre Channel Hard Drives FC hard drives are built with a 40 pin SCA connector Single Connector Attachment which provides all necessary signal connections and electricity to the hard drives This SCA con nector enables hard drives to be easily built into an external enclosure with an SCA back plane The drawback of the SCA connector however is that the hard drive can no longer be connected directly to the controller with a simple cable but needs a specific FC SCA to DB 9 adapter This adapter converts the SCA connection on the hard drive into one or in the SD FC SCA Connector front view case of a dual port hard drive into two DB 9 female connectors so the appropriate DB 9 male connector can be attached The adapter also has a connector for the elec
12. GDTSEIUP Version 3 04 Apr AZ 1998 Copyright 1997 98 ICP vortex Computersysteme GmbH Configure Control ler Configure Phusical Devices figs Drives 1gure ogica Drives ect Log Status tios Capacity Type belongs to DISK Al ok Drive Size 1 8538 MB 8538 ele Chn ID Vendor it FCAL A 2 SEAGATE STL9171FC RU 8683 FCAL A 124 B SEAGATE ST19171FC RU 8538 SPACE Select Deselect drive ENTER End selection The dialog box is closed and we are back in the main menu of level 2 GDTSETUP Version 3 04 Apr 1998 Copyright 1997 98 ICP vortex Computersysteme GmbH Configure Controller Configure Physical Devices Drives 1gure ogica Drives elec ov Mane Status Type helongs to M Rl ok IR 2000 ME Disk Host B reate new Logical Drive Drive Information F3 Load All FLO Refresh As you can see we have already created a new Logical Drive of the type Disk The name of the Logical Drive is assigned automatically and contains the channel description and the channel ID after the This can serve as a reminder when you install a complex sys tem with many drives Naturally you may change the name This concludes the installation on level 2 Now press the lt ESC gt key to leave this screen Since we have only a single disk assigned to a Logical Drive there is nothing to do in the Configure Array Drive
13. Intelligent Computer Peripherals 120 E Now use the MS DOS program FORMAT to transfer MS DOS to the primary partition you have just created To do so enter A gt FORMAT C S lt ENTER gt F To complete the installation of MS DOS use the MS DOS commands COPY or XCOPY to transfer the desired MS DOS files A different and maybe even more elegant method of installing MS DOS is to use the SETUP program of MS DOS versions 5 and 6 In this case you only have to create and activate a partition with GDTSETUP or FDISK Then boot the system from the first floppy disk deliv ered with MS DOS MS DOS SETUP will take care of all the rest D 3 CONFIG SYS and the Driver GDTX000 EXE GDTX000 EXE is the high performance MS DOS driver for all ICP Controllers In order to obtain the best performance of the ICP Controller under MS DOS this driver should be listed in the first line following the HIMEM SYS device command in the CONFIG SYS file When loaded GDTX000 EXE replaces the BIOS EPROM the so called INTI3H interface of the ICP Controller and also offers a VDS Virtual DMA Services interface This is of particu lar importance for Windows 3 x When using GDTX000 EXE please observe the following GDTX000 EXE must be loaded from the first line following the HIMEM SYS device command in the CONFIG SYS file If HIMEM SYS is not loaded it must be loaded from the very first line of the CONFIG SYS file GDTX000 EXE can be loaded in the U
14. Intelligent Computer Peripherals 71 GDTSEIUP Version 3 04 Apr A2 1998 Copyright 1997 98 ICP vortex Computersysteme GmbH Configure Disk Farametery Initia 0 nitialize Di h Disconnect a Capt MB Drive 8702 Drive F TLFC Ru FCAL A 2 A SEAGATE STI9171FC RU 8633 FCAL A 124 B SEAGATE ST19171 C RU 8538 FCAL A 125 B FC 1 0 Processor Rescan for neu device F2 Extended Information With Fibre Channel devices there are only view settings which are relevant They should be On or Enabled Note Fibre Channel devices are also controlled by the SCSI protocol With real SCSI devices there are more parameters to describe the device GDTSETUP Version 3 04 Apr 1998 C Copyright 1997 98 ICP vortex Computersysteme GmbH onfigure Controller onfigure husica 151 Drive Cho ID LIH Vendor Brodie t Atty Cap MB Drive SESI 6 0 ET S HBF H3 cessor JE Parameter Initial 1ze RU nitialize Disk 1 Sync Transfer Enable The SCSI bus allows an asynchronous and a synchronous transfer Every SCSI device must be able to perform the first type of transfer the second one is optional The advantage of the synchronous transfer lies in a higher data transfer rate as the signal transfer times on the possibly long SCSI cable have no influence on the transfer rate anymore Two SCSI bus Intelligent Computer Peripherals 72 participants wanting
15. Not occupied Occupied and end terminated Occupied and end terminated Occupied and end terminated Not occupied Occupied and both ends terminated Off i e the connector is located between the both ends Occupied and both ends terminat Not occupied Off ed i e the connector is located between both ends Intelligent Computer Peripherals 43 B 5 3 SCSI ID All participants on the SCSI bus must have a unique identification number that is each number can only be used once on a given cable Each SCSI device is uniquely addressed through its SCSI ID All participants of a SCSI bus must have a different SCSI ID The factory set SCSI ID of the ICP Controller SCSI channel is 7 Upto 15 SCSI devices can be connected to a single SCSI bus SCSI IDs are 0 to 15 7 is the default for the ICP Controller On hard disks CDROMs tape streamers etc the SCSI ID is normally set through jumpers or small DIP switches The ICP Controllers offer a far more comfortable method software switches in the GDTSETUP program allow you to easily set the SCSI ID of an ICP SCSI channel It is recommended to leave the default ID value at 7 Some operating systems quire that the SCSI ID of certain SCSI device e g tape streamer CDROM is set to a par ticular value for more information please refer to the appropriate chapter in this manual B 5 4 ICP SCSI Accessories Fast SCSI External SCSI connector with an Connection of an external Nar
16. Cluster Module 22 Cluster RAIDYNE amp 22 Clustering Support 16 CMOS components 20 28 Configuration Data of the Disk Array 180 Controller Events Window 253 Copper cabling 32 corelSCS 67 122 123 124 CPU cooler 56 CTPCI ct magazine PCI tool 121 CTRLSRV CFG 170 CTRLSRV NLM 170 CTRLTRAN DSK 132 DB 9 adapter 30 DB9 connector 17 Delayed Write option 54 Disconnect 72 168 Disk Array Maximum Number of Drives 111 102 Disk Arrays Build State 112 250 Disk Arrays Error State 251 Disk Arrays Error Status 113 Disk Arrays Expand State 113 Disk Arrays Fail State 112 251 262 Disk Arrays Hot Fix drive 106 Disk Arrays Hot Fix Drive 106 Disk Arrays Hot Fix Mechanism 112 Disk Arrays Hot Plug RAID 4 5 168 Disk Arrays Idle State 112 250 Disk Arrays Level of Redundancy 111 Disk Arrays Minimum Number of Drives 111 Disk Arrays Online Capacity Expansion 168 Disk Arrays Online RAID level migration 168 Disk Arrays Phase Diagram 112 Disk Arrays RAID 0 97 Disk Arrays RAID 1 17 58 111 Disk Arrays RAID 10 17 97 Disk Arrays RAID 4 17 58 97 111 168 175 Disk Arrays RAID 5 58 97 111 168 Disk Arrays Ready State 112 250 Disk Arrays Rebuild State 113 Disk Arrays Stripe Size 98 Disk Duplexing 86 Disks Initialization 69 88 DPMEM Dual Ported Memory 49 50 DPMEM System BIOS problems 51 Dual port controller 29 ECC SDRAM Module 17 21 error messages 260 ESM 28 Exa
17. PCI 9 9 1 i SEAGATE STS2l68N RH 2068 Fragment 4 2 J 3 6 4 1 J 8 9 B 1 Select the position of the new disk drive 3 ne In xu m sec Intelligent Computer Peripherals 207 GDT Controller Monitor ICF Intelli ent Computer A TH C Copyright 1994 1997 ICP vortex H rra omputersysteme GM t d Controller Do you want to add this Position Chn ID drive to the array union size MB Drive 2 1 49 C 4 2068 Fragment 3 PCL 49 1 4 RIG 2 5 Kl 3 i 6 POL 0 9 4 7 49 A J 8 KIl8 B 1 1 Um A m sat The new drive is built into the Array Drive According to the Expansion Progress Informa tion this takes approximately 18 minutes During the expansion the Array Drive s state is ready expand GDT Controller Monitor v1 25 ICF Intelli ent Computer ee TH C Copyright 1994 1997 ICP vortex H rra omputersysteme GM t Controller Cache Sett Physical D Array Settings Lo Dr Parity Verify Pari t Recalculate Hot Plug Replace Drive progress Inlonaztion Expansion GDT6537RP in Local 5us Sampling Rate a sac As expected the Array Drive s capacity is now 600MB Hot Fix Drive Intelligent Computer Peripherals 208 GDT Controller Monitor ICF Intelli ent C
18. e A Lj gt Log Drive 32782 1 ID 4 1 ID 7 SCSI B ID 1 LUN D DISK 4 IBM DCAS 33 SCSI Processor DCAS 32160W Log Drive 0 Here you can set the refresh rate for the Physical or the Logical Configuration windows This is the rate which is used by the ICP RAID Navigator to KA i update the contents of the physical and logical configura windows Refresh Information every fio seconds f d Cancel The options are Refresh on Activates and deactivates the window update Refresh if window becomes active Update the window if it becomes active Refresh information every seconds Sets the frequency for automatic window re freshes The menu options you can select here are also available if you click the right mouse button on the corresponding icon in the Physical or the Logical Configuration windows Intelligent Computer Peripherals 230 K 3 Select Controller This window is used to select an ice RAID Navigator Select Controller ICP Controller for all further ac File View Window Help tions within the ICP RAID Naviga gt ga gt 48 tor In a first step you should select ai el ESI the desired protocol Windows a A Me NT 95 98 Sockets IBM NetBIOS 6 for the communication between the ICP RAID Navigator and the system which is equipped with the ICP Controller by double clicking on the protocol ic
19. onfigure Control ler onfigure Physical Devic Fong Drives oylca elect Logical Drive Mame Status Capacita Type B DISK Al ok IR 1 2 eate new Logica an AA MB Disk Host Physical Drive Chin Vendor Product Attn MB Drive FCAL A 2 0 i SEACATE STI9171FC RU 8682 FCAL A 124 A SEAGATE ST19171FC RU 8538 SPACE Select Deselect drive ENTER End selection Select the initialized hard disk with the lt SPACE gt bar it becomes marked with an and press ENTER GDTSETUP Version 3 04 Apr 1998 Copyright 1997 98 ICP vortex Computersysteme GmbH TET Controller fi jure Phy sical Devic ele Do you want to create a SINGLE drive from t CAUTION All data will he destro 1 a FCAL A 2 Mi SEAGATE STISI71FC RU 8682 FCAL A 124 8 SEAGATE STI9L71FC RU 8538 SPACE Select Deselect drive ENTER End selection For security reasons you will be asked again if you want to use the selected disk to create a Logical Drive As we are sure of our choice we confirm with Yes GDTSETUP allows you to limit the hard disk size for this Logical Drive This becomes interesting when you config ure disk arrays and you want to make sure that future drives you want to bring into the disk array e g for the capacity expansion or for replacement purposes fit It would be bad luck if the new drive only had 8537MB GDTSETUP couldn t accept it To avoid this occuring you could
20. 6 4 7 i y 1 Select the position of the new disk div 1 For this example we select the first position and receive the following message GDT Controller Monitor v1 25 s Computer Peripherals TM isk Drives Position Chn ID Status Vendor Type Atte Size MB Drive B PC 0 3 6 1 SEAGATE 2160 RH 2068 valid GD Do you really want to replace Position Chn I this drive in the mirror union Size MB Drive PC 0 9 No Ki PCI 9 9 PCI 9 9 GD in Local Sus Sampling The Hot Plug function now informs us that all devices on the I O channel to which the drive to be exchanged is connected have to be temporarily halted In addition it shows which Host Drives are affected by this brief halt With regard to the new drive we are given some important information Required storage capacity ID and possible SCSI bus termination The lt ENTER gt key may only be pressed when the new drive is ready at hand and after hav ing checked its capacity ID and SCSI termination the latter two may have to be changed In our example we presume that these preparations have been made so we press ENTER in order to halt the I O channel Intelligent Computer Peripherals 191 GDT Controller Monitor 25 i Ara Computer Peripherals TM isk Drives Position Chn ID Status Vendor Atte Size MB Drive PCI 9 A 6 i SEAGATE 57321600 RH 2068 valid
21. Configure Physical Devices Conti ure Logical Drives p mE In our case we take RAID 5 and press ENTER Intelligent Computer Peripherals 98 GDTSETUP Version 3 84D Apr B2 1998 Copyright 1997 98 ICP vortex Coupitercucteue GmbH vanced Setup Configure Controller Configure Physical Devices Configure Logical Drives i ele au GDTSETUP asks for the Stripe Size This is the size of the stripes into which the data is di vided The default is 32KB which we leave for this example and therefore press ENTER Note 32KB stripe size is suggested because in various performance tests it has proved to be the best value GDTSETUP displays a security request which we confirm with Y GDTSETUP Version 3 040 Apr 1998 Copyright 1997 98 ICP vortex Computersysteme GmbH y etup Configure Controller Configure Physical Devices onfigure Logical Drives RR NE Do you want to create a Array Drive from the selected drives CAUTION All data will be destroyed Y N GDTSETUP allows you to limit the capacity of the disk array This may be of interest if your installation requires an exact size for a disk array Normally the full capacity is used In our example we press lt ENTER gt Intelligent Computer Peripherals 99 GDTSETUP Version 3 04 Apr B2 1998 Copyright 1997 98 ICP vortex GmbH anced Setup Configure
22. Copyright 1997 98 ICP vortex Computersysteme GmbH etup onfigure Controller onfigure Physical Devices figure Logical Drives re i elec Capacity 1 apac pe DENEN MB Disk Status DISK_Al ok MES AD ME LES belongs to Host 8 Host When the Logical Drive is selected confirm with lt ENTER gt GDTSETUP displays now a list of possible RAID levels available with the number of Logical Drives selected In our case it is RAID 0 data striping RAID 1 Move the selection bar to RAID 1 and press ENTER Intelligent Computer Peripherals 85 GDTSETUP Version 3 84D Apr B2 1998 Copyright 1997 98 ICP vortex Coupitercucteue GmbH vanced Setup Configure Controller Configure Physical Devices Configure Logical Drives i ele au GDTSETUP displays a security request which we answer with Y GDISETUP Version 3 84D Apr B2 1998 Copyright 1997 98 ICP vortex tene GmbH vanced Setup Configure Controller Configure Physical Devices Configure Logical Drives Fon ise ray Drives Do you want to create a Array Drive from the ele CAUTION All data will be destroyed cted d Y N As you can easily recognize we have created a new Array Drive of the Type RAID 1 Its state is build When we leave GDTSETUP at the end of this example you will see that the ICP Controller automatically copies
23. Events inerti ICP Service ELSA c Q Service Status The service is running MonCtrl IV Log Events Poll Interval 0 A ET 3 Workstations Add Bemove Printers Regional Settings Tape Devices r Device Driver Service for ICP Disk Array Controller Arguments In the IOCTLSrv property sheet you can add remove users which have remote access to the ICP Controller with the ICP RAID Navigator Passwords are encrypted ICP Service Events IOCTLSrv User Name reinhardt Password Access full C read only Add Remove Intelligent Computer Peripherals 257 The ICP Mail tool gathers messages from the ICP Service generates standard mail mes sages and sends them to pre defined workstations After loading ICPMAIL EXE and selecting Settings you can configure the mailing tool ICPMa l x ICPMail ICPH ail Eg Look for events every f minutes Event output to Local system IV Log file Remote system Mail If you select Local System all messages are displayed on the server itself If you select Log file you are asked for a log file path name messages are recorded into this file Log File Name Save in e icpmail Save as type Log Files LOG Cancel Remote System allows you to add workstations to which messages are send Workstation Names DEMOMACHINES Intelligent Comput
24. Icon Description double click right click opens opens Single Disk Logical Drive Drive Mame Information Hot Fix Drive Add RAID1 Component Failed missing Hot Fix or Single Disk Chaining Drive Replace Drive Hot Plug Replace Drive Physical Drives These are the hard disks You cannot change any settings here If you want to change the settings you have to do this in the physical configuration window Physical You can t change the disk settings here Disk Use the Physical Configuration window instead Intelligent Computer Peripherals 242 K 5 1 The Host Drive Information Window Double click on the Host Drive icon This window contains information on a Host Drive like the Host Drive s capacity and a pos sible partition table Drive No The Host Drive number of the Host Drive The Host Drives are re ported to the system one after the other beginning with the lowest Drive Number If the corresponding ICP Controller is the first con troller in the system the system will boot from the Host Drive with the lowest number Name The name of the Host Drive A Host Drive is automatically given a name during the configuration It can be renamed by selecting the menu Drive Name of the menu list you get after clicking with the right mouse button on the Host Drive icon Capacity The capacity reported to the operating system The size of a Host D
25. Intelligent Computer Peripherals 178 GDT Controller Monitor v1 25 ICP Computer C Copyright 1994 1997 ICP vortex Computersysteme GmbH ain Menu Select Controller Host Drives Logical Drives Physical Drives sache d gu View Change Settings Fig Toggle Colors GDT6937RP in Local 5us Sampling Rate 1 8 sec GDT Controller Monitor v1 25 ICP ene Computer C Copyright 1994 1997 ICP vortex Computersysteme GmbH on Cache 512 Read Hits Read Hits rite Hits rite Hits Replacements Flush Writes Cache Writes GDT6337RP in Local 5us Ticks 14 Samples 2 Rate 1 05 Reset J 2 6 Sampling Rate By setting the sampling rate you can choose the interval at which the ICP Controller deliv ers new measurements According to the operating system used the sampling rate can be set to a maximum of 60 seconds The default setting is 1 second Intelligent Computer Peripherals 179 Sampling Rate New Sampling Rate 10 1 10 sec Sampling Rate J 3 The Menu View Change Settings This menu includes a set of very powerful options and functions for the online maintenance and diagnosis of RAID 1 4 5 10 Host Drives Intelligent Computer Peripherals 180 View Change Settings From this menu you can select further submenus Controller Cache Settings Physical Drives Logical Drives Array Drives Save Information Before going into
26. TH Copyright 1994 1997 ICP vortex Computersysteme GM et Menu E nnd Select Controller Disabling the Audible Alarm will turn oft the alarm hut the rable which aie it to come on will still n lEWLnange sete GDT6937RP in Local 5us Sampling Rate 1 8 sec After selecting the Array Drive we choose the Replace Mirror Drive option t Controller Monitor v1 25 ICP Intelli C Copyright 1994 1997 E JE 091 ent Computer TH omputersysteme GmbH ical Drive Settings rive Name Phys que Saye Information 1 Set Log Mirror Drive Hot Plug ET Mirror Drive Hot Plug Add Pool Hot Fix Drive Hot Plug Remove Pool Hot Fix Drive Pool Hot Fix Access GDT6937RP in Local_Sys Sampling Rate 1 Before the new drive can be added the missing drive has to be deleted in the RAID con figuration Intelligent Computer Peripherals 194 GDT Controller Monitor v1 25 ICF Intelli ent Computer in TH Copyright 1994 1997 Ey ET H omputersysteme GM t drivels missing You AR DE missing drives first Saye Intonm Mirror Drive Hot Pug Mirror Drive Hot Plug Add Pool Hot Fix Drive Hot Plug Remove Pool Hot Fix Drive Pool Hot Fix Access GDT6937RP in Local_Sys Sampling Rate 1 GDT Controller Monitor ICP Intelli Copyright 1994 1997 ent Computer periphe
27. i e under MS DOS Loading GDTSETUP with lt CTRL gt lt G gt from the Flash RAM is very comfortable since no op erating system is required to carry out the configuration and setup works On the other side loading GDTSETUP from disk i e under MS DOS becomes necessary for tasks like partitioning or enabling a totally disabled ICP BIOS which includes GDTSETUP 3 1 The Express Setup Function of GDTSETUP Whenever you load GDTSETUP and select the desired ICP Controller it comes up in its EXPRESS Setup mode This mode does not require any previous knowledge If you choose this function GDTSETUP carries out the complete installation entirely on its own provid ing you for example with a fully operational RAID 5 Array Drive with optimized settings for instance with all features of a given drive activated Intelligent Computer Peripherals 63 GDTSETUP Version 3 04 Apr H2 1998 Copyright 1997 98 ICP vortex Computersysteme GmbH After selecting Configure Host Drives select Create new Host Drive GDTSETUP Version 3 04 Apr 1998 C Copyright 199 ICP vortex Computersysteme GmhH xpress Set onfigure 05 ost Drive nane Status imu E acity Type belongs to A DISK A ok AA MB Disk Logical A rere mu si OO eee Refresh GDTSETUP scans the system for hard disks i e drives which are not yet part of other Host Drives Use the lt SPACE gt bar to select the desired hard
28. 1 Idle State This state is characterized by the fact that the redundant information of the disk array has never been entirely created The disk array is in this state after its first configuration and until you quit GDTSETUP If an error should occur while the array is in the build state the array returns to the idle state exception if during build mode the dedicated drive of RAID 4 fails the mode changes to fail 11 2 Build State After the disk array has been configured for the first time it assumes the build state as soon as you quit GDTSETUP While the array is in the build state redundancy information is cal culated and stored to the hard disks of the array 11 3 Ready State The disk array is fully operational when in the ready state All redundant information is pre sent that is a hard disk can fail without impairing the functionality of the disk array This is the normal state of a disk array The state ready expand indicates that the RAID level and or capacity are currently migrated expanded C 11 4 Fail State The disk array changes to the fail state whenever a Logical Drive fails Redundancy informa tion is still present thus allowing the remaining hard disks to continue working This state Intelligent Computer Peripherals 113 should be eliminated as soon as possible by replacing the defective hard disk If a so called Hot Fix drive has previously been assigned to a disk array with GDTSETUP the c
29. 4 ICP Controllers in one computer system The tool GDTSYNC in the directory etc carries out a UNIX SYNC command update super block and causes all buffers still present in ICP s cache to be written to the Logical Drives It is advisable to use this tool before shutting down the system When using Direct Access Devices with exchangeable media e g removable hard disks a media has to be inserted when the system is booted otherwise the device is not available under UNIX Not Direct Access Devices streamer tapes CD ROMs etc can be switched on even after system power up they will still be recognized by GDTSCAN afterwards Intelligent Computer Peripherals Intelligent Computer Peripherals Chapter Using UnixWare 164 I Using UnixWare After having exposed the installation of the ICP Controller as well as that of the Host Drives in chapters B and C we would now like to give you some hints and pieces of advice on how to install the operating system UnixWare version 2 x and UnixWare 7 1 1 Transparency of Host Drives The structure of the Host Drives which have been installed with GDTSETUP in chapter C is not known to UNIX Le the operating system does not recognize that a given Host Drive consists of a number of hard disks forming a disk array To UNIX this Host Drive simply appears as one single hard disk with the capacity of the disk array This complete transpar ency represents the easiest way to ope
30. 48 B 7 PCI 2 x Compatibility 48 B 7 2 Switching On the PCI Computer System snnt 49 50 B 8 Checking the ICP Controller 52 B 8 1 Loading 52 B 8 2 Updating the ICP Controller With New Firmware and BIOS lt 55 B 8 3 56 58 What is the Aim of Quick Setup enne 58 C2 What is the ICP Controller Firmware 58 2 1 The Different RAID Levels cccsssccssssessssssssseesssssssssesscssssssesssesssssseessssssssessessssecsesesssneesecssssnseseeesssneed 59 C3 How are the ICP Firmware Features Activated 62 C3 1 The Express Setup Function of GDTSETUP sssccssccccssssecsssssssssesssssssssesesssssssesesssssueseeeesssneseseessseeesss 62 C 4 Levels of Hierarchy Within the 66 C 5 Using CDROMs DATs Tapes ein anne 67 C6 Example 1 Installing a Single Hard Disk nnn 68 C7 Example 2 Installing a Mirroring Array RAID 1
31. 5 and 10 disk arrays In order to assist the following considerations we define the term time without redundancy TWR Set apart the time needed to set up the disk array state build the time without redundancy should be kept as short as possible Let us assume that one of the hard disks of the RAID 5 disk array we set up with example fails The disk array is without redundancy TWR starts to run Any superfluous prolongation of the TWR because you have to get a replacement drive or because you did not realize the failure immediately since you didn t hear the ICP Controller s alarm signal or because nobody checked the file server increases the risk of data loss which will occur if a second drive should fail There fore new redundancy should be created as soon as possible and in an entirely automated manner Integrating a Hot Fix drive as an immediately available and auto replacing drive is the only way to keep the TWR as short as possible Only a Hot Fix drive can ensure optimal disk array security and constant data availability Of course a Hot Fix drive is not compul sory If you control the disk array at regular intervals and immediately replace a defective drive by shutting down the system or hot plugging you can do without a Hot Fix drive C 11 States of a RAIDYNE Disk Array An Array Drive under the RAIDYNE operating system can assume seven different opera tional modes Idle Ready Fail Build Rebuild Expand and Error 11
32. Drivels Please oe the new disk drive with SCSI ID 3 Check if 5051 bus terminators have to he added or removed The new disk drive must have at least 200 MB capacity Fress RETURN to stop the SCSI channel for unplusging pl PCI 9 9 PCT 0 9 PCI 6 9 GD in Local Sus Sampling Katez The following message indicates that channel B was stopped for the time of the actual Hot Plug Intelligent Computer Peripherals 197 GDT Controller Monitor yl 25 ICP rip oat Computer TH Copyright 1994 1997 omputersysteme GmbH Rn in 1 te e new disk dri at sr channel B SCSI ID 3 MUST NOT DO ANY UNPLUCEING OR PLUGGING ON nut SCSI CHANNELS DOING 0 MIGHT CAUSE SERIOUS HARDWARE D data on the new disk drive will be destroyed After confirming unplugging or plugging is not allowed cause serious hardware damage PC 0 9 PC 6 9 PC 09 Now the new hard disk is added as a mirror to the selected Logical Drive The updated list of available Logical Drives shows the change The Logical Drive changed its type to Mirror and the data on the new hard disk are currently synchronized indicated through the be hind the v GDT Controller Monitor ICF Intelli ent Computer A TH Copyright 1994 1997 H omputersysteme GM t Fa Drive Information Fray Save Information ampling Rate View Change Settings GDT6537RP in Local 5u
33. Drives a Then configure the Array Drives e g Array Drives with RAID 0 1 4 5 and 10 Finally configure the Host Drives C 5 Using CDROMs DATs Tapes etc SCSI device that is not a SCSI hard disk or a removable hard disk or that does not behave like one is called a Not Direct Access Device Such a device is not configured with GDTSETUP and does not form a Logical or Host Drive SCSI devices of this kind are either operated through the ASPI interface Advanced SCSI programming Interface MS DOS Windows Novell NetWare or OS 2 or are directly accessed from the operating system UNIX Windows NT For more information on how to Intelligent Computer Peripherals 68 use these devices please refer to the corresponding chapters of this manual Note hard disks and removable hard disks are called Direct Access Devices However there are some Not Direct Access Devices for instance certain MO drives which can be operated just like re movable hard disks if they have been appropriately configured before for example by changing their jumper setting But enough on the dry theory Now here are the examples which explain step by step all the necessary basics for setting up Host Drives with your ICP Controller C6 Example 1 Installing a Single Hard Disk We presume that the controller and the hard disks have been installed properly Step 1 Loading GDTSETUP You can load GDTSETUP in two ways l Press the lt CTRL gt l
34. F 5 Installation of a Removable Hard Disk Removable hard disks e g SyQuest IOMEGA or magneto optical devices MODs are con trolled by the ICP Controller in two fundamentally different modes Mode 1 The removable hard disk is treated like a normal hard disk The data passes through the cache of the ICP Controller and the media needs to be initialized with GDTSETUP Intelligent Computer Peripherals 145 Mode 2 The removable hard disk is handled as Raw Device This means that the removable device is directly controlled by Windows NT without any further interaction of the control ler Consequently the data is not cached by the ICP cache and the media does not need to be initialized with GDTSETUP The advantage of mode lies in a decisively better perform ance due to caching On the other hand the relatively complicated procedure of media changing presents a disadvantage The opposite is true when adopting mode 2 The media change is easy and the media are compatible with other disk controllers e g NCR The performance is rather low since the data cannot be cached on the ICP Controller To install a removable hard disk as a Raw Device the media must not be initialized with GDTSETUP and the device must be set to a SCSI ID equal to or greater than 2 In addition the parameters of the ICP driver GDTX SYS need to be configured differently in the Win dows NT Registry HKEY LOCAL MACHINE SYSTEM CurrentControlSet Services gdtx Pa
35. FF Example 2 The Microsoft EMM386 EXE Manager is used The ICP driver GDTX000 EXE has been loaded from the CONFIG SYS DEVICE EMM386 EXE X D000 D3FF Note You may have to add the path for EMM386 EXE Other parameters may follow the excluded areas D 5 Using Windows 3 x In order to be able to install Windows 3 x a fully operational MS DOS operating system has to be present on the chosen partition Furthermore the first entry in the CONFIG SYS file behind the HIMEM SYS line has to be DEVICE GDTX000 EXE if necessary add the correct path name after the symbol and before GDTX000 EXE A Now install Windows according to the instructions given in the Windows manual Gen erally you start with Disk 1 Setup from which you load the setup program This Setup pro gram guides you through the entire installation and prompts you to insert further floppy disks Intelligent Computer Peripherals 122 After the installation is completed the Setup program will ask you if you want to reset the system This reset must be performed C If you change to the directory WINDOWS after the reset and type in WIN lt ENTER gt Windows will be loaded Although thanks to its high computing power the ICP Controller is just right for disk intensive operating systems such as Windows it will not show its full ca pacity yet The reason for this is that the communication between Windows and the ICP Controller is not yet carried out by
36. Feb 08 20 32 17 Adapter 0 Array Drive 1 drive build started Mon Feb 08 20 32 08 Adapter 0 general error on Host Drive 1 Please check the SCSI devices of this dri Save As Load Clear Log Clear Events Intelligent Computer Peripherals 254 K 8 ICP RAID Navigator Help The ICP RAID Navigator includes an online help function You can either choose the Help menu or the pointer with the question mark to obtain online help on a specific icon or function There is also an index which allows you to search for certain keywords and or topics 910 About ICP RAID Navigator ICPRNAV Version 1 02 EGP Copyright C 1998 99 ICP vortex Computersysteme GmbH ICP RAID Navigator Help Datei Bearbeiten Lesezeichen Optionen 7 indes 77 The Logical Configuration Window ye View menu Hilfethemen ICP RAID Navigator Help Contents Inhalt Index Suchen the selected ICP Controller The complete configuration is shown ae Host Drives followed by the Array Drives if RAID is configured 1 Geben Sie die ersten Buchstaben des zu suchenden Wortes ein Drives To get detailed information on the single devices double click on eas The windows that will open then depend on the type of the devici 2 Klicken Sie auf einen Indexeintrag und anschlie end auf Anzeigen Rescan ID s TN To change the logical configuration of the drives click the right m ation of dir select t
37. Hot Plug is completed This affects Host Drivels Please a ah the new disk drive with SCSI ID 4 Check if 5051 bus terminators have to he added or removed The new disk drive must have at least 208 MB capacity Fress RETURN to stop the SCSI channel for unplugging pluggi PCI u 9 PCT 0 9 PCI 6 9 In Local 505 sampl ng GDT Controller Monitor ICP Intelli ent Computer Peri Copyright 1994 1997 E omputersysteme GM peral TH t sto lug in the new disk drive i a channel SCSI ID 4 QU MUST NOT DO ANY UNPLUGGING OR PLUGGING SCSI CHANNELS DOING 0 MIGHT CAUSE SERIOUS HARDWARE DAMAGE All data on the new disk drive will he After confirming unplugging or plugging is not allowed cause Serious hardware damage Plu f GD In Local 45 Sampling Katez After the completion of this function the Pool of Hot Fix drives contains a new drive in our example here it is the only drive To allow a RAID 1 or RAID 10 Array Drive access to the Hot Fix Pool use the Pool Hot Fix Access menu J 3 5 7 J 3 5 6 Hot Plug Remove Pool Hot Fix Drive It may become necessary to remove a certain drive from the Hot Fix Pool Intelligent Computer Peripherals 201 GDT Controller Monitor v1 29 ICP Intelligent Computer Peripherals TM rives No Atte Size MB Drive is Position Chn ID Status Vendor Type Select one of
38. ICP vortex Computersysteme GmbH TET etup Configure Controller igure Phusical Devices onfigure Logical Drives VOTE EB ITA elec Status Array Drive Mane Status Atirih Capacity Type HP 1 ok TRU a MB Host 05 3 DISK B2 ok RW 8692 MB Di tl Host 3 SPACE Select Deselect drive F2 Select master ENTER End selection Move the selection bar with the cursor key 4 to the next entry and press the lt SPACE gt bar again It is marked with an pressing the lt SPACE gt bar again undoes your choice Re peat this selection until all three Logical Drives are marked Intelligent Computer Peripherals 97 GDTSETUP Version 3 84D Apr 1998 ptup Configure Controller Configure Physical Devices Conti ure Logical Drives r i p au n2 Status helongs to B DISK Al ok RU ost 1 DISK_BA ok Host 2 Bi ok Host When the last Logical Drive is selected confirm with lt ENTER gt GDTSETUP now displays a list of possible RAID levels available with the number of Logical Drives selected RAID 0 pure data striping without redundancy RAID I disk mirroring RAID 4 data striping with dedicated parity drive RAID 5 data striping with striped parity RAID 10 RAID 0 combined with RAID 1 GDTSETUP Version 3 04 Apr 1998 Copyright 1997 98 ICP vortex Computersysteme GmbH Configure Controller
39. K 4 3 Direct Access Devices ee 234 K 4 4 Non direct access devices raw 238 K 5 Logical Configuration Window 239 K 5 1 The Host Drive Information Window sn 242 K 5 2 The Array Drive Information Window nnn 242 Intelligent Computer Peripherals rc K 5 3 The Logical Drive Information Window 243 K 5 4 Change the name of a Drive tnnt 244 K 5 5 Removed Host DIVE a ee re 244 K 5 6 Create a new Host Dia ua ana an 244 inte udo ce cit 245 5 8 Parity 246 K 5 9 Progress Information ee 246 K 5 10 Expansion of an Ay tat icta ta E tette tiu tenet 247 K 5 11 Add a Hot Fix 248 K 5 12 Remove a Hot Fix Drive 248 K 5 13 Hot Fix Pool Ass ee ee 249 K 5 14 Add a Component Mirror a 249 K 5 15 Remove a RAID 1 Component Remove a Mirror 249 K 5 16 Replace a Logical Drive 250 K 5 17 The Different States of an Array Drive 250 K 6 The Statistics WindOW ccc ccccssssesssssssssecsscssssseesscssssssessessssuesesssssssesesseessveesecstssseesscanssneesseesssnesse
40. PCI interrupt This means that the PCI computer system with its motherboard and PCI system BIOS must meet the following requirements l The PCI computer system must automatically assign map the ICP Controller BIOS to an adequate address in the lower 1 area of the computer system s main memory 2 The PCI computer system must map the ICP Controller s Dual Ported Memory needed for high performance operation to an adequate address in the lower IMB area of the computer system s main memory In addition it has to disable the shad owing of this address space 3 Assigning a system IRQ to a PCI interrupt The PCI 2 x specification prescribes 4 PCI interrupts called INT A INT B INT C and INT D A PCI interrupt must be assigned to a free unused IRQ of the PCI mother board or computer The ICP Controller is shipped with PCI INT A Depending on the manufacturer of the PCI computer system there two ways to carry out this task automatically automatic IRQ routing with the PCI System BIOS setup program Depending on the BIOS manufacturer e g Award Phoenix AMI etc the setup pro gram is activated by pressing a certain key combination shortly after the reset cold boot or warm boot For detailed information on the key combination and the jump ers locations and settings please refer to the system manual of your PCI mother board or computer Intelligent Computer Peripherals 49 The System is not fully PCI com
41. and press lt ENTER gt Intelligent Computer Peripherals 119 GDTSETUP Version 3 84D Apr B2 1998 Copyright 1997 98 ICP vortex Coupitercucteue GmbH Host Drive Change Drive Name Suap Host Drives Remove Host Drive Split Host Drive Merge Host Drives Host Drives ost Drive p a acity Type belongs to artition Drive M na Logical 0 View Partitions Mb i nformation Refresh Partition xtended Partition Logical DOS Drive In the upcoming window select Primary Partition and confirm with lt ENTER gt GDTSETUP Version 3 04 Apr 1998 Copyright 1997 98 ICP vortex Computersysteme GmbH Host Drive Change Drive Name Host Drives Remove Host Drive Split Host Drive Merge Host Drives Select Drive Size MB 8 2047 2047 artltlon Prive View Partitions reate Partition nformation Refresh Remove Partition hange Active Partition Now you can determine the size of the primary partition In our example we choose to use 2047MB of the disk capacity for the primary partition and therefore enter 2047 and simply confirm with lt ENTER gt Now select View Partitions again You can see that the primary parti tion has been successfully installed and has the active state A which is necessary to boot MS DOS from this partition D Now leave GDTSETUP by pressing lt ESC gt After a few requests and messages from GDTSETUP the system reboots
42. applications running on the server often leads to the following problem The number of Dirty Cache Buffers increases tre mendously and the server is then not stable In order to avoid this situation the following parameters should be modified 1 Increase the number of concurrent disk cache writes for the disk subsystem set maximum concurrent disk cache writes This parameter can be increased up to 500 for high performance controllers and fast hard disks 2 Decrease the delayed write standard parameter set dirty disk cache delay time This parameter sets the time whereafter dirty buffers are written flushed from the cache of NetWare to the hard disk The minimum value is 0 8 seconds which influences the server performance substantially Therefore care should be taken not to go below 0 8 seconds E 5 5 ICP Controller and Non ASPI Compatible Controllers If an ICP Controller is operated under NetWare together with a further controller host adapter which does not support the ASPI standard SCSI Raw Devices cannot be operated on both controllers tapes CDROMs In general NetWare gives preference to controllers which support the ASPI Standard e g ICP Adaptec As soon as ASPITRAN DSK is loaded Auto Loading Module tapes and CDROMs on the ASPI non compatible controller are no longer recognized To avoid this problem the file ASPITRAN DSK can be deactivated via a modification Please note After this modification no other Raw
43. be labeled with the above information The following is an example of such a label Cxy zt C controller number X channel y ID z Logical Drive number terminated notterminated with SCSI hard disks Example 1 SGI A 6 3 controller number 1 SCSI channel A SCSI ID 6 Logical Drive number 3 terminated The menu option Save Information of GDTSETUP GDTMON program can be of help when setting up the documentation How does the Hot Plug mechanism work During the Hot Plug the I O channel of the ICP Controller to which the drive to be ex changed is connected is temporarily halted for the time needed for the exchange so that the drive can be disconnected from the I O channel and replaced without any risk Af ter the replacement the I O channel halt is lifted and the firmware automatically begins to rebuild the new drive The halting and the halt lifting of the I O channel is controlled by the Hot Plug function The Hot Plug should be carried out as quick as possible Intelligent Computer Peripherals 182 J 3 2 Controller This option displays details on the ICP Controller For example how much Cache RAM the ICP Controller has and what the current termination setting of the SCSI channel is GDT Controller Monitor yl 25 ICP eT ent Computer TH Copyright 1994 1997 ICP vortex Computersysteme Controller Information Controller Type GDT6537RF Processor Du 3 3 33MHz 28920813 188
44. complete transpar ency represents the easiest way to operate disk arrays under DOS neither DOS nor the PCI computer need to be involved in the administration of these complex disk array configura tions D 2 Partitioning a Host Drive and Transferring MS DOS You can partition the Host Drives installed in chapter C with GDTSETUP as well as with the MS DOS program FDISK However in our explanation we shall only use GDTSETUP For further information on FDISK please refer to your MS DOS manual During the following installation instructions we assume that there is not yet a boot disk in the computer sys tem Therefore the following steps aim at installing a primary DOS partition on the Host Drive previously installed with GDTSETUP see chapter C activating this partition and transferring MS DOS to this partition Our objective is to be able to boot MS DOS directly from this partition at the end of the installation First of all we would like to draw your at tention to a common operating error which is often made when Host Drives are parti tioned Many users ignore that an MS DOS boot partition has to have the state active If the partition is not active the system will attempt to boot MS DOS but will hang straight away Very often the system message ROM BASIC NOT FOUND SYSTEM HALTED is dis played in the 40 lines of text mode You can easily remedy this problem by booting the system from an MS DOS floppy disk and then activating the
45. config ured as Host Drives This is also called raw service In this case the ICP Controller does not cache the data to from the reserved SCSI device This reservation is important for re movable hard disks If they are controlled by the ICP Controller and are a Host Drive a me dia change is very difficult Non Direct Access Devices like CD ROMs Streamers DATs etc do not require a reservation IMPORTANT The reservation is only possible with not initialized SCSI devices Use GDTSETUP to de initialize an already initialized device As already mentioned a reservation for driver versions 1 05 to 1 07 has to be made directly in the driver sources Look for gdth reserve str in usr src linux drivers scsi gdth c You ll find a non active sample entry which you can change according to the coordinates of the device you want to reserve enter Adapter Bus ID and LUN Save the file and compile a new kernel From driver version 1 10 on you can add the parameters for the reservation with the LILO append command Excerpt of etc lilo conf End LILO global section Linux bootable partition config begins image boot vmlinuz root dev sda2 label Linux append gdth reserve_list 1 0 6 0 Linux bootable partition config ends This gdth driver parameter reserves the SCSI device which is connected with ICP Controller second ICP Controller SCSI Bus 0 channel A ID 6 LUN 0 for Linux raw service After each cha
46. data transfer rate depends on the width of the SCSI bus 8 bit narrow SCSI 16 bit wide SCSI and the frequency of the signals on the SCSI bus 10 MHz for Fast SCSI 20 MHz for Ultra SCSI and 40 MHz for Ultra2 SCSI The maximum data transfer rates are Narrow SCSI 8Bit Wide SCSI 16Bit Fast SCSI Ultra SCSI Ultra2 SCSI 80 MB s LVD SCSI low voltage differential only Notes The maximum synchronous data transfer rate between a SCSI device and the ICP Controller can be limited This limitation may become necessary if a particular SCSI cabling does not allow the maximum rate the controller and the drive could achieve In order to select a transfer rate above 10 MB s the protocol has to be set to SCSI III Higher frequencies single ended SCSI require better cablings shorter cables and a professional termination of the SCSI bus Disconnect This SCSI feature enables a SCSI device to disconnect from the SCSI bus By releasing the SCSI bus while the device doesn t need it the bus becomes free for other devices to trans fer or receive data An example for a disconnect situation is a hard disk that needs time to read data from its media after receiving a read command It may then disconnect from the SCSI bus so that other devices can transfer data Later on it reconnects when it is able to deliver the data instantly You can change the disconnect setting for a hard disk in the SCSI parameters Initialize menu Tagged Queue
47. devices Non direct access devices cannot become components of Logical Drives Array Drives or Host Drives These devices are either controlled by a software driver e g an ASPI module the operating system or an application Non direct access devices cannot be initialized or changed in their SCSI parameters with this program Icon Description double click opens CDROM Physical Drive Information Tape drive SAF TE Processor ___ Scanner BS SCSI Printer Example for a Physical Configuration ice RAID Navigator Physical Configuration File View Window Configuration Help eras gt GDT6537 RP 1 ID 7 SCSI Processor CS SCSI B ID 7 SCSI Processor A SCSI C 10 7 SCSI Processor SCSI A ID 4 LUN 0 IBM DCAS 32 160 to Log Drive 0 SCSI B ID 1 LUN D IBM DCAS 32 160 to Log Drive 0 SCSI C ID 0 LUN 0 SCSI C ID 1 LUN 0 SCSI C ID 2 LUN D SEAGATE SEAGATE SEAGATE ST39102LC 739102LC ST39102LC Log Drive 3 to Log Drive 2 to Log Drive 1 Intelligent Computer Peripherals E SCSKC ID 4 LUN 0 SEAGATE ST38102LC 239 K 5 Logical Configuration Window 20 gt This window shows the logical configuration of Host Drives Array Drives and Logical Drives controlled by the selected ICP Controller The complete configuration is shown as a tree starting from the left with the H
48. directly supported by the operating system RAW device EXPRESS and ADVANCED configuration of single disks or RAID 0 1 4 5 and 10 ar ray drives Configuration of the ICP Controller s cache A 5 8 Diagnosis Programs ICP RAID Navigator and GDTMON These two diagnosis programs are very flexible software tools that offer many different di agnosis and maintenance functions during full operation conditions GDTMON has a char acter oriented user surface and is ideally suitable for NetWare and all types of UNIXes including Linux ICP RAID Navigator has a Windows NT compliant graphical user interface GUI and can be operated under Windows 95 98 NT Booth tools can be used on the file server or remotely from an authorized workstation The main functions are Monitoring the disk subsystem performance KB sec and I Os per sec Monitoring the utilization of the on board cache Online configuration of the cache memory Online changes of device parameters Online check of the parity information of RAID 4 and RAID 5 Array Drives Online capacity expansion and RAID level migration of existing Array Drives Hot Plug and Hot Fix Intelligent Computer Peripherals 23 A 5 9 Operating System Driver Software Drivers for the following operating systems are available Operating System Driver included with the Controller Package Yes MS DOS 3 3 to 6 x Novell NetWare 3 11 3 12 4 x 5 x SCO UNIX System V 386 3 2v5 x T
49. disk is modified once again by removing all drivers for the ICP Control lers The Setup Program from Windows 98 can be started after booting from the boot disk in the previously created partition of the host drive The installation of Windows 98 can then be carried out in the usual way After the installa tion has been carried out the driver for the ICP Controller is installed just as in Windows 95 via the device manager also see this chapter Intelligent Computer Peripherals Chapter E Using NetWare 132 E Using Novell NetWare After having explained in chapters B and C the installation of the ICP Controller and the Host Drives we would now like to give you some hints and pieces of advice on how to in stall Novell s operating system Novell NetWare We shall mainly focus on NetWare 3 x NetWare 4 x and NetWare 5 For successful installation it is essential to study the NetWare system manuals thoroughly The information given in this chapter refers to the loading of the ICP NetWare driver s only Transparency of Host Drives The structure of the Host Drives which have been installed with GDTSETUP in chapter C is not known to NetWare I e the operating system does not recognize that a given Host Drive consists of a number of hard disks forming a disk array To NetWare this Host Drive simply appears as one single hard disk with the capacity of the disk array This complete transparency represents the easiest way t
50. e user load on the system otherwise an ex pansion of a large Array Drive can easily take days Intelligent Computer Peripherals 248 K 5 11 Add a Hot Fix Drive Click the right mouse button on the Array Drive icon Use this option to add a Hot Fix Drive to an Array Drive RAID 1 4 5 10 You can choose if you want to add a Private Hot Fix Drive or a Pool Hot Fix Drive Private Hot Fix Drives are assigned to a specific Array Drive and are activated if a member of this Array Drive fails Pool Hot Fix Drives can be used by any Array Drive with enabled Pool Hot Fix Access RAID 1 Array Drives allow only Pool Hot Fix Drives After choosing the type of Hot Fix Drive you can select a Physical Drive from the box which shows all suitable drives Add Hot Fix Drive Pool Hot Fix Private Act Fir SCSI C 15 0 IBM DRHS36D Cancel The capacity of the Hot Fix Drive has to be larger or equal than the capacity of the compo nents of the Array Drive Example The Logical Drives of the Array Drive have 4 2GB capac ity thus the capacity of the Hot Fix Drive has to be 4 2GB or larger The spindle motor of the Hot Fix Drive is normally i e when the Hot Fix Drive is not needed stopped Thus it may take a few seconds until you get a response if you click on that drive Some general notes on Hot Fix Drives One of the reasons that have led you to choose RAID disk arrays definitely lies with the re dundancy that is the data se
51. es ptiona 7529 GDT7529RN 2 Y O 0 1 4 5 10 7619 GDT7619RN 0 1 4 5 10 7629 GDT 629RN 0 1 4 5 10 Intelligent Computer Peripherals 17 A 1 1 Key Features of the ICP Controllers of the GDT RN Series 64 Bit Hardware RAID Controllers with RAID 0 RAID 1 RAID 4 RAID 5 and RAID 10 Array Drives at controller level completely independent of the computer system and the oper ating system Several Array Drives can be operated simultaneously Operation 64 Bit and 32 Bit PCI slots Full Bus Mastering Maximum data transfer rates 132MB sec in a 32 Bit PCI slot and 264MB sec in a 64 Bit PCI slot Private i e for one Array Drive or Pool i e for several Array Drives Hot Fix Drives Online Capacity Expansion Add one or several new disk drives to an existing Array Drive to expand its capacity During the Expansion all data are redundant Online RAID Level Migration Online change of an Array Drive s RAID Level e g from RAID 0 to RAID 5 Online Capacity Expansion and RAID Level migration can be performed simultaneously ROM resident configuration utility GDTSETUP Express Setup option to easily setup Ar ray Drives Press CTRL G to load GDTSETUP long before the operating system is booted ICP RAID Navigator GUI Tool for Windows 95 98 NT GDTMON Character oriented program for Windows 95 98 NT NetWare Linux OS 2 SCO UNIX UnixWare Interactive UNIX Both tools allow the setup and monitoring of IC
52. exchange a defective drive with GDTSETUP Moreover we de scribed the functioning of the so called Hot Fix drive This constantly available spare part when needed automatically integrates itself into the Array Drive and is therefore the quickest means of regaining a redundant Array Drive The Hot Plug function enables the replacement of a drive of an Array Drive either in the ready or fail state while the system continues to run that is without having to shut down the NetWare fileserver for instance A drive replacement may not only become necessary when the drive has already failed but also when there are signs that a failure could occur soon strong whistling of the hard disk or constant retries of the read write head Only those users with thorough knowledge of RAID and the ICP Controller should use the Hot Plug function Improper use can lead to data loss Naturally we have integrated all kinds of security provisions into the ICP Controller and GDTMON But how can we prevent a user from plugging out the wrong drive We recommend that you document each Array Drive immediately after its configuration with GDTSETUP This record should at least com prise the following information which ICP Controller has the Array Drive been connected Which hard disks are part of the Array Drive which SCSI ID have they been set Which SCSI devices terminate a SCSI channel In addition the hard disks themselves should
53. from the Flash RAM or from disk Now load GDTSETUP The first menu asks you to select the desired ICP Controller In our example there is only one ICP Controller installed in the system Therefore simply press ENTER and then F2 to select the Advanced Setup Intelligent Computer Peripherals 69 GDISETUP Version 3 84D Apr B2 1998 Copyright 1997 98 ICP vortex GmbH select Controller Position Features Firmware An UE VIE The main menu gives you the following options As mentioned before we have to go through levels 1 to 4 to install the hard disk with almost nothing to do on levels 3 and 4 GDTSETUP Version 3 04 Apr 1998 Copyright 1997 98 ICP mputersysteme GmbH iced Setup Conti on m ogical Drivas Level 2 Configure Array Drives Level 3 Save fs Host Drives Level 4 Save Information Express Setup Step 2 Configure Physical Devices Now activate the menu Configure Physical Devices level 1 A list appears showing all hard disks found on the ICP Controller s I O channels If you have an ICP Controller with a differ ent number of I O channels the existing channels are displayed Note This screen will al ways report all devices that are found even though GDTSETUP only allows you to work on Direct Access Devices and therefore not on tape drives DATs CD ROMs etc The screen shows you Intelligent Computer Peripherals
54. have plugged in just before had contained data from a previous operation with an ICP Controller GDTMON would have reported this Controller Monitor v1 25 ICP Computer TH C Copyright 1994 1997 ICP vortex Computersysteme GmbH rra View Chy Controller aMpling Rate View Change Settings GDT6937RP in Local_Sys Sampling Rate 1 8 sec Example Session for Application 2 We assume that there is a RAID 5 Array Drive where one drive has failed Its state is fail After selecting the Array Drive we choose the Replace Drive option Intelligent Computer Peripherals 214 GDT Controller Monitor ICF Intelli ent Computer TH C Copyright 1994 1997 ICP vontex H rra omputersysteme GM t View Chy Control Physica Array Settings Lo Dr Parity Verify ion Recalculate Expand Array Drive Pool Hot Fix Access not Plug Add pale ix Dri Hot Plug Add Pool Hot Fix Drive Hot Plug Remove Hot Fix Drive Hot Plug Remove Pool Hot Fix Drive GDT6937RP in Local 5us Sampling Rate a sac GDTMON shows the failed drive No 1 GDT Controller Monitor v1 25 s Computer Peripherals TM isk Drives Position Chn ID Status Vendor Type Atte Size MB Drive MW fA 6 1 SEAGATE STS2160N 208 0 129 B 3 i SEAGATE ST32168N fail 2668 3 2 1 SEAGATE STo2168N 208 2 The failed Missing drive s will be u
55. is used if you want to remove a private Hot Fix Drive from an Array Drive Intelligent Computer Peripherals 223 1 3 6 9 Hot Plug Remove Pool Hot Fix Drive In a similar way as with the Remove private Hot Fix Drive function here you can remove a Hot Fix Drive from the Hot Fix Pool A possible reason for this could be that you want to add it as a private Hot Fix Drive to an Array Drive GDT Controller Monitor v1 25 ICP Intelligent Computer Peripherals TM Disk Drives Position Chn ID Status Vendor Type Atte Size MB Drive Select one of the disk drives for Hot Plus i Ai lace sini ot Plug niv ot Fix Drive Hot Plug Add bool Hot Fix Drive Hot Plug Remove priv Hot Fix Drive Hot Flug Remove Pool Hot GDT6337RP in Local_Sys Sampling Rate n sac J 3 7 Save Information The Save Information option gives you the possibility to save the configuration information regarding the selected ICP Controller and its devices in an ASCII file This may help if you require support and is also good for your system documentation Intelligent Computer Peripherals Intelligent Computer Peripherals Chapter ICP RAID Navigator 226 ICP RAID Navigator K 1 Introduction The ICP RAID Navigator ICPRNAV is a powerful tool for setting up monitoring and main taining mass storage subsystems based on ICP Controllers Different to GDTMON the ICP RAID Navigator is a pu
56. right mouse button on the Array Drive icon This option opens a box showing available Hot Fix Drives Here you can select the Hot Fix Drive you want to remove from the Array Drive and then confirm your selection You can remove any Pool Hot Fix Drives or the Private Hot Fix Drive of the selected Array Drive Intelligent Computer Peripherals 249 K 5 13 Hot Fix Pool Access Click the right mouse button on the Array Drive icon Here you can enable or disable the access of an Array Drive to the pool of Hot Fix Drives If the access is enabled this means that if a member of an Array Drive fails a drive can be taken from the Hot Fix Pool and build automatically into the Array Drive To be able to acti vate this feature there must be suitable Logical Drives in the Hot Fix Pool You can add drives to the Hot Fix Pool with the function Add Hot Fix Drives By doing so the Hot Fix Pool access for this specific Array Drive is activated automatically For all other Arrays Drive you have to activate the access manually K 5 14 Add a RAID 1 Component Mirror a Drive Click the right mouse button on the Logical Drive icon In certain emergency cases this is a very powerful and helpful option This function allows you to add to a Logical Drive which is member of an Array Drive another Logical Drive as a mirror drive RAID 1 Example You have configured an Array Drive with 4 Logical Drives One Logical Drive has failed and the Array Drive went into
57. s This function allows you to rescan one or all IDs of the selected SCSI channel It displays an overview of all powered SCSI devices which are currently connected with the SCSI bus Warning If the hard disk contains valid Host Drive or Array Drive information they will be deleted when creating a new Logical Drives data will be lost Hot Plug Add Disk With this Hot Plug function you can add a new hard disk while the system is running Be fore starting the Hot Plug procedure you should prepare the new hard disk and set the jumpers according to the free SCSI IDs and SCSI bus termination Thus pay attention to the correct termination of the SCSI bus and set the ID of the hard disk to a free address if that is not done automatically by your storage subsystem If you do not know which IDs are in use on the selected SCSI channel you can find this out in the physical configuration window Wrong SCSI bus termination and or SCSI ID conflicts will cause a failure of the complete SCSI channel During the Hot Plug procedure firstly enter the ID of the new hard disk all free IDs are offered Secondly you have to confirm a security request Thereafter the SCSI channel is halted While the channel is halted you have 45 seconds to plug in the new hard disk Note Since the operating system will timeout the channel cannot be halted longer If you do not complete the Hot Plug procedure manually the channel will automatically start again after 45
58. seconds After the successful completion of the Hot Plug the new Physical Drive appears in the physical configuration window Now you can use it to build a new Host Drive replace a failed drive or for the expansion of an existing Array Drive You should only use the Hot Plug function with servers and or subsystems which are designed and certified for hot plugging of hard disks Warning If the new plugged in hard disk contains valid Host Drive or Array Drive informa tion they will be deleted when creating a new Logical Drives data will be lost K 4 3 Direct Access Devices Direct access devices can be initialized and subsequently used for Logical Drives The ICP Controller caches the I Os of these devices Logical Drives are the components of Array Drives Intelligent Computer Peripherals 235 SSS Note If you want change the media of a removable disk during operation the media MUST NOT BE INITIALIZED with GDTSETUP GDTMON or the ICP RAID Navigator Furthermore these devices have to be reserved for the raw service Thus the removable disk is handled like a non direct access device Icon Description double click opens right click opens Physical Disk Physical Drive SCSI Parameter Initialize Information Format Disk Check Surface Deinitialize Disk Progress Information Lock Disk Unlock Disk Hot Plug Remove Disk Removable Disk Physical Drive Drive Inform
59. self extracting and can be deleted after use see above note Copy GDTRP103 HAM and CTRLTRAN HAM into the server start directory Intelligent Computer Peripherals 134 Change all command lines STARTUP NCF and in AUTOEXEC NCF from DSK to If CTRLTRAN DSK is loaded directly this command line must also be changed CTRLTRAN HAM If the DSK driver is replaced by the HAM driver the slot number pa rameter has to be changed as well ASPITRAN DSK is not required any more and can be deleted NWASPI CMD is used in stead part of NWPA_411 EXE This ASPI driver has to be loaded if you want to use ASPI devices New Installation of NetWare 4 x with ICP HAM driver support For a new installation with the ICP HAM driver the following steps are required Create a temporary directory on the boot drive e g CNNWPA Copy the file NWPA_411 EXE to the temporary directory C NWPA and start it there The file is self extracting and can be deleted after use see note on previous side Start the NetWare server installation If the message Install found the following hardware but was unable to find a matching driver appears switch to the file server console with lt ALT gt lt Esc gt Type SEARCH ADD 1 CANWPA at the file server console Type LOAD C NWPA NWPALOAD at the file server console Return to the installation screen lt ALT gt lt Esc gt Press RETURN to get a list of all available drivers Press lt IN
60. the CDROM drive is loaded The pa Intelligent Computer Peripherals 124 rameter D CDROM has nothing to do with a drive name it only serves as a recognition information for MSCDEX As mentioned before it is our objective to be able to access the CDROM drive with a drive name i e E Naturally this drive name has to be free and there have to be enough drive names available For example the DOS command LASTDRIVE H would enable the user to use drive names from A to H In the AUTOEXEC BAT file the Microsoft translation program for CDROMs MSCDEX Microsoft CDROM Extension is loaded It is not part of MS DOS except for version 6 The para meter D CDROM set here has to be identical to the parameter set after the ASPICD module in the CONFIG SYS file After a warm reboot which serves to activate the changes made in the CONFIG SYS and AUTOEXEC BAT files the CDROM drive can be accessed as drive E in our example there are two SCSI hard disks in the PCI computer and under MS DOS they are accessed as C and D Drive E can be accessed under Windows too now the Icon next to E indicates that it is a CDROM drive 0 6 2 Example Using corel CSI for the CDROM When using the corelSCSI software the installation is carried out by a program install so that the changes in the files CONFIG SYS and AUTOEXEC BAT mentioned below are to a large extent made automatically Under corelSCSI the SCSI FAST SCSI channels of the ICP Controller are
61. the address space of the ICP BIOS Unlike ISA or EISA com puter systems where the controller s BIOS address space is set manually through jumpers or the configuration file PCI computers automatically map the address space of a periph eral PCI device e g the ICP Controller with its BIOS and Dual Ported Memory to a suit able location during a warm or cold boot If the system configuration does not change no new PCI expansion cards are being added etc the PCI System BIOS will always map these two spaces to the same addresses To help you find out where these addresses have been mapped to the ICP BIOS indicates the physical address locations of the ICP BIOS and the ICP DPMEM during the cold boot also see chapter B in this manual BIOS located at 0x000E0000 0x000ETFFF In this example the ICP BIOS occupies E000 0000 to E000 1 FFF E000 is the segment ad dress DPMEM at 0 00000000 0x000D3FFF Here the DPMEM starts at D000 0000 and ends at D000 3FFF D000 is the segment ad dress You may also use other utility programs such as Georg Schnurer s ct magazine CTPCI pro gram in order to obtain the requested address locations On this occasion we would like to thank Mr Georg Schnurer and the c t magazine for allowing us to use this very helpful utility on our system disks Example 1 The Microsoft EMM386 EXE Manager is used The ICP driver GDTX000 EXE has not been loaded from the CONFIG SYS DEVICE EMM386 EXE X D000 D3FF X E000 E1
62. the basic components of all drive constructions you can set up However before they can be used by the firmware these hard disks must be prepared a procedure we call initialization During this initialization each hard disk receives information which allows a univocal identification even if the SCSI ID FCAL ID or the controller is changed For rea sons of data coherency this information is extremely important for any drive construction consisting of more than one physical drive Level 2 On the next higher level are the Logical Drives Logical Drives are introduced to obtain full independence of the physical coordinates of a physical device This is necessary to easily change the whole ICP Controller and the channels IDs without loosing the data and the information on a specific disk array Also see section C 5 Y Intelligent Computer Peripherals 67 Level 3 On this level of hierarchy the firmware forms the Array Drives This can be Single Disks one hard disk some vendors call it JBOD Just A Bunch Of Drives Chaining Sets concatenation of several hard disks RAID 0 Array Drives RAID 1 Array Drives RAID 1 Array Drives plus hot fix drive RAID 4 Array Drives RAID 4 Array Drives plus hot fix drive RAID 5 Array Drives RAID 5 Array Drives plus hot fix drive RAID 10 Array Drives RAID 10 Array Drives plus hot fix drive Level 4 On the highest level of hierarchy the firmware forms the Host
63. the boot drive available Host adapter Number HA The host adapter number assigned to the ICP Controller is derived from the PCI slot num ber of the ICP Controller Therefore if there is only one ICP Controller installed in the PCI bus computer system the host adapter number 0 If there are two ICP Controllers in stalled the ICP Controller with the lower PCI Slot number is assigned host adapter number 0 and the ICP Controller with the higher PCI slot number is assigned host adapter 1 Note After a cold boot the ICP BIOS displays a couple of messages each beginning with the controller s PCI slot number e g 0 3 4 MB RAM detected The number after the is the slot number of the controller This helps you to determine which is the order of the ICP Controllers and which host adapter number is assigned to them by UNIX See also chapter B Hardware Installation Intelligent Computer Peripherals 158 UNIX Target ID and LUN Target IDs 0 and 1 with LUN 0 to 7 are reserved for Direct Access Devices devices be having like a hard disk or a removable hard and therefore configurable with GDTSETUP There is a correlation between the Host Drive number GDTSETUP assigns menu Configure Host Drives and the assigned target ID and LUN Host Drive Number 8 Target ID LUN The Host Drive number is the number the drive is given in the list of available Host Drives in the GDTSETUP program The following exemplary screen sho
64. the data of the first Logical Drive our master to the sec ond Logical Drive During this synchronization the RAID 1 array is fully operational The functioning of a RAID 1 or mirroring disk array is easy to understand On the ICP Con troller one write access from the host computer is transformed into two write accesses to both Logical Drives forming the mirroring array If the two Logical Drives are built of hard disks which are connected with different I O channels of the ICP Controller both write Intelligent Computer Peripherals 86 accesses are performed simultaneously this method is often called Disk Duplexing During a read access of the host computer the data will be read from the Logical Drive whose hard disk has the fastest access to the data requested If a hard disk should fail for instance due to a mechanical defect all data is still available on the other Logical Drive In this event the controller gives an acoustical alarm GDISETUP Version 3 04 Apr B2 1998 Copyright 1997 98 ICP vortex CURES i tei GmbH etup Configure Controller Configure Physical Devices onfigure Logical Drives elect Are x Status Attrib reate new Tray riye Drive Information F1B Refresh Steps 5 and 6 are the same as in example 1 C8 Example 3 Installing a RAID 5 Disk Array We presume that the controller and the hard disks have been installed properly Step 1 Loading
65. the disk drives for Hot Plus ot Plug Replace Mirror Drive i A i dan ro Hot Plug Remove Mirror Drive Hot Plug Add Pool Hot Fix Drive Hot mum Remove Fool Hot Fix Drive Pool Hot Fix Access GDT6537RP in Local us Sampling Rate 1 J 3 5 7 Pool Hot Fix Access This function enables or disables the access of a certain RAID 1 or RAID 10 Array Drive to the Hot Fix Pool GDT Controller Monitor 91 25 ICP ent Computer TH Copyright 1994 1997 i In H omputersysteme GM The access to the Hot Fix Pool is enabled i Do you want to disable it Phys un No Saye In ot Plug Replace te dps m EE Hot Plug Remove Mirror Drive Hot Plug Add Pool Hot Fix Drive Hot Plug Remove Pool Hot Fix Drive Pool Hot Fix Access GDT6337RP in Local 5us Sampling Rate 1 If the access had been enabled before you could disable it now J 3 6 Array Drives This command yields a list of the existing RAID 4 and RAID 5 Array Drives In addition to the Array Drive number information on the RAID level of the Array Drive 4 or 5 the state Intelligent Computer Peripherals 202 error idle build ready fail expand rebuild and the net capacity are displayed Press lt F2 gt to obtain further information on a selected Array Drive Controller Monitor v1 25 ICP META Computer TH C Copyright 1994 1997 ICP vortex Computersysteme GmbH rra View Chy Contro
66. the fail state Another failure would cause data loss Unfortunately you find another Logical Drive which is shortly before failing e g you hear a strange noise from it or it s grown defect counter explodes If you now initiate a hot plug it is very likely that this critical Logical Drive will also fail This would result in a disaster To avoid that problem you can mirror in a first step a new good Logical Drive to the critical one When the copying is finished you remove the critical Logical Drive and then carry out a hot plug procedure Add RAID1 Component Cancel To add a RAID 1 component you need to select in a first step a Logical Drive the master All suitable Logical Drives with a capacity equal of larger than the capacity of the master are shown in a box Now choose the Logical Drive you want to add the slave After con firming a new RAID 1 Array Drive is build i e all data from the master are copied to the slave drive s When this process is finished all Logical Drives in the RAID 1 Array Drive are identical there is no longer a difference between master and slave K 5 15 Remove a RAID 1 Component Remove a Mirror Drive Click the right mouse button on the Logical Drive icon Here you can remove a drive from a RAID 1 Array Drive If the Array Drive is in the build or in the fail state you may only remove invalid RAID components To remove a Logical Drive from a RAID 1 Array Drive you have to select the Logica
67. the read write actuator to have to move to alternate tracks very often When setting up RAID 4 5 Host Drives please observe the notes on RAID 4 5 Host Drives exposed in the chapter GDTSETUP in Detail GDT Controller Monitor v1 29 ICP Computer u C Copyright 1994 1997 ICP vortex Computersysteme GmhH ain Menu Select Controller Host Drives ysical Drives Cache Statistics Sampling Rate View Change Settings Toggle Colors GDT6537RP in Local_Sys Sampling Rate 1 8 sec Intelligent Computer Peripherals GDT Controller Monitor yl 25 ICP ih AE d omputersysteme GM Read Hrite Read Write Read Write Read Write 7 Total Read Write 176 Copyright 1994 1997 ICP vortex 1 Name DISK_A6 Disk Drive 2 Name DISK_B3 Disk Drive 3 Name DISK_C2 Disk Drive oh 4 Dis GDT6937RP in Local us Ticks 33 Samples The figures under Total represent the total performance of all Logical Drives With the lt and keys you may change the scale of the graphical KB s indication With the T and J keys you can scroll the screen to see more Logical Drives if available J 2 4 Physical Drives GDT Controller Monitor v1 25 ICP AE En omputersysteme GM Copyright 1994 1997 ICP vortex ain Menu Select Controller Host Drives Logical Drives Drives ache Statistics Sampling Rate View Change Settings Toggle
68. the same time E g migrate from RAID 0 to RAID 5 and add a new drive To initiate a migration or expansion with a RAID 4 5 Array Drive the state must be ready The data on the Array Drive remain intact and are not affected by the expansion The additional capacity is introduced as new Host Drive If a Logical Drive fails during the expansion the expansion process continues until the ex pansion is finished The Array Drive changes into the fail state The new capacity is available as a new Host Drive Windows NT Tool Disk Administrator and Novell NetWare Scan for new Devices and then Tool Install allow the online integration of new disk capacity Depending on the RAID level the current Array Drive has selecting a different one here will cause the Migration of the RAID level of the Array Drive If you select the same RAID level the following procedure will expand the capacity of the Array Drive only Intelligent Computer Peripherals 205 GDT Controller Monitor ICP Intelli ent Computer A TH C Copyright 1994 1997 ICP vortex H rra omputersysteme GM t Controller Cache Sett Physical D Lo Dr ty Verify t parale lar i A us Replace u VS Hot Plus niv ot Fix Drive Hot Plug e Hat Fix Drive Hot Plug Remove pon Hot Fix Drive Hot Plug Remove Pool Hot Fix Drive GDT6537RP in 45 Sampling Rate Controller Monitor
69. this file by fax by email she he can very easily find the appropriate steps to bring the system back to full operation Update the ICP Controller Firmware The firmware the BIOS and the GDTSETUP program of the ICP Controller are stored in a Flash RAM which is part of the ICP Controller hardware In contrast to EPROMs Flash RAMs can be re programmed many times and without the complicated UV light erasing procedure Thus these software modules can be easily updated without having to remove the controller from its PCI slot Firmware and BIOS are part of the GDT RPFW file To get the latest firmware for your ICP Controller you can visit our website at http www icp vortex com or our ftp server at ftp ftp icp vortex com download The file has an extension e g GDT_RPFW 009 which indicates the version stepping We recommend that you also download the packed files which contain the latest pro grams drivers for the operating system used on your system Observe the following order when carrying out the updating procedure Get the latest GDT_RPFW file for the ICP Controller The file does NOT need to be ex panded Format a 3 5 HD disk 1 44MB and copy the GDT RPFW file on this disk After selecting the Firmware Update option a file dialog opens where you should specify the path A A list of firmware versions normally only one is displayed After selecting the new firmware and final confirmation the new firmware is p
70. to exchange data between each other have to check if and how i e with which parameters a synchronous data transfer between them is possible Therefore the mere setting does not automatically enable synchronous data transfer this mode is only effective if both devices support it and after they have checked their capability of communicating with each other in this mode 2 Sync Transfer Rate The maximum synchronous transfer rate can be limited This limitation may become nec essary if a particular SCSI cabling does not allow the maximum rate the drive and the con troller could achieve In our example we leave the rate at 20 0 MB s for Wide SCSI at 20 0 MB s and Wide amp Ultra SCSI at 40 0 MB s Note In order to select a transfer rate above 10 0 MB s the Protocol has to be set to SCSI 3 Disconnect Enable The concept of the SCSI bus allows several participants 8 IDs with 8 LUNs each All these participants should be able to use the bus in a manner that causes the least reciprocal dis turbance or obstruction A participant should therefore vacate the bus if he does not need it For reasons of performance it is particularly important to guarantee a high degree of overlapping of the actions on the SCSI bus This high degree of overlapping can be achieved if a SCSI device is allowed to disconnect thus leaving the bus to be used by other participants If there is only one SCSI device connected to the SCSI bus Disconnect should
71. v1 25 ICP sex Eon Computer C Copyright 1994 1997 ICP vortex oy GmbH rra Controller Cache Sett Do you want to add a new drive Physical D to the array Logical Dr EE rg Al ave InforMatlo i lace mi 0 riv ot Fix Drive Hot Plug Add pir Hot Fix Drive Hot Plug Remove p Hot Fix Drive Hot Plug Remove Pool Hot Fix Drive GDT6537RP in Local 5us Sampling Rate sac After confirming this request the I O channels are scanned for free positions and already existing available i e not yet assigned to a Logical Drive hard disks Intelligent Computer Peripherals 206 GDT Controller Monitor ICF Intelli ent Computer A TH C Copyright 1994 1997 vortex H rra omputersysteme GM t View Chy Scanning SCHI channels tanget IDs Please wait n Plug oni t Fix Dri ot Plug niv ot Fix Drive Hot Plug Add bool Hot Fix Drive Hot Plug Remove pon Hot Fix Drive Hot Plug Remove Pool Hot Fix Drive GDT6537RP in Local 5us Sampling Rate a sac For this demo we select the hard disk on channel A and ID 0 GDT Controller Monitor 91 25 ICP aeiy ent Computer TH C Copyright 1994 1997 ICP vortex H rra omputersysteme GM View Chg Disk Drive Positions Position Chn ID Status Vendor Atte Size MB Drive
72. vortex on an exchange basis and will be either new or refurbished to be functio n ally equivalent to new This warranty does not cover any damage to this product which results from accident abuse mi s use natural or personal disaster Acts of God or any unauthorized disassembly repair or modific a tion The duration of this warranty is one year from the date of original retail purchase Warranty Claim Requirements To obtain warranty service return the defective product freight prepaid and insured to your local authorized ICP vortex dealer or distributor or to ICP vortex Corporation 4857 West Van Buren Street Phoenix AZ 85043 Please note the following You must include the product serial number and a detailed description of the problem you are experiencing You must also include proof of the date of original retail purchase as evidence that the product is within the warranty period If you need to return the product to ICP vortex you must first obtain a Return Material Authorization RMA number by calling ICP vortex Corporation at 602 353 0303 This RMA number must be di s played on the outside of your package Products must be properly packaged to prevent damage in transit ICP vortex accepts no responsibility for products which are damaged on arrival due to poor treight service Disclaimers The foregoing is the complete warranty for ICP vortex products and supersedes all other warranties and representations whether writte
73. you select the same RAID level the following procedure will expand the capacity of the Array Drive only ice RAID Navigator Logical Configuration jj Eile View Window Configuration Help 09 Host Drive 0 Log Drive 0 SCSI D ID 1 LUN D NT4_MPS DISK A1 QUANTUM 1 270 SCSI D ID 2 LUN 0 QUANTUM LPS270 0 Host Drive 1 Amay Drive 1 Log Drive 1 SCSI C ID 15 LUN D RAIDS RAIDS DISK C1 DRH S36D Array Build 0 0 Host Drive 4 Log Drive 2 SCSI B ID 15 LUN 0 RAIDS DISK B1 IBM DRHS36D If you want to add additional drives to the Array Drive select them from the box on the left side of the window It is possible to add more than one drive at the same time If no Physical Drives are offered you have to use the Hot Plug Add Disk function first to add new drives If you have previously limited the capacity of the Array Drive you are asked if you want to convert this free space to a new Host Drive You can open the progress in formation window to monitor the progress of the expansion IMPORTANT Before starting an expansion it is absolutely necessary to verify that you have a valid backup of the complete data on the system The expansion process includes a new unknown hard disk If there are problems with this disk or with the cabling of this disk there is always the risk of data loss Some expansions will take quite a long time so it is advisable that there is not too much traffic i
74. 3 drives are added online to the Array Drive Capacity This is the capacity available for the corresponding Host Drives Attributes The attribute of an Array Drive is usually read write RW If a component of a disk array is missing while startup and the op erator decides not to activate fail mode the array is set to the read only attribute RO When the missing drive is available again the Array Drive shows again the ready status i e attribute RW Striping Size Data written on RAID 0 4 5 or RAID 10 drives is distributed over all RAID 0 5 10 drives striping This is the size of the blocks The striping size can only be changed when the drive is created standard setting is 32KB Inva These two values show the number of invalid missing drives While lid Missing the build is in progress initial copy of data from the Master to the RAID 1 Slave invalid drives exist the drives are updated Pool Hot Fix Indicates if the Pool Hot Fix access is enabled or disabled A Pool Hot Fix Drive is a spare drive within the so called Hot Fix Pool A drive in a Hot Fix Pool is available for several Array Drives as a Hot Fix drive assuming it has an appropriate capacity Thus several Array Drives can share one Hot Fix drive Of course once this drive has been used by one of the Array Drives it is no longer available for the others Hot Fix Drives can also be configured as Private Hot Fix Drives A P
75. 5 y AM In Br m ze This confirmation deletes all data on the new drive and prepares it for the Array Drive Intelligent Computer Peripherals 218 GDT Controller Monitor 25 i Ara Computer Peripherals TM isk Drives Position Chn ID Status Vendor Type Atte Size MB Drive RN SEAGATE 5152160 M 060 The new disk drive is built into the disk array lease wait PCI 6 9 AM in m GMT Controller Monitor 25 i Computer Peripherals TM isk Drives Position Chn ID Status Vendor Type Atte Size MB Drive EUN SEAGATE 51521601 NE i hot Plug was shed suc The disk 5 ie has changed t REBUILD The time the disk array needs to assume the READY status depends on the pT utilization and the disk apray s capacity AM ln um uu m sat The Array Drive changes its state to rebuild This means that the ICP Controller rebuilds the original data on the new drive Intelligent Computer Peripherals 219 TH ent Computer Peri omputersysteme GM Controller Monitor v1 25 ICP Intelli C Copyright 1994 1997 ICP vontex rra t View Chy EIE aMpling Rate View Change Settings GDT6937RP in Local 5us Sampling Rate 1 8 sec J 3 6 6 Hot Plug Add private Hot Fix Drive This function allows you to add a Hot Fix Drive to an existing RAID 4 RAID 5 Array Drive Private means tha
76. 61913 Cache RAM Type Ui Cache RAM Size Mag KB bankis 2 Channel Count a Serial Number BSCHL2TF Ph Firmware Version 02 19 00 09 Loj Hardware Level Ar Sa Channel SCSI n p 7 On 1 On Fa Last Events F3 Fault Bus GDT6337RP in Local 5us Sampling Rate 1 8 sec Press F3 to get detailed information on the configuration of the Intelligent Fault Bus IFB Changing and enabling these features requires the existence of an IFB compatible subsystem Intelligent Fault Bus 3 er a EE Auto Hot Plug XEM SHELF Monitoring SHELF Error Channel Fault Bus Swap SHELF Actual LED code number pe Detect State ID 1 ID3 ID 15a 0 H Enabled 108 Not Ok 2816 28 Disabled 1130 Ok 3B 1189 266 E Disabled 964 Not OK 20 1130 266 LED Code Table m Code Disk Array State 0 15 LED on Remove Disk or Insert Disk LED slow blinking Build o Rebuild in S LED quick blinking Array Idle Error or Auto Hot Plug aborted m rm Eaa IM RO EIL GDT6537RP in Local us Sampling Rate 1 8 sec Intelligent Computer Peripherals 183 J 3 3 Cache Settings This submenu displays the current ICP cache settings which can be changed here The vari ous settings are Cache ON the ICP cache is enabled that is all accesses to the Host Drives pass through the ICP cache C
77. 7 Log Drive 5 CONNER SizelMBl 2047 Log Drive 5 CONNER Size MB 2047 Log Drive 5 1 id SAF TE Configuration Installed Disk 176 No hard disk installed in this slot No hard disk installed in this slot Slot not present Slot not present 510 Slo t not present t not present Ok Cancel Fa Enclosure Status GDT6L27RE in Local 5us aMpilng nata Press lt F2 gt to get the status of the SAF TE enclosure GDT Controller Monitor yl 25 ICP Computer ea TH Copyright 1994 1997 ICP vortex Computersysteme TE Enclosure Status Audible Alarm Status Drive 3 M Drive 5 Door Lock Status Not available _ Drive 5 Power Supply B Status Power Supply 1 Status Weder Power Supply 2 Status Fan Status Fan 1 Status Fan 2 Status Operational Fan 3 Status Operational Fan 4 Status Operational Enclosure Temperature _ 9 Temperature Sensor 0 gm Status Mi Audible Alarm on Enclosure status GDTGl27RP in Local us Sampling Rate 1 0 sec J 3 5 Logical Drives This command yields a list of the existing Logical Drives In addition to the Logical Drive numbers information on the drives type state net capacity and belonging to a given Array Drive Host Drive is displayed Press F2 to obtain further information on a selected Logical Drive I
78. 9 Hot swappable power supplies 31 HP Tachyon TL 17 150 ready 18 Special Interest Group 18 i960RN 17 ICP boot message 49 ICP Controller Configuration 52 ICP Mail 255 ICP RAID Navigator 17 226 ICP Service 255 ICP System CDROM 20 ICP vortex Computersysteme GmbH 18 ICP vortex Corporation 18 ID in the Loop 31 Installing the ICP Controller Trouble Shooting 50 INT IRQ assignment 48 Intel i960RN 21 Internet E Mail 18 Jumpers and LED connector 23 LEDs and Jumper 261 LEDs of the GDT controller 49 Levels of Hierarchy 66 Loop back connector 30 Media Interface Adapter ICP Order No 8950 33 MIA Media Interface Adapter 32 263 Microsoft Cluster Server MSCS 17 Microsoft Small Business Server SBS 143 Mirroring Array 79 85 mkdev SCO UNIX 3 2v4 x 157 MSCDEX CD ROM extension 123 Narrow Wide SCSI Bracket 43 NCPE Protocol 168 NETBIOS Protocol 168 NetWare Cache Memory Allocator 135 NetWare Optimize Throughput 135 NetWare Tips amp Tricks 135 NL Ports 29 Not Direct Access Devices 68 125 159 NT Advanced Server Variant 140 OFC Open Fibre Control 33 Online Capacity Expansion 17 Open Fiber Control OFC 33 Operating System Drivers 23 103 Partitioning a Host Drive 116 PCI 2 1 compliant 21 PCI compatibility 17 PCI compatibility Plug amp Play 48 PCI INTA 50 PCI interrupt assignment to IRQ 48 PCI Fibre Channel RAID Controller 16 Port Bypass Circuits 31 Quick Setup 58 RAB RAID Advisory Boar
79. ATE STI9171FC RU FCAL A 124 B SEAGATE STI9171FC RU FCAL A 125 B FC 1 0 Processor Rescan for neu device F2 Extended Information Press lt Y gt and we are back on the main screen of level and see that the initialization status of the device has changed Sica DEVICES elect Cho ID LUN Vendor Product Atty Cap MB Drive 5051 46 ESG SHU Sch HSBP SSI i i FUJITSU MAB3A915 8782 Drive B SCS 1 0 Processor FCAL A 2 SEAGATE STI9171FC RU FCAL A 124 SEAGATE STI9171FC RU FCAL A 125 FC 1 0 Processor Rescan for neu device Fa Extended Information Step 3 Configure Logical Drives We now leave level 1 by pressing the lt ESC gt key and are back in the main menu Now with the cursor keys and 4 select Configure Logical Drives and go to level 2 by pressing ENTER Intelligent Computer Peripherals 74 GDTSETUP Version 3 04 Apr AZ 1998 Copyright 1997 98 ICP vort putersysteme GmbH TET ptup Configure Control ler Conti ure Physical Devices Lonfigure ogical Drives onfigure Array Drives Gonf igure Host Drives Save Information F2 Express Setup The main screen of level 2 appears Move the selection bar to Create new Logical Drive and press ENTER GDTSEIUP Version 1 Ape 1998 Copyright 1997 98 ICP v putersysteme GmbH Configure Control ler bof gue edes rhe ure Physical Devic 1gure ogical Drives ele Status ib EU i T
80. C olors GDT6537RP in Local_Sys Sampling Rate 1 8 sec Size MB Size MB Size MB MEE KB s Ius 3 Rate 1 05 Scaleit qao TH eis TH 200 2008 200 20 In addition to the performance report on the hard disks you are given additional informa tion on each device the ICP I O channel the hard disk is connected to which ID the hard disk has the name of the hard disk Intelligent Computer Peripherals 177 the gross capacity 1MB 1024KB GDT Controller Monitor 41 29 ICP V ned Mi Computer C Copyright 1994 1997 ICP vortex Computersysteme GmhH Read Write Read Write Read Hrite Read Write Size MB 2868 Retries Reassigns 6 SEAGATE 5 52168 SizelMBl 2068 Retries Reassigns i QUANTUM 2195 91 Size MB 99 Retpies Reassigns GDT6337RP in Local 5us Ticks 14 Samples 2 Rate 1 05 Scale The Retries Reassigns counters have a particular meaning 1 The Retries counter is incremented by one unit whenever the ICP Controller retries to access a hard disk If this counter continues to increase possibly on other hard disks too it is very likely that the cable is not good enough for the selected data transfer rate cable too long poor quality of cable and connectors or that the SCSI bus is not properly termi nated too many terminators on the cable or missing terminator In very few cases is th
81. Controller Configure Physical Devices Configure Logical Drivas WIEN i ele Status 0 EIE Drive Size 1 17876 MB 17076 GDTSETUP Version 3 04 Apr 1998 Copyright 1997 98 ICP vortex Computersysteme GmbH ced Setup Configure Controller Configure Physical Devices Configure Logical Drives ne a Kar Status It s done We succeeded in setting up a RAID 5 disk array The screen shows that the disk array is cur rently in an build state Later in this chapter we shall explain the different states a RAIDYNE disk array can assume We are now back in the main menu of GDTSETUP Step 5 Configure Host Drives We are now back in the main menu of GDTSETUP and select Configure Host Drives The main screen of level 4 appears Press lt ENTER gt A list of available Host Drives is dis played Again the first entry is not relevant for our example Intelligent Computer Peripherals 100 At position 1 we find our previously configured RAID 5 disk array It was automatically transformed into a Host Drive thus for this example we have nothing to do in this menu GDTSETUP Version BAD Apr 1998 Copyright 199 ICP y omputersysteme GmbH y etup j Configure Controller Configure Physical Devices Configure Logical Drives Configure Array Drives Configure ost Drives Se ost Dr Name Status imu E Type belongs to A DISK Al ok Ru 2000
82. D Status Vendor Atte Size MB Drive SERGATE 51521601 RH 066 valid 1 10 you plu las ady been initialize This disk i sill i E gel for the Qm Plu if you All u this disk drive Will he destroyed PCI 9 9 PCI 9 9 PCI 6 9 GDTMON recognizes that the new hard disk was already initialized before Confirmation of this message destroys all data on the selected drive GDT Controller Monitor vl 25 a Computer Peripherals isk Drives Position Chn ID Status Vendor Type Atte Size MB Drive 219 A 6 i SEAGATE 57321600 RH 2068 valid Do you really want to add this Position Chn ID drive to the mirror union Size MB Drive PCI 0 9 No PC 09 PCI 9 9 PCI 8 9 PCI 6 9 GD in Local Sus Sampling Rate After this confirmation the Hot Plug is finished successfully It takes approximately 10 minutes to re synchronize the data with this sample configuration Intelligent Computer Peripherals 193 Example Session for Application 2 We assume that there is a RAID 1 Array Drive which is no longer fault tolerant Its state is v one drive has failed and is therefore no longer accessible on the I O channel The ICP Controller started beeping The audible alarm can be disabled within GDTMON by pressing F2 as soon as the View Change Settings menu is loaded GDT Controller Monitor v1 25 ICP EN Computer
83. Devices tapes CDROMs are recognized on the CP Adaptec In order to deactivate ASPITRAN DSK the string ASPI Entry has to be found by using a Disk Monitor in ASPITRAN DSK please pay attention to capitals etc This string is then modified e g by replacing A with an X i e Entry This modified ASPITRAN DSK enables the operation of Raw Devices on the non ASPI compatible Controllers Intelligent Computer Peripherals 137 E 5 6 Last Status Information All ICP Controllers temporarily store the status information from all hard disks which are connected This information can be very useful when searching for possible causes of disk failures or interferences The last status information consists of a hexadecimal 8 digit number and can be displayed via the GDTMONitor or can be saved in a SAVE INFORMATION ASCII file The information is temporarily available in the ICP Controller s RAM Therefore it is important to check this information before switching off and before carrying out a Reset if a disk failure has occurred or if interference was present The last status information is divided into Controller specific and SCSI specific messages A de tailed description can be found in the files LASTSTAT PDF Adobe Acrobat format or LASTSTAT TXT ASCII format on the ICP vortex Website http www icp vortex com E 5 7 Adding Additional Capacity An Online Capacity Expansion The additional capacity resulting
84. Drive on the first ICP Controller found during a cold boot In addi tion the ICP BIOS must be enabled and the SCSI ID of the corresponding ICP SCSI channel must be set to 7 Now you can begin the installation Boot the system with the first UnixWare boot disk UnixWare scans the system for host adapters When requested insert the UnixWare BTLD Disk The installation procedure which follows then has to be carried out as described in the UnixWare documentation Important note As already mentioned in chapter B Hardware Installation the assignment of an IRQ to an INT is made by the PCI System BIOS The UnixWare versions 2 xy and higher automatically recognize the IRQ of a PCI expansion card Intelligent Computer Peripherals 165 1 4 ICP Controller as an additional Controller We distinguish two cases a No ICP Controller has been configured for UnixWare yet In this case the ICP driver must be installed from the UnixWare BTLD Disk by means of the UnixWare desktop and the options System Setup Application Setup Alternatively this procedure can be carried out from the UnixWare shell pkgadd d dev dsk fOt ICP driver disk in drive 0 b An ICP Controller has already been configured for UnixWare In this case you only have to add an additional entry for the new ICP Controller This is car ried out by etc scsi pdiadd d DRQ v IRQ m MEM gath for DRQ use 0 not necessary for PCI boards for IRQ write the IRQ numbe
85. Drives In the end only these Host Drives can be accessed by the host operating system of the computer Drives C D etc under MS DOS Windows NT NetWare etc are always referred to as Host Drives by the firmware The firmware automatically transforms each newly installed Logical Drive and Array Drive into a Host Drive This Host Drive is then assigned a Host Drive number which is identical to its Logical Drive or Array Drive number The firmware is capable of running several Host Drives of the most various kinds at the same time An example for MS DOS drive C is a RAID 5 type Host Drive consisting of 5 hard disks drive D is a single hard disk and drive E is a CDROM communicating with RAIDYNE through corelSCSI and the ICP ASPI manager On this level the user may split an existing Array Drive into several Host Drives After a capacity expansion of a given Array Drive the added capacity appears as a new Host Drive on this level It can be either used as a separate Host Drive or merged with the first Host Drive of the Array Drive Within GDTSETUP each level of hierarchy has its own special menu Level 1 gt Menu Configure Physical Devices Level 2 gt Menu Configure Logical Drives Level 3 gt Menu Configure Array Drives Level 4 gt Menu Configure Host Drives Generally each installation procedure passes through these 4 menus starting with level 1 Therefore First initialize the Physical Drives Then configure the Logical
86. E is part of the ICP Windows NT driver disk FDISK MBR ENTER and NTPREP ENTER GDTSETUP includes an option that makes both FDISK MBR and NTPREP Select the Configure Host Drives menu and then Overwr Master Boot Code You should never use Overwr Master Boot Code or FDISK MBR and NTRPEP when the Host Drives already contain valid data Intelligent Computer Peripherals 142 GDTSETUP Version 3 88D Oct 02 1997 C Copyright 1997 CP vortex Computersysteme GmbH Host Drive Change Drive Name Swap Host Drives Remove Host Drive Split Host Drive Merge Host Driy Do you really want to Partition Drive overwrite the Master Boot Code Y N to Information FiB Refresh Step 5 Check the SCSI IDs for proper setting When connecting the various SCSI devices to a SCSI channel of the ICP Controller please ensure that the SCSI ID of all Not Direct Access devices e g CDROM DAT Streamer MO drive etc are adjusted to a value greater than or equal to 2 This applies also for the CDROM drive from which Windows NT is installed Step 6 Check the boot priority of your system Make sure that the boot priority in the BIOS setup of your system is AC F 4 The Installation First of all make sure that you have verified or carried out all steps described in sec tion F 3 F 4 1 The ICP Controller is the only Controller in the System The following instructions 1 to 12 assume that the ICP Controll
87. GDTSETUP You can load GDTSETUP in two ways 1 Press the lt CTRL gt lt G gt key combination when the ICP BIOS message comes up shortly after switching on the computer and load GDTSETUP from the Flash RAM of the ICP Controller In this case no operating system is required If GDTSETUP was loaded this way there is an R ROM behind the version number 2 Load GDTSETUP from disk under MS DOS Boot the MS DOS operating system either from a boot floppy or from an already existing boot drive i e IDE hard disk etc In or der for GDTSETUP to work properly you have to load the device driver GDTX000 first This can be done in two ways a Load GDTX000 from the DOS command level by typing in GDTX000 lt ENTER gt b Load GDTX000 automatically through the CONFIG SYS file DEVICE GDTX000 EXE Note GDTSETUP EXE as well as GDTX000 EXE are on the System Disk DOS If GDTSETUP was loaded this way there is a D Disk behind the version number You may now ask what are the differences between the two GDTSETUP variants Intelligent Computer Peripherals 87 They are small The GDTSETUP variant loadable from disk under MS DOS also additionally allows the partitioning of Host Drives which is not possible with GDTSETUP loaded from the Flash RAM Loading GDTSETUP from the Flash RAM is pretty easy since there is nothing more required to configure the disk arrays User s who have for instance an NT installation without a DOS partit
88. GDTX000 EXE but by Windows SMARTDRV driver D The steps in this section aim at removing SMARTDRV from the CONFIG SYS and AUTO EXEC BAT files and at adding a few entries to the Windows initialization file SYSTEM INI Now delete those lines from the CONFIG SYS and AUTOEXEC BAT files which contain SMARTDRV EXE one line in each file using an editor such as EDIT for instance which is part of MS DOS 5 and 6 or deactivate these lines by entering REM at their beginning Then save and exit the files Next load the SYSTEM INI file located in the WINDOWS directory into the editor and look for the entry 386Enh The following lines have to be inserted af ter this entry 386Enh EMMExclude D000 DIFF or according ICP DPMEM area VirtualHDIrq off DMABufferSize 128 Now save the file In the line EMMexclude you have to enter the address area occupied by the ICP DPMEM E Now do a warm reboot in order for the changes in the CONFIG SYS the AUTOEXEC BAT file to take effect Now change to the WINDOWS directory and type in WIN lt ENTER gt Windows is loaded again and the installation is completed D 6 Using a CDROM Drive under MS DOS or Windows 3 x CDROM drives as well as tape streamers WORM drives and most MOD drives too belong to the category of the so called Not Direct Access Devices They cannot be installed with GDTSETUP or FDISK and FORMAT and they are not directly supported by MS DOS or Win dows unlike for example
89. H 5 Further Information caespite cepe tene cette tit 16 ect seh a RR 164 1 1 Transparency of Host Drives ssttnntnn ttn 164 1 2 General Installation NOTOS nen caet tap rca ttt u 164 3 ICP Controller as Boot 164 1 4 ICP Controller as an additional 165 1 5 Coordinates of SCSI dEVICBS scent 165 1 6 Further Information sscscsssccsssssesscssssesesscsssssvesssssssseesecssssssessessssnsesseesssvessssesssvecsessssnsesseesssnnseeeesssseed 166 J THE DIAGNOSIS PROGRAM GDTMON ennt 168 1 1 Loading 169 J 1 1 Loading the GDTMON Program Under NetWare 170 J 1 2 Loading the GDTMON Program Under 0 2 170 b Intelligent Computer Peripherals J 1 3 Loading the GDTMON Program Under Windows 170 J 1 4 Loading the GDTMON Program Under Windows 95 98 170 11 5 Loading gdtmon under SCO NK en 171 J 1 6 Loading gdtmon under LI
90. ICP Con trollers Different to the ICP RAID Navigator a GUI sytle application for Windows 9x NT GDTMON s user interface is character oriented Information on the ICP RAID Navigator can be found in a separate chapter of this User s Manual The key features of GDTMON Diagnosis program with a character oriented graphical user interface Clear perform ance representation with variable horizontal bars Available under MS DOS NetWare 3 x amp 4 x Windows 9x Windows NT OS 2 SCO UNIX Linux Loadable locally on the server or remotely from an authorized workstation support of various protocols Indicates the performance expressed in KB sec and IO sec of Host Drives Disk Chain RAID 0 1 4 5 10 Logical Drives SCSI Drives and FCAL Drives Indicates the ICP cache utilization Read Hits Write Hits Separate indication for data and parity cache RAID 4 5 Allows online changing of the ICP cache parameters Cache ON OFF Delayed Write ON OFF Allows online changing of the devices parameters SCSI protocol Synchronous or Asynchronous data transfer Setting of the synchronous data transfer rate Disconnect Reconnect Disk Cache ON OFF Tagged Queues ON OFF Indicates the structure of Logical Array and Host Drives Performs online parity checking of RAID 4 and RAID 5 Host Drives Allows the online RAID Level migration and capacity expansion of existing Array Drives Saves all releva
91. IOS as soon as possible B 8 Checking the ICP Controller Configuration As mentioned before these settings can be changed through soft switches in the ICP Con troller setup program GDTSETUP All settings are permanently stored on the ICP Control ler The following table shows the various options and the possible settings E Supported BIOS 0 27 Eco E can also be changed with the GDTMON or ICP RAID Navigator online utilities Only with GDTSETUP under MS DOS B 8 1 Loading GDTSETUP As already mentioned before there are two different possibilities to load GDTSETUP Basi cally these two possibilities are based on two different variants of the same program One which is integrated into the FLASH RAM of the ICP Controller and another with is simply an EXE program loadable under MS DOS Loading GDTSETUP from the FLASH RAM is very comfortable since it requires nothing else but pressing the lt CTRL gt lt G gt key combination after switching on the PC Loading GDTSETUP under MS DOS becomes necessary when you want to use GDTSETUP s integrated partitioning functions or when you have totally disabled the ICP s BIOS which includes the GDTSETUP variant loadable from FLASH RAM If you want to load GDTSETUP under MS DOS you have to load the device driver GDTX000 first This can be done in two ways l Starting the device driver from the DOS command level by typing GDTX000 lt ENTER gt 2 Starting the de
92. ISIS 104 49 o4juo ayy 104 Example for a SCSI Flat Ribbon Cable for 16 Bit SCSI Devices wide 42 B 5 2 SCSI Termination In order to ensure a flawless and interference free signal transmission on the SCSI bus and to minimize the detrimental effects of external noise generators both ends of the SCSI ca ble have to be terminated The SCSI specification prescribes two alternative termination modes for Single Ended SCSI bus systems the passive termination and the active termina tion also known as Alternative 2 termination The passive termination consists of a 220 Ohm pull up and a 330 Ohm pull down resistor for each signal Today the passive termina tion is mostly used in systems with synchronous data transfer rates not exceeding 5 MB sec which is rather slow The active termination circuit consists of a 110 Ohm preci sion resistor per signal and a common 2 85Volt voltage regulator Thus all signals are ac tively pulled up to a certain level The active termination provides much better signal quality and significantly reduced liability to noise All ICP Controllers are equipped with an active SCSI bus termination The voltage for the termination circuitry passive and active is supplied either by the SCSI device itself or by the TERMPWR line of the SCSI bus Every SCSI device regardless of whether it is a hard disk a printer or an ICP Controller must have a SCSI bus termination In addition it must be possible to enable and
93. L BE LOST To prevent the operating system from crashing and to hinder the unintentional deletion of drives all partitions on the Host Drive and it s related Host Drives if it is split into several Host Drives must be deleted before the Host Drive can be removed K 5 6 Create a new Host Drive Double click on the new Host Drive icon Only the Host Drives are visible for the operat ing system The structure of the Host Drives is not known to the operating system i e the operating system does not recognize that a given Host Drive consists of a number of hard disks forming a disk array To the operating system this Host Drive simply appears as one single hard disk with the capacity of the disk array This complete transparency represents the easiest way to operate disk arrays under any operating system neither operating system nor the computer need to be involved in the administration of these complex disk array configurations To create a new Host Drive you need one or more Physical Drives which are Intelligent Computer Peripherals 245 not yet part of another Host Drive After double clicking on the New Host Drive icon a new window opens New Host Drive C Single Disk Chaining C RAIDO mes C RAIDI RAID1 Hot Fix C RAIDS C RAID Abt Fie RAIDS RAIDS Abt ry RADIO C RADIO Bot On the left side you see a box with the available Physical Drives under the drives you can see their physic
94. MA GDTX000 EXE is needed for an optimal use of Windows 3 x The ICP Controller unfolds its full capacity under MS DOS or Windows 3 x only when GDTX000 EXE is installed In order to load GDTSETUP under MS DOS from disk you need GDTX000 EXE Inthe CONFIG SYS file GDTX000 EXE must be loaded before GDTASPI EXE Below is an example of a CONFIG SYS file which is essential for the MS DOS configuration device c windows himem sys device gdtx000 exe files 30 buffers 30 stacks 9 256 dos high umb install dos keyb com GR dos keyboard sys device gdtx000 exe device mouse sys device dos setver exe device gdt gdtaspi exe device aspi aswcdnec sys D CDROM lastdrive h In this example besides the GDTX000 driver the GDTXDOS EXE driver the ICP ASPI Man ager and an ASPI Module for an NEC CDROM drive are loaded Intelligent Computer Peripherals 121 D 4 Expanded Memory Managers When using Expanded Memory Managers a certain address area has to be excluded from being controlled by these programs This area is the ICP Dual Ported Memory address space sized 16KB If the ICP Controller is not run with the GDTX000 EXE driver that is the driver has not been loaded from the CONFIG SYS file the address space of the ICP BIOS must also be excluded the size of the ICP BIOS is 8KB If the GDTX000 EXE driver is loaded from the CONFIG SYS file in a line before the Expanded Memory Manager EMM it is not necessary to exclude
95. MB Disk logical B Drive F2 Drive Information Refresh Press ENTER to get a list of possible menu options GDTSETUP Version 3 04 Apr 1998 C Copyright 1997 98 ICP vortex Computersysteme GmbH Host Drive ange Drive Host Drives Remove Host Drive Split Host Drive Merge Host Drives Select Host Drive Partition Drive Attrib Capacita Type belongs to 2000 M Disk Logical A W verur Master 1 lH E ND Ew i a Information FLA Refresh We should not forget to mention that if you would have selected Create new Host Drive this would have lead you to exactly the same menu as the Express Setup mode But this example is an exercise which should help you to gain a better understanding of how the ICP Controller and GDTSETUP work Intelligent Computer Peripherals 101 By the way if you have loaded GDTSETUP from the Flash RAM lt CTRL gt lt G gt the Partition Drive option will be missing in this menu The reason is that partitioning makes no sense when there is no operating system loaded and the INT13H extension of the ICP Controller has not yet been activated Step 6 Leaving GDTSETUP We are now back in the main menu of GDTSETUP The installation is completed and we therefore leave GDTSETUP by pressing the lt ESC gt key The following message appears GDTSETUP Version 3 04 Apr 1998 Copyright 1997 98 ICP vortex Comput
96. N 1 of the connectors A simple short circuit and continuity test before running the devices helps you to save time and money The same warnings as for home made cables apply when you buy non brand cables If you plan to run Fast 20 devices you should explicitly ask your dealer if these cables are appro priate for the Fast 20 mode Note The ICP product range also includes some high quality SCSI accessories Along with external SCSI brackets there is a special FAST 20 Wide SCSI cable Please see section B 5 4 of this User s Manual or check our Website http www icp vortex com for further details Intelligent Computer Peripherals 40 Example for a SCSI Flat Ribbon Cable for 8 Bit SCSI Devices narrow unos a qpo 05 1504 105 i z 9 qn 04 54042 20 unoz 9 JIUDISIP Intelligent Computer Peripherals ISIS Ys 407 104 OS y buaj 902 gt 13d 02 1504 10 z unuuxpyy u4Buo o qn WIQZ 5 042 gt unoz ungz U39MJ9q ununumy E 8 E d 5 Q o gt NE E 41 S JHA P
97. NUX 171 J 2 The GDTMON Progiam u 171 172 J 2 2 Host Drives MM 173 175 1 2 4 Physical Des 176 177 1 2 6 Sampling Rote eam ett rcc tk cc oriri 178 J 3 The Menu View Change Settings 179 J 3 1 Notes and Information on the Hot Plug function of GDTMON 18 J 3 2 I ENERO OO ROREM 182 183 J 3 4 Physical Drives RE ENIM ERE 183 185 DE AT ee 201 223 iussu 226 226 K 2 The ICP RAID Navigator 5 227 227 aderat pins 227 K 2 3 Window Menu Commands cc scsssssesscssssseesssssssseesssssssssessesssssvecsesssssssesesssssneessessssuesseesssseeseet 227 K 2 4 Help Menu Commands ssssscccscsssssesssccssssessssssssseessssssssecsesssssssessssssssseesecsssuesessesssueteseeesseesee 228 K 2 5 File en 228 2 6 View Menu Commands nu 228 229 K 2 8 The Configuration Menu 5 229 EE LU LE 230 K 4 Physical Configuration 230 LE Controllers aceasta cence 231 ee OD OR 233
98. NY OR PLIICCING N m SCSI CHANNELS DOING 0 MIGHT CAUSE SERIOUS HARDWARE DAMAGE data on the new disk drive will he ies toyed lug in oll I After confirming unplugging or plugging is not allowed This cause Serious hardware damage PCI 9 9 PCT 0 9 PCI 6 9 AM In cUm GzUx vc m ze After this message we can unplug the old drive and plug the new one in again and confirm this procedure Intelligent Computer Peripherals 217 GDT Controller Monitor 25 i Ara Computer Peripherals TM isk Drives Position Chn ID Status Vendor Type Atte Size MB Drive RN SEAGATE 5152160 NNNM 1 115 disk drive belonged to the logi This disk drive belonged to the disk Sd r en i The disk drive you have plugged in has already heen initialized This disk drive will be used for the Hot E if you confir ll data on this disk drive will e destroyed PCI 6 9 AM ln umm m GDTMON has detected data on the new drive i e it was already used as a Logical Drive with an ICP Controller GDT Controller Monitor 25 a i Computer Peripherals isk Drives Position Chn ID Status Vendor Type Atte Size MB Drive SEAGATE 5152160 NE 1 Do you pi want to add this Position Chn ID drive to the array union Size MB Drive 2 10 5 B 8 3 PCL 49 C 4 4 RIG 1 i 5 21 49 2 6 Kl 3 i 7 IS 4 8 IAS
99. Nitor for Windows 9x NETBIOS DLL for Windows 9x NETBIOS Server for Windows 9x Configuration file for NETBIOS Server NETBIOS analysis program The MS DOS GDTMON also allows remote access The DLLs are integrated into the GDT MON EXE file thus there is no NETBIOS server available for MS DOS Since there is no NETBIOS support within MS DOS it is necessary to load the NETBIOS program to access from a MS DOS workstation through the network an ICP Controller in a Windows NT and OS 2 workstation or server or a Windows 95 98 workstation NETBIOS is part of the Novell Intelligent Computer Peripherals 170 NetWare operating system For the remote access of a Novell NetWare fileserver the NETBIOS program is not needed J 1 1 Loading the GDTMON Program Under NetWare The GDTMON program for NetWare is part of the ICP System CDROM GDTMON can be used either under NetWare 3 1x or under NetWare 4 x There are two dif ferent methods of loading GDTMON loading GDTMON on the fileserver loading GDTMON on an authorized workstation remote Loading GDTMON on the fileserver Beforehand the ICP NetWare driver GDTRP311 DSK for NetWare 3 11 GDTRP312 DSK for NetWare 3 12 and GDTRP400 DSK for NetWare 4 x and the auto loading module CTRLTRAN DSK must have been loaded on the fileserver LOAD GDTMON lt ENTER gt on the fileserver Loading GDTMON on a workstation In this case too the ICP NetWare driver and the auto loading module CTRLTRAN DSK must ha
100. O channels Usually when booting a cluster the ICP Controller starting up first will gain control over all Host Drives on the clustering I O channels If you want to be sure that a Host Drive is con trolled by a specific server you may configure this Host Drive as a Private Host Drive A Pri vate Host Drive cannot be used for clustering anymore Note You cannot change the configuration of a Private Host Drive which is not property of the selected ICP Controller You have to use GDTSETUP to change its configuration A Private Host Drive belonging to the selected ICP Controller will be displayed like a nor mal Host Drive Array Drives Array Drives or RAID drives consist of Logical Drives They can be fault tolerant depending on the RAID level The RAID level is displayed under the Array Drive icon Click on the icons to get more information on the different states of an array Icon Description double click opens right click opens RAID 4 5 10 Array Drive Drive Name Information 1 Idle Parity Verify Parity Recalculate a Build Expand Array Progress Information TE Ready Add Hot Fix BO Fail Remove Hot Fix Hot Fix Pool Access Error EXE EE Add RAID1 Component Remove RAID1 Component Intelligent Computer Peripherals 241 RAID jo Build 00 Ready gp Fail RAID 0 BB Logical Drives Logical Drives consist of one or more Physical Drives
101. OS disk for example with mcopy a gdth tegz b Unpack the archive with tar xvfz gdth tgz Compile a new Kernel procedure depends on the Linux distribution make config make dep make clean may become necessary before G 4 Driver installation or update using a patch New installation of a driver patch a Copy the corresponding patch on the Linux system preferably to usr src linux e g gdtp2036 gz for Linux 2 0 36 Intelligent Computer Peripherals 151 b Carry out the patch e g for Linux 2 0 36 cd usr src linux zcat gdtp2036 gz patch p1 2 gt log_file Thereafter check the file log_file for possible errors c Configure the Kernel Enter the ICP Controller with cd usr src linux make config d Check dependencies Compile Kernel see LINUX manual e g make dep amp amp make zlilo e Reboot system Update of a driver patch a Copy the new patch to usr src linux b Remove old patch with zcat old patch gz patch p1 R rm drivers scsi gdth gdth sources with versions older than 1 01 have to be removed with rm manually With newer versions this is no longer necessary C Carry out the patch zcat new patch gz patch p1 2 log file d Compile a new Kernel e Reboot the system G 5 GDTMON Monitoring Tool Detailed information on GDTMON can be found in a separate chapter of this User s Man ual gdtmon tez GDTMONitor and object files intel sdtmona tgz GDTMONitor and obje
102. Overall View DB9 connector for FC AL port A CPU cooler for i960RN SDRAM module not included TP Terminator Power Jumper for Wide Ultra SCSI channel TL TH Jumpers for manual termi nation of Wide Ultra SCSI channel L Low Byte H High Byte 5 LEDs S green Status T green DMA transfer SCSI FCA yellow Activity on FC AL and Wide Ultra SCSI 6 Connectors for secondary acousti cal and temperature alarm 7 Loudspeaker 8 Connector for 50 pin SCSI cable 9 Connector for 68 pin SCSI cable 10 Jumper 4 Normally closed 11 64 Bit PCI Bus connector Can also be plugged into a 32 Bit PCI slot 12 Connector for external LEDs Sum All FC AL and Wide Ultra activities FCA Activity on FC AL port A SCSI Activity on Wide Ultra SCSI channel Cathodes near the 50 pin SCSI connector 13 Terminator key if DRAM Battery Power Module not installed Key can be also installed 180 degrees clockwise rotated 14 Socket for optional Cluster Module Not required for GDT7619RN When installed on a GDT7519RN controller becomes a GDT7619RN mo 5 Intelligent Computer Peripherals 25 GDT7529RN and GDT7629RN Overall View DBPM Terminator S 5 7 Ou 58 DB9 con
103. P Controllers with their array drives Remote operation Intelligent messaging On Board i960RN Intelligent 64 Bit Processor 100MHz Completely offloads the host CPU One or two 64 Bit Fibre Channel Interfaces with HP Tachyon TL and onboard copper transceivers with 100MB s channel Support of Arbitrated Loop Topology Up to 25 meters with copper cable Standard DB9 connectors Support of MIAs Media Interface Adapter for large cable length full featured additional Wide Ultra SCSI channel for legacy SCSI devices hard disks CDROMs etc with third generation 32 SCSI RISC processor and an active software switchable termination Dual connector system 50 pin and 68 pin connector Synchro nous data transfer rate up to 40MB sec ECC SDRAM Module as Cache RAM 16MB 32MB 64MB Automatic Cache RAM detec tion Optional Battery Backup Module Intelligent multi level cache algorithm with adaptive delayed write and read ahead func tions This ensures an optimized cache for various load profiles and system require ments On Board PCI 2 x compatible BIOS Plug amp Play BIOS Firmware and GDTSETUP in Flash RAM Easy update Intelligent Computer Peripherals 18 Drivers for MS DOS Novell NetWare SCO UNIX V 386 Interactive UNIX UnixWare Li nux Windows NT Windows 95 98 and OS 2 ASPI Managers for DOS Windows and Novell NetWare 1 0 ready controller design Controllers equipped with Clu
104. PITRAN DSK and CTRLTRAN DSK will be loaded automatically If more ICP Controllers are installed in the fileserver i e for controller duplexing the above mentioned driver has to be loaded several times But as it is re entrant it is only loaded once A single ICP Con troller can be chosen by selecting its PCI slot number Novell NetWare 4 x Using HAM Driver ICP Controllers also support the HAM Host Adapter Module specification Before installing the ICP HAM driver make sure that your NetWare operating system is graded to the last level Service Pack or Patches To download the latest patches check the Novell website www novell com The ICP HAM driver for all ICP Controllers using Intel s i960Rx CPUs is GDTRP103 HAM the HAM driver GDTRP103 DDI installation file for GDTRP103 HAM This ICP HAM driver supports all NetWare versions where the latest NWPA NetWare Pe ripheral Architecture support modules are available and installed Note there is a NWPA EXE file on the ICP System CDROM which includes amongst others various CDMs Custom Device Modules Before you install these modules make sure that you do not overwrite already existing newer modules Update a NetWare 4 x system from ICP DSK to ICP HAM driver support To upgrade a pre installed server from DSK to HAM drivers the following steps should be carried out Copy the file NWPA_411 EXE to the server start directory and start it there The file is
105. S file The objective of both installations is to make the CDROM drive accessible as a drive for example drive E under MS DOS or Windows and to be able to access this drive just as if it were a write protected floppy disk in drive A or B At this point we presume that the CDROM drive has been properly connected to the ICP Controller This includes that the SCSI ID and the SCSI bus terminators are set in accor dance with the settings of the already existing SCSI devices i e the SCSI ID chosen for the CDROM drive is not occupied by another device resistor terminators are located only at the two ends of the SCSI bus D 6 1 Example Using the ASW Software for the CDROM The important lines in both files are printed bold CONFIG SYS device c windows himem sys device gdtx000 exe files 30 buffers 30 stacks 9 256 dos high umb shell COMMAND COM E 512 P device dos setver exe device gdt gdtaspi exe device aspi aspicd sys D CDROM lastdrive h AUTOEXEC BAT path c c dos c gdt c aspi prompt SP SG doskey c aspi mscdex D CDROM The GDTX000 EXE driver is loaded from the first line following the HIMEM SYS command of the CONFIG SYS file Loading the SETVER driver part of MS DOS allows older versions of Microsoft s CDROM translation program MSCDEX loaded from AUTOEXEC BAT to run trouble free with the MS DOS version currently installed The next line loads the ICP ASPI Manager GDTASPI EXE Next the ASPICD module for
106. S file then do a warm reboot Ctrl Alt Del Step 2 Use the ASW program AFDISK EXE to initialize the drive to be run through the ASPI interface Step 3 After the successful initialization do a warm reboot Ctrl Alt Del The CONFIG SYS will be similar to the following the relevant entries are printed bold device gdtx000 exe files 30 Intelligent Computer Peripherals 126 buffers 30 stacks 9 256 shell COMMAND COM E 512 P device gdt gdtxdos exe device gdt gdtaspi exe R H 114 device aspidisk sys Note Drives run with ASPIDISK SYS are not compatible with drives run with GDTSETUP D 7 2 Using corelSCSI Step 1 Include GDTX0000 EXE GDTASPI EXE with appropriate reservations R in the CONFIG SYS file then do a warm reboot Ctrl Alt Del Step 2 Load corel s Install program and follow the instructions Preferably use Express Setup Step 3 After the successful installation do a warm reboot Ctrl Alt Del Step 4 Using the corelSCSI program CFORMAT format the drive to be run through the ASPI interface The CONFIG SYS will be similar to the file below the relevant entries are printed bold The parameters following the corelSCSI driver refer to a particular configuration they have automatically been added by the corelSCSI INSTALL program devicezgdtx000 exe files 30 buffers 30 stacks 9 256 shell COMMAND COM E 512 P device gdt gdtxdos exe device gdt gdtaspi exe 114 device cor
107. SCSI hard disks in the PCI computer and under MS DOS they are accessed as C and D Drive E can be ac cessed under Windows too now the Icon next to E indicates that it is a CDROM drive Intelligent Computer Peripherals 125 Information on the various CDROM drives which be used can be obtained directly from Corel D 7 The ICP ASPI Manager GDTASPI EXE The ICP ASPI Manager GDTASPI EXE allows you not only to run Not Direct Access Devices e g CDROMs tapes MODs etc but to control hard disks and removable hard disks too the so called Direct Access Devices These devices are then no longer controlled by GDTSETUP but exclusively by the ASPI interface The advantage is evident in particular with regard to re movable hard disks When using an appropriate ASPI module to access these removable hard disks for example ASPIDISK SYS or UNI_ASP SYS from Corel you can exchange the media of these drives under DOS without having to use GDTSETUP To the ASPI interface the ICP Controller appears as one host adapter If there are more SCSI controllers even if from various manufacturers in the system and corresponding ASPI managers have been installed in the CONFIG SYS file you can determine a controller s host adapter number by using the ICP program ASPISCAN EXE In order to exclude that a Direct Access Device is run directly from the ICP Controller it has to be reserved for the ASPI interface control To do so certain parameters hav
108. SERT gt to select additional drivers Insert a prepared floppy disk with the ICP HAM driver and DDI file into the floppy drive and press lt RETURN gt After reading the floppy disk information a new list appears Select the ICP HAM driver now The installation process asks now for the slot number of the ICP Controller To deter mine this number the following steps should be carried out Switch to the file server console with lt Alt gt lt ESC gt Type LOAD GDTRP103 HAM The driver now determines the slot number s and displays all slot numbers of all ICP Controllers They should be written down Press ESC to stop the driver loading procedure Return to the installation screen lt ALT gt lt Esc gt Now insert the slot number of the ICP Controller If there are additional ICP Controllers in the system load a driver for each of them with a unique slot number Do not use the same slot number for more than one ICP Controller Intelligent Computer Peripherals 135 Continue with the server installation Down and Exit the server at the end of the installation Copy all files except NWPA_411 EXE from the temporary directory to the start directory of the server The temporary directory can be deleted afterwards E 5 Tips and Tricks E 5 1 Optimize Data Throughput High performance RAID controllers are designed for multi I O operations and are capable of processing several I Os simultaneously Especially cac
109. This means that if another hard disk should fail while the disk array is without redundancy all data is irretrievably lost RAIDYNE offers two possibilities of replacing a failed drive of an array for which no Hot Fix drive has been designated 1 Replacement with GDTSETUP we have just demonstrated this method 2 Replacement by using the Hot Plug function of GDTMON and ICP RAID Navigator The Hot Plug method allows you to replace a defective drive while the disk array continues to work and without having to load GDTSETUP When this method is used the I O channel to which the defective drive is connected is temporarily halted that is for the time neces sary for replacement After the replacement RAIDYNE automatically begins to rebuild the new drive The halting and release of the I O channel is controlled by GDTMON or ICP RAID Navigator This halt of the I O channel serves to avoid that interferences impair the functioning of still intact drives on this channel Intelligent Computer Peripherals 106 We would like to stress that the Hot Fix method is by far the most secure method of replacing a defective drive while the disk array is operational see next example First of all because it is completely automatic and secondly because it does not imply any me chanical or electrical interventions on the disk array as the Hot Plug method does We shall explain GDTMON and the Hot Plug method more thoroughly later in this manual C9 Exa
110. User s Manual ICP Controllers of the GDT RN Series 64 Bit PCI Fibre Channel RAID Controllers 1 Edition Copyright 1992 1999 ICP vortex Corporation 4857 West Van Buren Street Phoenix AZ 85043 USA ICP vortex Computersysteme GmbH Falterstrasse 51 53 74223 Flein Germany All Rights and Changes Reserved Intelligent Computer Peripherals Intelligent Computer Peripherals Contents Overview Part Chapter A General Information Chapter B Hardware Installation Chapter C Quick Setup Part Il Chapter D Using Microsoft MS DOS Windows 3 x 95 98 Chapter E Using Novell NetWare Chapter F Using Windows NT Chapter G Using LINUX Chapter H Using SCO UNIX Chapter Using UnixWare Part Ill Chapter J The GDTMON Program Chapter K The ICP RAID Navigator Chapter L Appendix The following chapters are part of a PDF document which is located in a corresponding directory on the ICP System CDROM Using IBM OS 2 v2 x Using Interactive UNIX GDTSETUP in Detail Intelligent Computer Peripherals Limited Warranty ICP vortex Corporation ICP vortex guarantees that this product is free from defects in material and workmanship Subject to the conditions and limitations set forth below ICP vortex will at its own option either repair or replace any part of this product which proves to be defective by reasons of improper workmanship or materials Parts used to repair products or replacement pro ducts will be provided by ICP
111. ache OFF the ICP cache is disabled Delayed Write ON Write accesses are delayed i e the write back cache algorithm is active Delayed Write OFF All write accesses are directly transmitted to the Host Drives If delayed write is off and the Cache is ON the ICP cache works exclusively as a read cache Note Best performance is achieved with Cache ON and Delayed Write ON GDT Controller Monitor 91 29 ICP Computer C Copyright 1994 1997 ICP vortex Computersysteme GmbH ain Menu Select Controller Settings TEE en Control Host Drives Logical Drives Physical Drives Cache Statistics Sampling Rate ysical Drives Logical Drives Array Drives Save Information ache State Delayed Write 0k Cancel GDT6537RF in Loca ampling Rate 1 8 sec J 3 4 Physical Drives This option gives a list of all hard disks connected to the ICP Controller Besides informa tion on the ICP I O channel the ID the name vendor and the gross capacity 1MB 1024KB it also shows which hard disk s belong to a given Logical Drive When you select a hard disk in this list and then press ENTER GDTMON gives you fur ther information on the Drive Settings of this device These settings may be changed The Last Status information should always be 0x00000000 After a device failure or other significant events a different value may be displayed here The Grown Defects counter shows t
112. ad cabling wrong termination or overheating The error state GI RAID 4 5 If a second hard disk should fail while the Array Drive is in the fail or rebuild state it is not possible to continue the working session without restrictions The disk array is still avail able for I Os but data loss and error messages on the host level are possible Usually you have to remove the Array Drive and build a new one In some situations see below there might be still a chance to reset the array Please contact our support depart ments To find out why the drives failed the last status from the Physical Drive information is very helpful Additionally you should check for retries and or reassigns A drive failure may also be the result of bad or cabling wrong termination or overheating Some of these states may become the addendum patch e g build patch ready patch This word indicates that the original Array Drive went through a significant procedure 1 e the parity information was recalculated anew Or the Array Drive has been patched from the error state into the fail state This may become extremely helpful in a situation where two Logical Drives of an Array Drive fail at the same time but only one of the two Logical Drives is really defective and the other was blocked out since it was connected with the same I O channel as the defective one The Array Drive s state is error and normally all data would be lost The ICP Controllers include
113. adequate address If you accept the suggested address the ICP Controller will install its DPMEM starting at this address Since this 16KB address space which starts at free address must not be shadowed you might have to disable the shadowing manually in the system BIOS setup program In addition make sure that this address space is not used by another expansion card This is a work around not a solution PCI 2 x is a well defined specification and a fully compatible system BIOS should have assigned the DPMEM automatically If the ICP BIOS could not find an appropriate address the following message is displayed Cannot set DPMEM address aborting In this event you can try to select a new address after resetting the computer If this fails too there is no other way but to update the PCI system BIOS ii The IRO to PCI INT assignment doesn t work properly Warning controller at x y System BIOS configured IRQ Z but uses U This warning indicates a bug in the PCI System BIOS too It did not succeed in correctly assigning an IRO to a PCI INT The ICP Controller will function but the ICP BIOS must not be disabled whatsoever iii The IRO to PCI INT assignment doesn t work at all Error controller at x y could not read IRQ setting If this error message is displayed the ICP Controller will not work Intelligent Computer Peripherals 52 In all these cases you should in case iii you have to update your PCI system B
114. al coordinates channel ID LUN the manufacturer and the vendor unique name On the right side you see a list of all possible Host Drive types which can be configured When there is no Physical Drive selected in the left box all possibilities are disabled gray While you are selecting Physical Drives for the new Host Drive more and more possibilities become selectable You can select a single Physical Drive by clicking on it If you want to select more than one Physical Drive simply draw a frame around the Physical Drives or press the lt ctrl gt key and then click on all the Physical Drives you want to combine to a new array When you have finished the selection of the Physical Drives choose the type of Host Drive you want to create and click on OK If the selected Host Drive uses data striping RAID 0 4 5 or 10 you can change the default striping size If you have selected a configuration with Hot Fix Drives you can choose be tween a Private Hot Fix Drive or a Pool Hot Fix Drive After the Host Drive was created you can partition and format the Host Drive with the corresponding operating system utility If an array build started you can monitor the progress of the array build by clicking the right mouse button on the Host Drive and then selecting progress information EHSEHEB 2 Bancel Elapsed Time 00 003 2 Estimated Time 00 00 38 K 5 7 Parity Verify Click the right mouse button on the Array Drive icon RAID 4 a
115. allation is only possible if there is already a partition with enough free disk space around 150 MByte Depending on whether it is an upgrade or a new installation either WINNT EXE has to be started with the corresponding command line option e g WINNT B during a new installation via a temporary directory on a DOS Partition or the Upgrade Icon on the CDROM symbol of the inserted Windows NT CDROM can be clicked on In any of these circumstances Windows NT does not automatically enable the user to be able to insert an OEM disk With all hard disk controllers where the driver is not on the Windows NT CDROM the following problem occurs The access to the hard disk is not pos sible after the first reboot of the computer during the installation procedure Normally the error message Inaccessible Boot Device appears and the installation is stopped To avoid this error message a hidden key of Windows NT should be used As soon as the NT operating system has restarted the computer reset and the setup program starts the key F6 has to be pressed and held down when the Setup screen appears The Setup screen appears before the symbol for the Windows NT Version and the system RAM is displayed in the upper corner of the screen This is easily recognizable by a blue background color In contrast to the Boot Screen with the version message and RAM message the setup screen uses the large screen font After pressing F6 a window is opened and Windo
116. am As mentioned before the GDTMON program appears identical for all operating systems so we can demonstrate the use and functioning of this program regardless of the operating system used In previous chapters we have already described the hierarchical structure of the ICP firmware We have defined 4 different levels of hierarchy Level 1 where the physical devices named Physical Drives are found level 2 containing the Logical Drives made up of one or several Physical Drives level 3 where we have the Array Drives and finally level 4 where the Host Drives are Only the latter ones are known to the operating system The drive of a given level of hierarchy is always set up by using the drives of the next lower level as components Accordingly GDTMON has various menu options each referring to one level of hierarchy Intelligent Computer Peripherals 172 Host Drives Level 4 Logical Drives Level 2 Physical Drives ____ Level Each menu option displays the performance of the drives belonging to the corresponding level Note The performance of Array Drives and Host Drives is identical The perform ance is measured in KB s kilobyte per second transfer rate and IO s I Os per second number of simultaneously processed I Os on the ICP Controller The performance is dis played numerically as well as graphically in the form of variable horizontal bars with sepa rate indications for each drive and its write and read accesse
117. an be changed by pressing ENTER and selecting the new setting GDTSETUP Version 3 04 Apr 1998 C Copyright 1997 98 ICP vortex Computersysteme GmbH Configure Disk 0 nitialize Dis Cap MB Drive 8702 Drive B F RU FCAL A 2 B SEAGATE STI9I 1FC RU 8683 FCAL A 124 B SEAGATE STI9I 1FC RW 8538 FCAL A 129 FC 1 0 Processor Rescan for neu device Fa Extended Information With Fibre Channel devices there are only view settings which are relevant They should be On or Enabled Note Fibre Channel devices are also controlled by the SCSI protocol Intelligent Computer Peripherals 90 Press lt ESC gt to leave the SCSI Parameter Initialize menu GDTSETUP displays a warning on the destruction of all data This implies two different evaluations according to the drive s current state and the options you have selected 1 First Initialization of the device In this case the warning must be taken seriously If the drive was previously connected to a different controller e g NCR etc and still contains data this data will be lost now 2 The device was already initialized If only internal parameters such as Disconnect Synchro nous Transfer and SCSI II options have been changed the data on the drive remains in tact Only the function state of the device is changed GDTSETUP Version 3 B4D Apr 1998 Copyright 1997 98 ICP vo omputersysteme GmbH Configure Disk Parame
118. appear while loading several applications simultaneously on the server especially where large volumes are concerned This is because the Register Memory Command is normally carried out in the autoexec ncf file This is usually located in the SYS Volume An autoexec ncf file placed in the DOS Partition of the NetWare Server helps to get around this problem In order to carry out this process the disk driver has to be removed from the startup ncf and inserted into the autoexec ncf in the DOS partition In this case the disk driver has to be loaded directly after the Register Memory command An example of an autoexec ncf file register memory 1000000 1000000 LOAD C GDTRP312 In addition a further start file can be loaded on the SYS volume for differentiation e g with the name autonet ncf Intelligent Computer Peripherals 136 E 5 3 Installing NetWare 4 1 Wrong Drive Name The following problem often occurs when installing NetWare 4 1 server While copying the module cdrom nlm the system hangs forever This problem only occurs when the CDROM drive s name under MS DOS is cdrom i e the config sys autoexec bat contains the fol lowing files DEVICE aspicd sys D cdrom and mscdex D cdrom To avoid this problem simply change the CDROM s name in DOS to another name i e use D scsicd instead of D cdrom E 5 4 NetWare Server Not Stable When High Utilization High server utilization combined with a large number of
119. ard out of the anti static bag unless this is done at an anti static work place and the person handling the ICP Con troller is secured with wrist bands against electrostatic charge If these instructions are not observed the CMOS components on the ICP Controller may be damaged or destroyed Store the show box in a safe and dry place A 4 2 Delivery Contents The following items are delivered with the ICP Controller 1 ICP Controller in a sealed anti static bag 2 Sealed CDROM with driver and installation software 3 This User s Manual A 4 3 Contents of the ICP CDROM A list of the files and programs delivered with the ICP Controller can be found in the file README TXT on the enclosed CDROM The contents of this file can be viewed on screen or output on your printer Besides these files and programs there are also disk images of all ICP driver floppy disks which can be used with a special image writing program to create a full set of disks This can be helpful if you require for example a BTLD floppy disk for the installation of the ICP Controller under SCO UNIX A 4 4 Before You Start In order to avoid damage caused by improper or faulty usage or handling we strongly rec ommend reading this manual carefully before installation or first operation Intelligent Computer Peripherals 21 A 5 Product Description A 5 1 Intel i960RN 1 0 Processor The i960RN I O processor is a member of a new RISC CPU generation which was sp
120. as IRQ e g IRQ 10 Several parameters are not separated with a comma but a space are substituted with all Y with 1 and all N with 0 Default modprobe gdth disable 0 reserve_mode 1 reverse_scan 0 max_ids 127 rescan 0 G 7 Notes Further interesting information proc Support Read of proc scsi gdth 0 proc scsi gdth 1 Displays the ICP Controller SCSI busses firmware version driver version e g cat proc scsi gdth 0 Write to proc scsi gdth O gdth flush Flush all Host Drives of the ICP Controller gdth flush drive Flush the Host Drive with the number drive edth wbp off Disable Write Back permanently gdth wbp on Enable Write Back permanently gdth wb off Disable Write Back for this session from Firmware version 1 15 2 15 gdth wb on Enable Write Back for this session from Firmware version 1 15 2 15 LINUX IS GREAT Intelligent Computer Peripherals Intelligent Computer Peripherals Chapter Using SCO UNIX 156 Using SCO UNIX V 386 After having explained in chapters B and C the installation of the ICP Controller as well as that of the Host Drives we would now like to give you a few hints regarding the installation of the operating systems SCO UNIX V 386 3 2v4 x 3 2v5 x Open Server For a successful installation it is essential to read the SCO system manuals thoroughly Transparency of Host Drives The structure of the Host Dri
121. at a 3 5 HD disk 1 44MB and copy the GDT_RPFW file on this disk 3 After loading GDTSETUP from Flash RAM or from disk under MS DOS select the de sired ICP Controller for the firmware update and press the lt F2 gt key to enter the Ad vanced Setup 4 Select Configure Controller and thereafter Firmware Update Insert the disk with the firmware file into drive A GDTSETUP loaded from the Flash RAM will display a list of the valid files found on the disk If you have loaded GDTSETUP from disk you have to enter the path A first GDTSETUP Version 3 83D Mar 11 1998 Copyright 1997 98 ICP vortex Computersysteme GmbH Configure ontroller Con ontroller Co Controller Settings ta Collntelligent Fault Bus Path A 5 The update process starts as soon as the desired GDT_RPFW file has been selected Strictly observe the messages and instructions of GDTSETUP It is extremely important that the system is not switched off or reset during the update process It is very likely that this would cause the ICP Controller to become inoperable Intelligent Computer Peripherals 26 GDTSETUP Version 3 83D Mar 11 1998 Copyright 1997 98 ICP vortex GmbH Configure ontroller Ley Co Controller Settings E 1 Description Version A A The new versions of the ICP Firmware the BIOS and GDTSETUP are available after the next cold boot All user setting within GDTSETUP re
122. ation Vendor IBM Product CAS 32160W Revision 5654 Type Disk Chn ID LUN csi 4 0 Block Size 12 Bytes Capacity MB 2053 Capacity Blocks x v Sync Transfer Disconnect Drive Parameter Drive Status i E Removable Status Syne Rate 40 0MB s Cancel Write Protected No Grown Defects Proloco sc Syme Translar on o Mis Tagged Queues ReadCache IV Write Cache Disconnect On Protocol scs Retries Tagged Queues On RAW Cache On On Reassigns 0 The SCSI Parameters The SCSI parameters configure a Physical Drive especially its performance By changing the SCSI parameters you can set the synchronous transfer rate change the settings of the hard disk cache enable or disable the disconnect feature enable or disable the tagged queues Warning By changing these parameters on a new hard disk or a hard disk which has been connected with a non ICP Controller this hard disk will be initialized and all data on this hard disk will be lost Intelligent Computer Peripherals 236 You can access the change SCSI Parameters Initialize menu by clicking the right mouse button on a Physical Drive in the Physical Drives Windows View gt Physical Configuration Synchronous Transfer Different to the older asynchronous transfer mode the synchronous transfer offers higher transfer rates on the SCSI bus The maximum synchronous
123. ation menu Possible choices are Click on the popup menu items to get information on them Intelligent Computer Peripherals 231 K 4 1 Controllers Icon Description double click opens right click opens B Controller Controller Change Setlings Information Save Information Firmware Update Silence Controller Settings Type RAM Firmware Cache BIOS Supported BIOS Drives Change Settings St Features Chaining RADA 840 50 Processor 33 3 3 33 MHz 28820013 08961013 2 22 05 019 Serial No 1603566 Driver on Delayed Write Enabled BIOS Warning Level Fatal Emors i Controller Settings Memory Test C Off Off C Removed Enabled Fatal Errors No Test LO Cache Delayed Write BIOS BIOS Warning Level Supported BIOS Drives Standard Double Memory Test Here you can change the settings of the ICP Controller Cache Enables or Disables the ICP Controller cache For optimum performance the cache should be always On Delayed Enables or disables the write cache function of the ICP Controller Write cache For optimum performance the write cache should be always On BIOS The BIOS of the ICP Controller is needed to boot the computer and the operating system from a Host Drive BIOS Warn Enables or disables the display of no
124. available a 5 im om a B 3 idle Operational but not yet redundant Parity is not yet generated o 5 2 o emm 5 D om lt 5 build Operational but not yet redundant Parity is currently generated Failure of a RAID 4 parity drive Replacement either manually or through hot fix method Intelligent Computer Peripherals Chapter Using MS DOS 116 D Using Microsoft MS DOS After having explained the installation of the ICP Controller and the Host Drives in chapters B and C we now explain how to install the operating system MS DOS By using some ex amples we shall demonstrate how to partition a host drive transfer MS DOS to the host drive install Windows 3 x and use a CDROM drive standing for any other Not Direct Access Device under MS DOS In addition we will give you further information on how to install Windows 95 and Windows 98 The required ICP disks for DOS and Windows 95 98 can be created from the ICP System CDROM D 1 Transparency of Host Drives The structure of the Host Drives which have been installed with GDTSETUP in chapter C is not known to DOS i e the operating system does not recognize that a given Host Drive consists of a number of hard disks forming a disk array To DOS this Host Drive simply ap pears as one single hard disk with the capacity of the disk array This
125. available as independent host adapters The important lines in both files are printed bold CONFIG SYS device c windows himem sys device gdtx000 exe files 30 buffers 30 stacks 9 256 dos high umb shell COMMAND COM E 512 P device dos setver exe device gdt gdtaspi exe device c corel cuni_asp sys ID 6 HAN 0 N 1 D MSCD000 lastdrive h AUTOEXEC BAT path c c dos c gdt c aspi prompt SP SG c corel corelcdx M 8 D MSCD000 The first line following the HIMEM SYS command of the CONFIG SYS file loads the GDTX000 EXE The next line loads the ICP ASPI Manager GDTASPI EXE Next the corel ASPI Module for the CDROM drive is loaded The parameter D MSCD000 has nothing to do with a drive name it only serves as recognition information for CORELCDX As men tioned before it is our objective to be able to access the CDROM drive with a drive name i e E Naturally this drive name has to be free and there has to be enough drive names available For example the command LASTDRIVE H would enable the user to use drive names from A to under DOS In the AUTOEXEC BAT file the corel translation program for CDROMs CORELCDX is loaded The parameter D MSCD000 set here has to be identi cal to the parameter set after the ASPI Module in the CONFIG SYS file After a warm reboot which serves to activate the changes made in the CONFIG SYS and AUTOEXEC BAT files the CDROM drive can be accessed as drive E in our example there are two
126. ay become extremely helpful in a situation where two Logical Drives of an Array Drive fail at the same time but only one of the two Logical Drives is really defective and the other was blocked out since it was connected with the same 1 channel as the defective one The Array Drive s state is error and normally all data would be lost RAIDYNE and GDTSETUP include some functions which allow the patch of this Array Drive from the error state into the fail sate Before the actual patch the defective drive has to be physically removed from the Array Drive Such a patch procedure is a real sheet anchor and should only be used after a detailed consultation with a trained support person a printout of the Save Information file is extremely helpful Intelligent Computer Peripherals Another drive failure Adrive failure rebuild Operational but not yet redundant missing data are currently reconstructed Exchange of a drive expand Operational and redundant RAID level migrated and or capacity expanded Adrive failure 114 non existent The Disk Array is not yet defined gt o 5 Disk Array error Neither operational nor redundant the Disk Array is write protected o he 3 oe e S fail Operational but no longer redundant drive failure ready Operational and redundant Pority is generated and
127. be disabled 4 Protocol This can be either SCSI II or SCSI II If you select SCSI III make sure that your hard disk supports this protocol Most new multi GB hard disks support SCSI III To enable Ultra FAST 20 transfer rates Narrow 20 MB s Wide 40 MB s SCSI III protocol is required 5 Disk Read Cache Disk Write Cache Tagged Queues If a drive supports particular SCSI features you enable them On Note Most of the modern drives support disk caching read and write Some do not sup port Tagged Queues Press lt ESC gt to leave the SCSI Parameter Initialize menu GDTSETUP displays a warning on the destruction of all data This implies two different evaluations according to the drive s current state and the options you have selected l First Initialization of the device In this case the warning must be taken seriously If the drive was previously connected to a different controller e g NCR etc and still contains data this data will be lost now 2 The device was already initialized If only internal parameters such as Disconnect Synchronous Transfer and SCSI II op tions have been changed the data on the drive remains intact Only the function state of the device is changed Intelligent Computer Peripherals 73 GDTSEIUP Version 3 04 Apr AZ 1998 1997 98 ICP vortex Computersysteme GmbH Lo Tag Initialization of disk will destroy all data Un Continue Y N F FCAL A 2 A SEAG
128. bject to the laws of the Federal Republic of Germany Place of jurisdiction for both parties is the domicile of ICP vortex Computersysteme GmbH Intelligent Computer Peripherals 20 A 4 General Information The ICP Controller should be installed by an authorized ICP vortex distributor Precondition for the safe installation is an anti static work place earthed mat on the table with wrist bands connected to an earth ICP vortex does not take any responsibility for damage aris ing out of improper installation This manual contains all the information available at the time it was written Errors and or incomplete information are possible We are grateful for any ideas or suggestions for improvement Additional information may be found in the in formation file README TXT on the enclosed ICP CDROM Besides up to date informa tion this file also contains a list of all programs on the CDROM The contents of the file README TXT must be read before the ICP Controller is used for the first time Output is possible on printer or screen This User s Manual explains the installation and the operation of the ICP Controller For information on the use of the computer system and its operating system please refer to the corresponding system manuals A 4 1 Unpacking the ICP Controller Open the show box and take out the ICP Controller leaving it in its anti static bag the CDROM and this manual WARNING Never take the GDT PCB Printed Circuit Bo
129. caleit Note All Host Drives on the screen shown above are idle Intelligent Computer Peripherals 175 1 2 3 Logical Drives This menu option yields a list of available Logical Drives level 2 Logical Drives are the components for Array Drives and Host Drives In its most simple form a Host Drive con sists of one Logical Drive which is made up of a single hard disk type disk In case of RAID Host Drives the performance of the Logical Drives forming a RAID Host Drive are shown in the menu Logical Drives The performance data displayed here gives immediate information on the quality of a given Host Drive When judging the indicated performance of Logical Drives belonging to a RAID Host Drive the following considerations should be taken into account a RAID 0 RAID 1 RAID 10 and RAID 5 Host Drives If a certain Logical Drive shows poor performance for a longer period when compared to the other Logical Drives this Logical Drive impairs the overall performance making it the bottle neck of the entire RAID Host Drive b RAID 4 Host Drives In principle the same as in a applies to RAID 4 Host Drives with the exception made for the parity Logical Drive The poor performance can have various reasons the hard disk forming the Logical Drive is too slow different from the other hard disks with regard to type or manufacturer has wrong parameters SCSI II disk cache tagged queues etc has too many defects causing
130. carried out by Windows NT can then be omitted Instead of carrying out a scan the ICP driver will be installed manually immediately The ICP Controller should then be easily found If other disk controllers are in the system they can also be specified manually after the ICP Controller Intelligent Computer Peripherals 146 F 6 2 Installation and Upgrade of Windows NT 3 5x 4 x Windows NT in the latest Versions 3 51 and 4 0 offers various methods for the installation and the upgrade Method 1 The corresponding Setup Disks to 3 are generated and Windows NT the Up grade is installed by booting the disks In general it is recommended to use method for installing Windows NT as the operating system always enables the user to insert an OEM disk e g the driver disk of the ICP Con trollers In addition installation is much faster if method 1 is used as not all Windows NT raw files have to be copied to a temporary directory Installation according to method affords that 3 setup disks are generated This is carried out via the program Winnt exe on the Windows NT CD i e by entering the command line WINNT OX ENTER The switch OX ensures that the Setup disks are generated This command must not be carried out in a DOS box but under a normal DOS operating system Method 2 Windows NT generates a temporary directory on an existing partition and in stalls the operating system i e the upgrade from there This inst
131. ch NT should be installed on a drive of the first controller The NT Setup was booted from an IDE or SCSI CDROM and NT has carried out an automatic hardware detection There are no Host Drives on the installed ICP Controller is unable fo locate the hard drive partition prepared by the MS DOS portion of Setup The three installation disks were not created with the OX switch Thus NT Setup requires a MS DOS partition for the installation Use the OX switch to create a new set disks The SCSI adapter CD ROM drive or special disk controller you specified is not in stalled in your computer Possible reasons The ICP Windows NT driver disk is not complete The GDTX SYS driver and the OEMSETUP INF files are missing The reason could be that you copied the files from the ICP System CDROM to the ICP Windows NT driver disk with the Explorer A defective floppy disk Take a new one and make a new ICP Windows NT driver disk There is a PCI resource conflict Open Jumper S4 on the ICP Controller PCB and change within GDTSETUP the DPMEM setting to not move load GDTSETUP select the controller press F2 for Advanced Setup select Configure Controller select Advanced Settings change DPMEM mapping to do not move Intelligent Computer Peripherals Intelligent Computer Peripherals Chapter Using LINUX 150 Using LINUX After having explained the installation of the ICP Controller and the host drives in
132. chapters B and C we now explain how to install the operating system LINUX For a successful installation we recommend that you take a close look at the manuals which came with your LINUX distribution package We have tested LINUX from Caldera Debian DLD LST RedHat and S u S E G 1 Transparency of Host Drives The structure of the Host Drives which have been installed with GDTSETUP in chapter C is not known to LINUX l e the operating system does not recognize that a given Host Drive consists of a number of hard disks forming a disk array To LINUX this Host Drive simply appears as one single hard disk with the capacity of the disk array This complete transparency represents the easiest way to operate disk arrays under LINUX neither LINUX nor the PCI computer need to be involved in the administration of these complex disk array configurations G 2 Available Drivers and Tools gdth tgz ICP driver sources for intel and alpha systems gdtp2036 ez ICP driver patch for Kernel 2 0 36 intel amp alpha sdtmon tgz GDTMONitor and object files intel sdtmona tgz GDTMONitor and object files alpha The following ICP drivers are part of the various Kernel versions from Kernel 2 0 31 ICP driver 1 00 from Kernel 2 0 35 2 1 63 ICP driver 1 02 from Kernel 2 0 36 ICP driver 1 07 from Kernel 2 2 0 pre7 ICP driver 1 10 G 3 Updating the driver using the driver sources a Copy the driver sources to usr src linux drivers scsi for a D
133. con and then on the icon you want on line help ES Ee ER K 2 2 The Status Bar The status bar at the bottom of the main window displays status information on the icon or the menu option the r mouse pointer is currently placed on The status bar can be displayed hidden by selecting Status Bar from the For Help press F1 View menu K 2 3 Window Menu Commands These commands allow you to arrange the windows in the ICP RAID Navigator application window or to activate an open window Intelligent Computer Peripherals 228 Cascade Tile Arranges windows in an overlapped fashion Arranges windows in non overlapped tiles v 1 Select Controller 2 Logical Configuration 3 Controller Events Activate one of the open windows K 2 4 Help Menu Commands The Help menu offers the following commands to provide you with online help Help Topics Offers you an index of topics on which you can get help About ICPRNAY Displays the version number of this application 2 5 File Menu Commands Here you can end your ICP RAID Navigator session Shortcuts Press Alt F4 or click to close the window Exits the ICP RAID Navigator K 2 6 View Menu Commands Use the items in this menu to open or close the windows of the main components of the ICP RAID Navigator or change the appearance of the main window Select Controller Physical Configuration Lo
134. ct files alpha These archives include all object files to create gdtmon as well as an executable gdtmon compiled on a current Linux version If you encounter problems with this executable gdtmon you can easily compile a new gdtmon on your own Linux system unpack the tgz file tar gdtmon tgz compile gdtmon make start gdtmon gdtmon In order to be able to compile gdtmon you need the C compiler and the Kernel sources on your system The link usr src linux has to point to the Kernel sources which correspond with the currently booted Kernel of your system This is important for signature c to use the right magic for the communication with the driver Otherwise it may happen that you get Wrong signature when trying to start gdtmon Intelligent Computer Peripherals 152 6 gdth driver parameters Driver versions older than 1 05 do not support driver parameters From driver version 1 05 to 1 07 it is necessary to add driver parameters directly in usr src linux drivers scsi gdth c From version 1 10 on you may use for the parameters the LILO boot prompt gdth or in etc lilo conf the append command append gdth Reservation of SCSI devices The reservation of SCSI devices becomes necessary if you wish that so called Direct Access Devices e g hard disks removable hard disks like IOMEGA or SyQuest some MOs are directly controlled by Linux and not the ICP Controller s firmware i e they are not
135. curity you still preserve even in the event of disk failure thus resting assured against loss of data and time Hot Fix Drives are possible with all RAID 1 4 5 and 10 disk arrays In order to assist the following considerations we define the term time without redundancy TWR Set apart the time needed to set up the disk array state build the time without redundancy should be kept as short as possible Let us assume that one of the hard disks of the RAID 5 disk array we set up with example fails The disk array is without redundancy TWR starts to run Any superfluous prolongation of the TWR because you have to get a replacement drive or because you did not realize the failure immediately since you didn t hear the ICP Controller s alarm signal or because nobody checked the file server increases the risk of data loss which will occur if a second drive should fail Therefore new redundancy should be created as soon as possible and in an entirely automated manner Integrating a Hot Fix Drive as an immediately available and auto replacing drive is the only way to keep the TWR as short as possible Only a Hot Fix drive can ensure optimal disk array security and constant data availability Of course a Hot Fix Drive is not compulsory If you control the disk array at regular intervals and immedi ately replace a defective drive by shutting down the system or hot plugging you can do without a Hot Fix Drive K 5 12 Remove a Hot Fix Drive Click the
136. d No 1 2 Free available i e not yet assigned to a Logical Drive drives 1 and could 3 also be used for the replacement No 17 the above screen you can t see positions No 9 to No 17 but you can scroll the list with the Page Down Up keys Intelligent Computer Peripherals No 0 This is the position of the drive which should be replaced Since it is still there No 4to These are free i e not occupied plugging positions for the new hard disk On 216 GDT Controller Monitor 25 i Computer Peripherals TM isk Drives Position Chn ID Status Vendor Atte Size MB Drive SEAGATE 5152160 M NE 1 e have to he stopped until the Hot Plug is completed This affects Host Drivels Please onk IR the new disk drive with SCSI ID 3 Check if 5051 bus terminators have to he added or removed The new disk drive must have at least 200 MB capacity Fress RETURN to stop the 5051 channel for unplugging plu PCI 9 9 PCI 8 9 PCI 6 9 AM in m For our example we now take the new hard disk which must have a capacity equal to or larger than 200MB set it to SCSI ID 3 and observe the SCSI termination GDT Controller Monitor 25 a i Computer Peripherals isk Drives Position Chn ID Status Vendor Type Atte Size MB Drive SEAGATE 5152160 NE NNNM 1 RF in the e new disk dri at a channel B 5051 ID 3 MUST NOT DO A
137. d ready lt lt lt Press CIRL 6G to enter GDTSETUP gt gt gt Y Intelligent Computer Peripherals 20 The single messages have the following meaning BIOS located at 0x000E0000 0x000E1FFF Unlike ISA or EISA computers where the BIOS address of a peripheral expansion card is set manually ISA jumpers or with the help of a configuration file EISA cfg file and the ad dress space is determined by the user the PCI system BIOS automatically maps the BIOS of a PCI compatible peripheral expansion card to a memory address At each cold or warm boot it determines which address space to assign to the BIOS of an expansion card The message shown above reports the physical address occupied by the ICP BIOS PCI 0 3 PCI device bus system 0 slot 3 The PCI 2 x specification allows several PCI bus systems to be present in one PCI computer All ICP Controllers have been designed to support multi ple PCI bus system computers The slot number indicated in the message above does not refer to the 3rd PCI slot but indicates that the ICP Controller is plugged into a slot which is the third one the PCI chipset of the PCI computer can access To determine which physical PCI slot this corresponds to consult the system manual of your PCI computer DPMEM at 0x000D0000 0x000D3FFF INTA IRQIO DPMEM stands for Dual Ported MEMory The ICP Controller needs this 16KB address space of the PCI Computer for the command communication I
138. d 18 RAID 0 Definition 59 RAID 1 Definition 59 RAID 10 Definition 61 RAID 4 Definition 60 RAID 5 Definition 60 RAID functions 21 README TXT File 20 Read Write Status 70 88 Reassign GDTMON 177 Redundant loops 31 Repeater 29 Replacement of a defective drive 105 Retries 177 SC Duplex Connector 33 SCA backplane 30 SCA connector 30 SCO UNIX GDTSYNC 161 SCSI Bus Termination 42 SCSI bus termination active 21 SCSI bus synchronous transfer 71 SCSI Cables 38 SCSI ID 43 SCSI RISC processor 17 Intelligent Computer Peripherals SCSI Fast 20 Ultra SCSI 38 SCSI 3 specification 38 SCSI II III Options 72 Seek time 31 Shielded Twisted Pair 32 Simulating a Drive Failure 103 Single Ended SCSI 38 Single port controller 29 Software License Agreement 19 Statistics Window 252 Synchronization Mirroring update 195 Tagged Queues 168 175 The Basics of SCSI 38 TP TL TH and S4 Jumpers 23 UnixWare BTLD Disk 164 Updating the ICP Controller with new Firmware 55 Using LINUX 150 Using Microsoft MS DOS 116 Using Microsoft Windows NT 140 264 Using Novell NetWare 132 Using SCO UNIX V 386 156 Using UnixWare 164 Using Windows 95 127 Using Windows 98 129 Virtual DMA Services 120 Warranty 4 Website 18 What is the ICP Controller Firmware 58 Wide amp Ultra SCSI 17 Wide Ultra SCSI Flat Ribbon Cable 43 Wide SCSI Adapter 43 Wide SCSI Bracket 43 Windows NT Master Boot Record 141 Window
139. d as boot drive because it has the lowest drive number that is 0 and is therefore the first drive to be communicated to the system Target ID and LUN of Not Direct Access Devices devices such as streamers tapes CD ROMS etc not configurable with GDTSETUP are determined on the basis of the SCSI ID and the SCSI channel used by the ICP Controller These devices can only be configured with SCSI IDs 2 to 6 SCSI ID 0 and 1 are reserved for hard disks SCSI ID 7 for the ICP Controller If Not Direct Access Devices are configured on SCSI ID 0 or 1 they are not recognized during the scanning process and can therefore not be used The Target IDs of Not Direct Ac cess Devices are identical to their SCSI ID the LUN depends on the SCSI channel used LUN 0 for SCSI channel A and LUN 4 for SCSI channel B Note After a cold boot the ICP BIOS displays all connected devices with their physical coordinates i e their SCSI ID and SCSI LUN see Chapter B ICP Controller Function Check SCSI ID of Not Direct Access Used ICP UNIX UNIX Devices SCSI channel Target ID LUN 2 A 2 0 3 A 3 0 4 A 4 0 5 A 5 0 6 A 6 0 2 B 2 4 3 B 3 4 4 B 4 4 5 5 4 6 B 6 4 Having to determine the Target ID and LUN in such a complicated manner might seem rather awkward However it is necessary to do so because the ICP Controllers have more than one SCSI channel whereas UNIX can only manage host adapters with one SCSI chan nel Therefore the ICP UNIX driver
140. d disk has failed so that the system administrator can see on the enclosure display Fault LEDs or LCDs which disk needs to be swapped B 4 3 FC Connectors and Cables A net data transfer rate of 100 MB sec corresponds to a signal frequency on the FC cable of 1 GHz This extremely high frequency necessitates the highest quality connectors and ca bles which means only those from reputable manufacturers should be used Because the distances between individual FC devices RAID controllers and hard drives in Example for a copper cable mass storage systems are not great the less expensive copper cabling is most often used Three different kinds of copper cabling with DB 9 connectors similar to serial PC interface are defined for FC Video Coaxial Miniature Coaxial and Shielded Twisted Pair This cabling enables the 100 MB sec transfer rate for distances up to 25 meters If the FC devices or de vice groups such as a complete FC enclosure have to be further than 25 meters apart the Intelligent Computer Peripherals 33 signal transmission can be carried via optical fiber The 50 um multi mode optical fibers with shortwave lasers can handle cable lengths up to 500 meters and the 62 5 um multi Mode optical fibers up to 175 meters SC duplex connectors should be used in these situa tions 9 um single mode optical fiber with longwave lasers can travel up to 10 km The dis tances discussed here refer to the distance between devices
141. dard terminal entry by a new one cd usr lib terminfo ENTER tic gdt386 src ENTER Before each loading of gdtmon this terminal has to be activated by TERM gdt386 ENTER export TERM ENTER These two lines can also be inserted in the profile file and will then be automatically processed during each login The gdtmon program itself is copied during the SCO UNIX installation into the etc directory gdtmon is loaded by entering gdtmon ENTER J 1 6 Loading gdtmon under LINUX The ICP System CDROM includes two archives gdtmon tez GDTMONitor and object files intel gdtmona tgz GDTMONitor and object files alpha These archives include all object files to create gdtmon as well as an executable gdtmon compiled on a current Linux version If you encounter problems with this executable gdtmon you can easily compile a new gdtmon on your own Linux system unpack the tgz file tar gdtmon tgz compile gdtmon make start gdtmon gdtmon In order to be able to compile gdtmon you need the C compiler and the Kernel sources on your system The link usr src linux has to point to the Kernel sources which correspond with the currently booted Kernel of your system This is important for signature c to use the right magic for the communication with the driver Otherwise it may happen that you get Wrong signature when trying to start gdtmon GDTMON is loaded by entering gdtmon ENTER J 2 The GDTMON Progr
142. detail View the ICP Controller configuration View Last Events View Change the Intelligent Fault Bus settings View Change the ICP cache parameters View Change the SCSI parameters Display the structure of Logical Drives Add Remove Mirror Drives to from Host Drives Perform a Hot Plug on a RAID 1 Host Drive Add Remove Private Hot Fix and Pool Hot Fix drives to from a RAID 1 Host Drive Display the structure of RAID 4 5 10 Host Drives Perform a Parity Verify on RAID 4 5 Host Drives Perform a Parity Recalculation on RAID 4 5 Host Drives Perform online capacity expansion and or RAID level migration Perform a Hot Plug on RAID 4 5 10 Host Drives Add Remove Private Hot Fix and Pool Hot Fix drives to from RAID 4 5 10 Host Drives Save all relevant configuration data to disk some information on the so called Hot Plug of fault tolerant disk arrays RAID 1 4 5 10 is given below Intelligent Computer Peripherals 181 J 3 1 Notes and Information on the Hot Plug function of GDTMON Fault tolerant means that a hard disk which is part of a RAID 1 4 5 10 Array Drive can fail without causing data loss on the Array Drive At the same time the Array Drive remains fully accessible Obviously the Array Drive then lacks the redundant data therefore the defective disk should be replaced by an intact one as soon as possible In chapters C RAIDYNE Quick Setup and in the addendum GDTSETUP in Detail we have shown with various examples how to
143. disable the SCSI bus termination on some devices resistor array packs or a jumper have to be re moved on others like the ICP Controllers soft switches allow a very comfortable setting of the SCSI bus termination Furthermore on each SCSI device it must be possible for ex ample through a jumper to switch the voltage on the terminator power line TERMPWR of the SCSI cable on or off For all configurations with ICP Controllers we recommend that you use exclusively SCSI devices with an active SCSI bus termination Always use active SCSI bus termination Do not use SCSI devices with passive SCSI bus termination e g CDROMs for the ter mination of the SCSI cable Always terminate only the two ends of a SCSI cable The TERMPWR jumper TP on the ICP Controller PCB should always be set In this way it is the ICP Controller which supplies the termination power on the SCSI cable and no other SCSI device may supply termination power on the cable The connections listed in the table below are the only valid connections allowed Any other connection setup even if physically possible is not allowed as it will cause serious mal functions or even the destruction of the SCSI device and or the ICP Controller The termina tion settings can be changed within GDTSETUP Internal female connector Internal male connector Termination Setting 68 pin 50 pin of the ICP Controller Occupied and end terminated Not occupied Not occupied
144. disks they are marked with On the right side GDTSETUP offers highlighted the possible configurations with these drives Intelligent Computer Peripherals 64 GDTSETUP Version 3 04 Apr H2 1998 Copyright 1997 98 ICP vortex Computersysteme GmbH elect Physical Drive noose D LUN Vendor Product Attr Cap MB Drive ingle Dis SEAGATE ST19171FC RU 8538 halning SEAGATE 51191710 M 9938 e 5 L HotFix d lotFix sHlotFix 1A HotFix Al SPACE Select Deselect drive ENTER End selection Al Al Al Al HI Pressing ENTER ends the selection GDTSETUP Version 3 04 Apr 1998 Copyright 1997 98 ICP vortex Computersysteme GmbH FERE MU After choosing a configuration type for an Array Drive GDTSETUP displays a security re quest Intelligent Computer Peripherals 65 GDTSETUP Version 3 04 Apr H2 1998 Copyright 1997 98 ICP vortex Computersysteme GmbH elect Physical Drive Choose ly D LUN Vendor Product Attr Cap MB Drive Single Dis A SEAGATE STISITIFC RU 8538 Chaining SEAGATE STL9L71FC RU 8538 RAIDA A SEAGATE STL9L71FC RU 9583 Do you want to create host drive from the selected disk s CAUTION 11 data will he destroyed Y N 8i After this confirmation you can adjust the capacity per drive used for the disk array GDTSETUP Version 3 04 Apr 1998 Copyright 1997 98 ICP vortex Compute
145. e hard disk concerned defective The retry counter also increases when the SCSI parameters of a hard disk are changed see further ahead Obviously retries due to this do not imply bad cabling 2 The reassign counter reflects the number of media defects which occur on the hard disk drive Defective blocks of the hard disk are assigned substitute blocks spare blocks which are either on the same track or on alternate ones if all spare blocks on the same track are already in use The administration of the reassignments is carried out by the hard disk through according reassignment tables Note If a hard disk works with alternate tracks it is generally no longer suitable for applications with high performance expectations When ever a defective block is being accessed the read write actuator has to move to an alternate position and this requires extra time If you observe that the number of reassigns is constantly increasing you may suspect that something is wrong with this drive With the lt and keys you can change the scale of the graphical KB s indication With the and 4 keys you can scroll the screen to see more hard disks if available J 2 5 Cache Statistics This menu option gives information on the utilization of the ICP cache For RAID 4 5 Host Drives the data cache and parity cache are displayed separately Note The ICP firmware only allocates cache RAM to the ICP parity cache if RAID4 5 Host Drives have been set up
146. e or rather create a number of smaller RAID Host Drives instead The minimum number of necessary hard disks depends on the RAID level you wish to realize Minimum number of hard disks _ RADO datstmipng 2 RAID disk mirroring 12 RAID 4 data striping with parity drive 3 RAIDS data striping with striped parity RAID 10 data striping and mirroring The desired usable disk space of the disk array as well as the following two issues have a direct impact on the number of physical hard disks needed 10 2 Which Level of Redundancy is Needed To come straight to the point RAID 0 data striping does not imply any redundancy at all the R in front of the AID is rather misleading On the other hand a RAID 0 disk array is pretty fast since no parity information is required With RAID 1 disk mirroring the data is 10096 redundant because it is mirrored This is definitely the highest level of redundancy but the most expensive one too An interesting combination of RAID levels 0 and 1 is RAID 10 Two RAID 0 stripe sets are simply mirrored If one drive fails the data are still available on the mirrored drive With RAID 4 data striping with dedicated drive and RAID 5 data striping with striped parity parity information is calculated from the present data with a simple mathematical operation eXclusive OR XOR and stored either to one dedicated drive RAID 4 or to all drives RAID 5 If one drive sho
147. e 132MB sec in 32 Bit PCI slot and 264MB sec in a 64 Bit slot A 5 5 Up to 2 Fibre Channel Interfaces plus 1 Ultra Wide SCSI Channel The ICP Controllers are available with one or two Fibre Channel interfaces and have always one Wide Ultra SCSI channel for legacy SCSI devices Per Loop up to 126 devices can be connected The maximum data transfer rate is 100 on the Fibre Channel and 40MB sec on the Wide Ultra SCSI channel The Wide Ultra SCSI channel is equipped with a SCSI 2 compliant alternative 2 active and software switchable SCSI bus termination which allows for a separate termination of the lower and higher byte of the SCSI bus A 5 6 ICP Controller Firmware RAIDYNE PCI BIOS and GDTSETUP The firmware the BIOS of the ICP Controller and the configuration program GDTSETUP are stored in a Flash RAM on the ICP Controller PCB The firmware is designed for parallel processing and it controls all resources of the ICP Controller This means that the entire administration of the devices and RAID is exclusively carried out by the ICP Controller Thus the host is significantly offloaded In addition this hardware implemented solution guarantees the highest achievable security The controller BIOS provides a complete PCI Intelligent Computer Peripherals 22 compatible INT13 interface with 8GB DOS partition extension and 7 BIOS drives and ex pands the respective functions of the system BIOS It also ensures that operatin
148. e ICP BIOS can be removed Using the Test option may cause the system to freeze 12 Remove the ICP Windows 95 driver disk Restart the system Intelligent Computer Peripherals 129 D 8 3 Update the ICP Windows 95 Driver 1 Download the WIN95 EXE file from the ICP web site http www icp vortex com This self extracting file contains all the Windows 95 files you need 2 Run WIN95 EXE to get the update files 3 Format a 3 5 HD disk 1 44MB Copy all Windows 95 files to this disk 4 In Windows 95 double click on My Computer icon Double click Control Panel 5 Double click System icon Click Device Manager tab 6 Double click SCSI controller icon Double click the ICP Controller shown 7 Click Driver tab Click Change Driver 8 Click Have Disk Insert the Windows 95 driver disk created in step 3 9 Click OK until you reach a prompt to specify the location of the update files 10 Select the drive where the update disk is located Click OK 11 When file copy is done remove the update disk and click Yes 12 After installation of the new driver the system needs to reboot before the new settings will take effect D 9 Installing Windows 98 The Mini Port Driver for Windows 95 which is delivered on the ICP System CDROM can be also used for Windows 98 If Windows 98 is installed via a CDROM which is connected with the ICP Controller the following installation instructions have to be observed Step 1 Preparation of t
149. e accessed via network You can maintain and monitor a customer s server via the Internet Supported protocols IPX SPX TCP IP NetBIOS The access to the ICP Controller can be protected by password The password is en crypted To install the ICP RAID Navigator use the Setup program on the ICP System CDROM Intelligent Computer Peripherals 227 K 2 The ICP RAID Navigator Controls K 2 1 The Toolbar The toolbar can be made visible or hidden by selecting Toolbar from the View menu By clicking on the different buttons you can open and close the windows of the corresponding programs of the in xc 9 ICP RAID Navigator The toolbar can be moved away from the top of the RAID Navigator window and is then shown in a small extra window To place the toolbar back under the menu bar you can dou ble click on the top window bar of the toolbar or drag amp drop the toolbar back under the menu bar You can also place the toolbar on the bottom of the RAID Navigator window Opens closes Description Select Controller Select a local or remote ICP Controller for further ac tions a o 3 Physical Configuration Show and or modify the ICP Controller and device set tings Logical Configuration Show and or modify the Logical Drive configuration Statistics Show statistics Events Show the ICP Controller events Show information on the ICP RAID Navigator Click on this i
150. e beep beep short_pause etc All ICP Controller require a memory module for operation Intelligent Computer Peripherals 261 L 3 LEDs and Jumpers No other Jumpers may be set changed removed than TP TL TH The picture shows GDT7x29RN For a GDT7x19RN headers LEDs for FCB are not assem bled LEDs FCA FCB Activity Fibre Channel A B LED Connector SCSI Acitivity SCSI Cathode Left T DMA Transfer TP Termination Power Status Controller Good Termination el Byte FCB SCSI T TH Termination High Byte TP TL TH et FCB FCA SCSI Sum Do not change setting 22 Left header External Red LED on Acoustical Alarm Loop open Right header External Green LED on Temperature Alarm Status Loop OK d Intelligent Computer Peripherals L 4 Index 64 Bit PCI bus master slot 47 Acoustical Alarm 86 Acoustical Alarm RAM failure 260 Activate the primary DOS partition 116 Arbitrated Loop Topology 29 Architecture 64 Bit 21 ARCserve Backup Software 137 ASPI 22 67 122 ASPI Interface 122 ASPI Manager 122 125 ASPI module 122 ASPIDISK SYS 125 ASPISCAN EXE 125 ASPITRAN DSK ASPI Layer 132 ASW ASPI module 125 Backup 6 BBS Mailbox 18 55 BIOS of GDT Controller shadowing 51 BIOS Version updating the ICP Controller 55 BIOS DPMEM mapping 51 Cache algorithm 21 Cache RAM 21 28 Cache RAM detection automatic 17 CD ROM Drive 122 Circular daisy chain 29 Cluster Drive 239
151. e low level format you are asked if you want to delete the grown defect list of the drive Deleting this list does not mean that the grown defects media de fects vanish It is very likely that the low level format will trace them again and map them out Usually there is no need to low level format a drive This should be only done with a defective drive If you want to check the surface of a hard disk it is better to use the check surface function Warning It is strongly recommended not to interrupt a low level format of a drive This may cause an inoperable drive Check Surface Caution This function deletes ALL DATA on the selected Physical Drive The hard disk which you want check may not be member of a Logical Drive This function writes certain data patterns to the disk and reads them afterwards Thus media defects can be marked and mapped out into the grown defect list The check surface function can be interrupted at any time Deinitialize a Physical Disk Deinitializing a Physical Drive removes the ICP initialization sectors The Physical Drive may not be member of a Logical Drive if you want to deinitialize it Lock Unlock a Removable Disk With this function you can lock or unlock a removable drive containing a removable me dium If the Physical Drive is locked the medium cannot be ejected with the eject button while the system is running Intelligent Computer Peripherals 238 K 4 4 Non direct access devices raw
152. e same as in the first example therefore we do not explain it again Step 2 regards the initialization of the second device Proceed as described in the first ex ample Step 3 Configure Logical Drives We now leave level by pressing the lt ESC gt key and are back in the main menu Now with the cursor keys 1 and 4 select Configure Logical Drives and go to level 2 by pressing lt gt Apr 82 1998 rsysteme GmhH Advanced Setup Configure Controller Conti ure Physical Devices onfigure ogical Drives onfigure Array Drives Conf igure Host Drives Save Information Fe Express Setup The main screen of level 2 appears Move the selection bar to Create new Logical Drive and press lt gt Intelligent Computer Peripherals 80 GDTSEIUP Version 3 04 Apr AZ 1998 Copyright 1997 98 ICP vortex Computersysteme GmbH figure Controller onfigure Physical Devices Drives 1gure ogica E i Type belongs to RU 1 2808 MB Disk Host 1 DISK BH ok RU 538 MB Disk Note The already existing Logical Drive in the first position of this list has no relevance for our example The second entry was created before in Example 1 Controller onfigure Physical Devices Drive 1gure ogica Drive elec Name Status Attrib Capacita Type belongs to DISK_Al ok RU 1 2600 MB Disk Host 1 DISK BA ok RU 1 8538 MB Disk Ho
153. e this menu by pressing the lt ESC gt key In order obtain optimum performance from your ICP Controller it is essential that the Cache and the Delayed Write options of the ICP Controller are set ON too If you should find different settings here we recommend that they be changed now Intelligent Computer Peripherals 25 B 8 2 Updating the ICP Controller With New Firmware and BIOS Versions The firmware the BIOS and the GDTSETUP program of the ICP Controller are stored in a Flash RAM which is part of the ICP Controller hardware In contrast to EPROMs Flash RAMs can be re programmed many times and without the complicated UV light erasing procedure Thus both software modules can be easily updated without having to remove the controller from its PCI slot Firmware and BIOS are part of the GDT_RPFW file The file has an extension e g GDT_RPFW 009 which indicates the version stepping The latest version of the this file can be downloaded either from our 24h BBS 49 0 7131 5972 15 or from our Website http www icp vortex com We recommend that you also download the packed files which contain the latest programs drivers for the operating system used on your system Observe the following order when carrying out the updating procedure 1 Get the latest GDT RPFW file for the ICP Controller download it from our BBS or our Website or ask for an upgrade disk if you do not have a modem The file does NOT need to be expanded 2 Form
154. e to be specified when the ICP ASPI manager is loaded DEVICE GDTASPI EXE R Hx1lyl Hx21y2 Hx31y3 H host adapter number I SCSI ID of the SCSI device to be reserved xl yl host adapter number SCSI ID of the first SCSI device to be reserved in decimal form x2 y2 host adapter number SCSI ID of the second SCSI device to be reserved in decimal form Example We assume that there is only one ICP Controller in the system Two direct access devices the removable hard disk connected to channel A ID 2 and the hard disk connected to channel B ID 4 have to be reserved for the ASPI manager The corresponding entry in the CONFIG SYS is DEVICE GDTASPI EXE R HOI2 H114 Important note SCSI devices reserved for the ASPI manager must not have been initialized with GDTSETUP Neither must they pertain to an ICP Logical or Host Drive If necessary these devices can be de initialized with GDTSETUP As already mentioned in paragraph 6 of this chapter in addition to the ASPI manager an ASPI module has to be present in order to be able to access the SCSI device under MS DOS with a drive name e g D E In the following description you find how to install ASPI interface reserved direct access devices with the ASW ASPI module ASPIDISK SYS and the corelSCSI ASPI module UNI_ASP SYS D 7 1 Using ASW ASPIDISK SYS Step 1 Include GDTX0000 EXE GDTASPI EXE with appropriate reservations R and ASPIDISK SYS in the CONFIG SY
155. ecifically designed for I O applications This pure 64 Bit CPU on an ICP Controller can reach a per formance of 100 MIPS and supervises all tasks of the Fibre Channel SCSI devices the RAID controlling and the communication with the PCI computer In doing so it signifi cantly offloads the PCI computer leaving it free to perform its original tasks A 5 2 64 Bit Architecture To meet the demands on a high performance controller the bus architecture of the ICP Controller has a 64 Bit layout 64 Bit control processor i960RN I O Processor 64 Bit Fibre Channel processors Tachyon TL 64 Bit bus interface PCI A 5 3 Cache RAM Expandable to 64MB The cache RAM of an ICP Controller consists of one ICP ECC SDRAM Module ESM The cache size is flexible as different memory sizes can be obtained by using different modules Thus the memory can be expanded to 16MB 32MB or 64MB An intelligent multi level cache algorithm ensures that a high hit rate cache hit is achieved Both look ahead and special delayed write cache functions are implemented With the ICP configuration pro gram GDTSETUP and the monitoring utilities GDTMON and ICP RAID Navigator the user can adjust various cache parameters A 5 4 Compatibility PCI The ICP Controllers have been developed in accordance with the 2 1 PCI Bus specifications They perform full bus master DMA and can be operated in both 32 Bit and 64 Bit PCI bus mastering slots The transfer rates ar
156. ed users To install the ICP Service under Windows NT copy ICPSRV EXE and ICPSRV CPL into the winnt system32 directory and load ICPSRV i from the command line This installs the service In a next step load in the control panel the services program and activate the ICP Service with the Start button Service Status Startup Cheyenne Alert Notification Server Automatic ClipBook Server Started Manual Computer Browser Started Automatic DHCP Client Disabled Directory Replicator Manual EventLog Started Automatic Gateway Service for NetWare Started Automatic ICPService Started Automatic License Logging Service Started Automatic Startup Messenger Started Automatic Startup Parameters Hep If you want to start the ICP Service during every new boot of the system automatically click on the Startup button To configure the ICP Service double click on the ICP Service icon The Poll Interval determines the time between two message acquisitions of the ICP Service Under Workstation you can add workstations which receive broadcast messages from the ICP Controller In the device driver section you can add or remove parameters for the gdtx sys driver e g reserve parameters for raw devices Intelligent Computer Peripherals 256 Control Panel File Edit View Help Accessibilty Add Remove Console Date Time Devices Display Options Programs EHE sab ICP Service 215 GSNW 1 Service
157. ee manner In many cases these information are not only applicable to ICP Controllers but in general to all those SCSI systems which like the ICP Controllers use Single Ended SCSI bus chan nels According to its definition the SCSI bus provides access to several participants that are physically connected through an appropriate SCSI bus cable To achieve a sufficiently good signal quality it is not only recommended to use very good cables and connectors but also to terminate both ends of the cable properly For an unambiguous identification on the bus all participants have a unique number the so called SCSI ID Further details on these topics can be found on the following pages Please note that 98 of all SCSI related problems are caused by bad SCSI cables wrong SCSI bus termination and duplicate SCSI IDs B 5 1 SCSI Cables The quality and overall length of the cable as well as the number and quality of the SCSI connectors is very important for both internal and external SCSI cables Generally internal SCSI cables are 50 or 68 conductor flat ribbon cables To connect external SCSI devices round and shielded cables with appropriate connectors are typically used The minimum Cross section per line has been defined in the SCSI 3 specification as follows 50 conductor cables minimum 28 AWG conductors and with 68 conductor cables minimum 30 AWG conductors The typical impedance of a SCSI cable is 84 Ohm 12 Ohms The maximum dif
158. eessseed 252 K 7 The Controller Events WindOW 0 cssssesssssssssesscssssseesscsssssssesesssssssesssessssesssesssseesesesssseseessnssnsseseessssnees 253 ICP RAID Navigator pictores t bunte 254 K 9 ICP Service and 255 2 260 L 1 Technical Data of the ICP Controller ees 260 L 2 Boot Error Messoges as sus le 260 3 LEDs and JUMpers reihe 26 mu 262 Intelligent Computer Peripherals Intelligent Computer Peripherals Chapter Information A Introduction 64 Bit Hardware RAID Disk Array Controllers with 1 or 2 Fibre Channel Interfaces for 32 Bit and 64 Bit PCI Bus Computer Systems In order to take full advantage of modern operating systems high performance computer systems are needed When assessing the performance of a computer system the aspects speed and security of the mass storage subsystem are gaining increasing importance As a result of the constantly growing acceptance of the RAID technology Redundant Array of Independent Disks in these computer systems and the identification of the RAID control ler as the essential part of a disk subsystem a strong demand for suitable RAID controllers has emerged during the past few years Since 1990 ICP vortex has been intensively engaged in the research and development of RAID products for the
159. eldrv UNI_ASP SYS C 4 ID 4 1 VOL 1 DOS4 SS 512 4 98 Note Drives run with corelSCSI and the UNI_ASP SYS driver are neither compatible with drives run with GDTSETUP and the ICP cache nor with those run with the above mentioned ASPIDISK SYS driver Intelligent Computer Peripherals 127 D 8 Installing Windows 95 This guide will take you through the process to install the files necessary to allow the con troller to operate under Windows 95 We differentiate three cases The ICP Controller is the primary controller the ICP Controller is the secondary controller and the ICP Controller is already installed under Windows 95 and its driver should be updated D 8 1 The ICP Controller is the primary controller You must create an MS DOS partition on and format the drive to which Windows 95 is to be installed You also need a CDROM that is fully accessible under MS DOS 1 Transfer the WIN95 files from the ICP System CDROM to 3 5 floppy disk The files are located in the directory your CDROM drive letter DRIVERS WIN95 You will need this disk later in the Windows 95 Setup Power on the system Press Ctrl G to enter the GDTSETUP program Select the controller lt ENTER gt Press F2 to enter Advanced Setup Highlight Configure Controller lt ENTER gt Highlight Controller Settings lt ENTER gt Highlight Delayed Write ENTER Highlight OFF ENTER Delayed write is now disabled This is done to ensure a
160. elligent Computer Peripherals 188 Example Session for Application 1 We assume that there is a RAID Array Drive which is fault tolerant Its state is vv both Logical Drives are valid After selecting the Array Drive we choose the Replace Mirror Drive option GDT Controller Monitor ICF Intelli Copyright 1994 1997 Er ent Computer TH omputersysteme GM t Drive Information Saye Information aMpling Rate View Change Settings GDT6537RP in Local_Sys Sampling Rate 1 8 sec GDT Controller Monitor ICF Intelli ent Computer ae TH Copyright 1994 1997 H omputersysteme GM t Phus qu ogical Drive Settings Saye Information rive Name Set Log Mirror Drive Hot Plug en Mirror Drive Hot Plug Add Pool Hot Fix Drive Hot Plug Remove Pool Hot Fix Drive Pool Hot Fix Access GDT6537RP in Local us Sampling Rate 1 A list is displayed which shows the members of the RAID 1 Array Drive Intelligent Computer Peripherals 189 GDT Controller Monitor v1 25 ICP Intelligent Computer Peripherals TM rives No Atte Size MB Drive is Position Chn ID Status Vendor Type a RIG B i SEAGATE SToalodN RH 2068 valid Select one of the disk drives for Hot Plus ot P uj i Min Hot Flug R
161. enove Mirror Dee Hot Plug Add Pool Hot Fix Drive Hot Plug Remove Pool Hot Fix Drive Pool Hot Fix Access GDT6937RP in Local_Sys Sampling Rate 1 GMT Controller Monitor 25 i Computer Peripherals TM isk Drives Position Chn ID Status Vendor Atte Size MB Drive SERGATE 51521601 1 valid Scanning SCHI channels tanget IFs Please wait or Drive Hot Flug Plug Mirror Drive Hot Plug Add Pool Hot Fix Drive Hot Plug Remove Pool Hot Fix Drive Pool Hot Fix Access GDT6937RP in Local_Sys Sampling Rate 1 The Hot Plug function now displays a list of the positions available for the new drive Each position is univocally determined by its coordinates channel ID Obviously the new drive can only be assigned to a position which is not occupied by another device yet ex ception made for the position still occupied by the drive to be exchanged We choose entry number and press lt ENTER gt Intelligent Computer Peripherals 190 GDT Controller Monitor v1 25 ICP Intelligent Computer Peripherals TM isk Drives Position Chn ID Status Vendor Atte Size MB Drive 219 A 6 i SEAGATE 57521600 RH 2068 valid Disk Drive Fositions Position Chn ID Status Vendor Attr Size MB Drive PCI 0 9 2 i SEAGATE 6152160 28 PCI 0 9 1 QUANTUM 2105 918 18 94 4 PCI 6 9 2 5 PCI 6 9 3
162. er Peripherals 258 Following is a typical message generated by ICP Mail Feb 08 20 34 46 1999 Adapter 0 Array Drive 1 drive build finished successtully The Mail option allows the interfacing to a standard mailing system like Microsoft Out look or Exchange Intelligent Computer Peripherals Chapter L Appendix L Appendix 260 L 1 Technical Data of the ICP Controller Board Size PCI Bus Weight Temperature Range in Operation measured in the enclosure Temperature Range not in Opera tion Humidity in Operation Maximum Altitude in Operation Power Consumption 5V 12V 1 2 Boot Error Messages Error Message Standard PCI long card format 32 Bit 64 Bit 33MHz 5 Volt 0 35 kg 10 to 55 C or 50 to 131 F 10 to60 C 14 10 140 F 2096 to 7596 not condensing 3000 meter or approximately 10 000 feet approximately 10 Watt possible cause remarks Error detected on SIOP x Memory error detected SCSI cable defective hard disk connected defective SIOP x defective SCSI bus not properly terminated termination power missing Memory Module defective Memory errors of the ICP Controller are also indicated acoustically with the audio alarm of the ICP Controller 3 beeps repeated every 10 seconds The following audio alarm sequence indicates that the ICP Controller is tried to be oper ated without a memory module beep beep short_pause beep beep long_paus
163. er device is dev rdsk cOb0t0d0s0 In this case dev rgdth can be generated with In dev rdsk cObOtOd0s0 dev rgdth c0 HA b0 Bus number 0 Target ID 0 40 LUN 0 sO UnixWare partition All new SCSI devices will be automatically recognized and a corresponding special device file will be generated Host Drives must be partitioned and a file system file system s must be created You can do this with diskadd cCbBtTdD a When using Direct Access Devices with exchangeable media e g removable hard disks that are not reserved for the raw service a media has to be inserted either when the system is booted or with GDTSETUP mount unmount otherwise the device is not available under UnixWare The ICP UnixWare driver supports Direct Access Devices e g hard disks removable hard disks as SCSI raw devices This is especially important if you use removable hard disks which you want to exchange with other controllers How to reserve a device for the SCSI raw service is described in the file space c on the ICP BTLD disk example and documentation Multi processor support The ICP device drivers for UnixWare 2 xy and 7 support multi processor systems Intelligent Computer Peripherals Chapter J GDTMON 168 J The Diagnosis Program GDTMON GDTMON GDT monitor is a helpful and flexible diagnosis tool for the monitoring main tenance and tuning of mass storage subsystems which are based on one or more
164. er is the only controller in the system and that the operating system is booted from its first Host Drive We highly recommend you to install Windows NT with the three floppy disks which came with your Windows NT software package and not to use any other installation method It is very easy to create a new set three HD floppy disks of Windows NT installations disks with winnt ox lt ENTER gt for MS DOS and the MS DOS mode of Windows95 98 or winnt32 ox ENTER for a Windows95 98 32 Bit environment or Windows NT Intelligent Computer Peripherals 143 Both programs winnt exe and winnt32 exe are in the i386 directory of the Windows NT CD Important note for the installation of the Small Business Server SBS The original installation disks contained in the original SBS package are not suitable for installations with hard disk controllers other than already on the installation disks Thus you cannot use the original installation disks In order to obtain suitable disks follow these two steps A Create a new set with loading Winnt OX from the i386 directory of the SBS CDROM No 1 Do not execute this command in a DOS window but only under a normal DOS oth erwise the OX switch is ignored You need three new formatted 3 5 HD floppy disk B After finishing the creation of the three new installation disks copy the WINNT SIF file from the SBS CDROM No 1 onto Installation Disk 2 The file is also located in t
165. ersysteme GmbH Configuration of drive s was modified System will be rebooted Press any key to reboot As we are done with the installation and therefore definitely want to leave GDTSETUP we press any key IMPORTANT Always end GDTSETUP by leaving the program in the regular way do not warm boot with CTRL ALT DEL or cold boot by pressing the RESET button Certain information is only transferred to the controller when you leave GDTSETUP in the regular way After rebooting the system load GDTSETUP anew Change to the Advanced Setup menu select Configure Array Drives and press ENTER Select the Array Drive press lt ENTER gt and move the selection bar to the Build Rebuild prog ress menu Press ENTER Intelligent Computer Peripherals 102 GDTSETUP Version 3 04 Apr AZ 1998 Copyright 1997 98 ICP vortex Computersysteme GmbH Array Drive Change Drive Expand y Drive Add RAID 1 Replace Ar ri Array Remove RAI Remove Arr Elapsed Time 88 88 59 Estimated Time 00 43 7B Press ESC to quit Hot Fix Drive Remove Hot Fix Drive Hot Fix Pool Access e Information Refresh Parity Verify Parity Recalculate From the progress information slider we can easily see that the 17 GB disk array is already built up 2 and that the estimated time for the build process is 43 minutes Note During the build process the disk array is fully operational but n
166. es like streamers tapes and CD ROMs and therefore not configurable via GDTSETUP are directly assigned to the SCSI ID and the channel of the ICP Controller Host Drives are assigned in increasing order to the free coordinates bus number and target ID LUN is always 0 Configuration Example In the PCI computer are two ICP Controllers HA 0 Ist ICP HA 1 2nd ICP each with two SCSI channels 1 hard disk as Host Drive no 0 on HAO hard disk as Host Drive no 0 on HAI hard disk as Host Drive no 1 on HAI 1 Streamer SCSI ID 2 LUN 0 on SCSI channel A of HAO 1 CD ROM SCSI ID 3 LUN 0 on SCSI channel B of HAO 1 DAT SCSI ID 2 LUN 0 on SCSI channel A of HAI Intelligent Computer Peripherals 166 Result HA Bus Target ID LUN Device 0 0 0 0 ISt hard disk Host Drive no 0 boot drive Streamer CD ROM hard disk Host Drive no 0 hard disk Host Drive no 1 DAT hard disk Host Drive no 2 o00o0 oooo o WN OW oooooo 1 6 Further Information During the installation of the ICP driver additional tools are copied into the etc direc tory Before you can use them you have to create a special device file named dev rgdth by means of link this device file has to be placed on a device of an ICP Host Drive With gdtsync from the etc directory you can determine the coordinates of an ICP Host Drive Usually the first Host Drive has the coordinates cOb0t0d0 A special device file charact
167. ese Host Drives and not their possibly complex structures This means that it is of no importance for the operating sys tem if a Host Drive consists of one single hard disk of the type disk or of 5 hard disks con Intelligent Computer Peripherals 174 figured to form a RAID 4 Array Drive Apart from the performance the name type state and capacity 1024KB IMB of a Host Drive is displayed The figures shown at Total represent the overall performance of the Host Drives as a whole With the lt and keys you may change the scale of the graphical KB s indication With the T and 4 keys you can scroll the screen to see further Host Drives if available GDT Controller Monitor v1 29 ICP disse ud Computer era C Copyright 1994 1997 ICP vortex Computersysteme Gm ain Menu Select Controller 1 VPLVES Physical Drives Cache Statistics Sampling Rate View Change Settings Fid Toggle Colors GDT6937RP in Local_Sys Sampling Rate 1 8 sec GDT Controller Monitor 41 29 ICP E Computer C Copyright 1994 1997 ICP vortex Computersysteme GmbH di an Name DISK B3 SizelMBl 1004 Log rray Drive 2 6 Name DISN B3 Size MB 1004 Log Drive 2 RAIDS Size MB 488 Log Array Drive 3 A d 49 L8 MB s Total Ks 05 19 Write B GDT6537RP in Local Sys Ticks 24 Samples 2 Rate 1 05 S
168. etc The screen shows you the I O channel to which a device is connected this can be a SCSI or a FCAL channel which ID the drive has the entry I O Processor stands for the corresponding I O channel of the ICP Controller It has the default ID setting 7 for SCSI and 125 for FCAL The IDs of the FCAL drives are normally assigned through the backplane of the Fibre Channel Enclosure the initialization status the names of the drives the Read Write Status RW Read Write the gross capacity membership in a Logical Array or Host Drive Use the cursor keys and 4 to select the drive you wish to initialize We take the first drive of FCAL A in the list With this drive selected press ENTER Intelligent Computer Peripherals 89 GDTSEIUP Version 3 04 Apr AZ 1998 Copyright 1997 98 ICP vortex Computersysteme GmbH elect Physical Drive Cho ID LUN Vendor Product Atty Cap MB Drive SCSI h 6 ESG SHU Sch HSBP M3 2 A i FUJITSU MAD38915C RU 8782 Drive B i SCHI I 0 Processor FCALA 2 A SEACHTE STIS171FC RU 6693 FCAL A 124 B SEAGATE STI9171FC RU 8538 FCAL A 125 B FC 1 0 Processor Rescan for neu device F2 Extended Information Note On SCSI A ID 0 and ID 6 are devices which are not relevant for our examples The Configure Disk menu appears which shows various options For our example we choose the SCSI Parameter Initialize menu option and press ENTER The parameters within this menu c
169. ference in impedance between two conductors of a SCSI cable must not exceed 12 Ohms External round cables should have a SCSI compliant placement of the inside conductors Besides the cables the right connectors for a cable are also very important It is highly recommend to use highest quality connectors only The following table shows the maximum cable lengths allowed for a given transfer rate Based on many years of SCSI experience the lengths we recommend are in some cases shorter than theoretically possible The informa tion in the table refers to one SCSI channel and represent the overall length of the cable including internal and external parts SCSI Bus Width SCSI Mode Synchronous Data Number of Maximum transfer Rate Participants Length 10 MB sec 8 20m 8 Bit Fast 20 Ultra 20 MB sec 16 Bit narrow 10 MB sec 8 20m 16 Bit wide MB sec 8a 20m Fast 20 Ultra 40MBsec 4 15m With regard to Fast 20 devices the maximum number of participants and the maximum cable length have to be strictly observed when a Fast 20 device even if it is only one is running in Fast 20 mode In each case the minimum cable length is 0 5 m In addition to specifications mentioned above the following should be kept in mind when selecting and installing SCSI cables Intelligent Computer Peripherals 39 Always install SCSI cables that are as short as possible The lengths in the table above are ab
170. ff because the disk array although operational is found in a state without redundancy that is a state which should be eliminated as soon as pos sible The alarm signal turns off when GDTSETUP is loaded Intelligent Computer Peripherals 104 How is this situation reflected in GDTSETUP What has happened to the failed hard disk To answer these questions we load GDTSETUP and check We go to the menu Configure Ar ray Drives menu and select our RAID 5 disk array which entered the fail state Press lt F2 gt to get further information on the failure GDTSETUP Version 3 04 Apr 02 1998 Copyright 1997 98 ICP vortex Computersysteme GmbH Configure Controller Configure Physical Devices Configure Logical Drives Configure pray Drives No Name Status RAID fail D 1 Lo 5 Name Status Atri E Type belongs to 1 MSK B ok 938 Disk Master After selecting the failed Logical Drive press again lt F2 gt to obtain detailed information on the physical drive which has actually failed mtr AT j ie Apr 1998 C 997 98 CP C teme GmbH up Configure Configure Physical Devices Configure Logical Drives Lontlgure pray Drives RAL D 1 Lo Status tri nii Type belongs to 1 DISK Ba ok 938 isk Master Intelligent Computer Peripherals 105 Important Even if we reconnected the power supply to DISK BI before loading GDTSETUP DISK would not be
171. from an online capacity expansion of an existing Array Drive is introduced to the system as a new Host Drive In order to be able to make use of the new capacity without having to down the server type scan for new devices on the server console to recognize the new capacity Use Install to build new partitions and volumes E 6 Notes on ARCserve Please make sure that you always have the latest version of your ARCserve software The back up program ARCserve can be used in connection with the ICP Controller The communication between the tape device for example DAT DLT and the ICP Controller takes place through the ASPI interface For this purpose the ICP ASPI Manager ASPITRAN DSK is needed When loading the regular ICP NetWare driver for example GDTRP311 DSK the ASPI Manager is automatically loaded too During the installation of ARCserve choose Adaptec ASPI Manager as interface Intelligent Computer Peripherals 138 Intelligent Computer Peripherals Chapter F Using Windows NT 140 Using Microsoft Windows NT After having explained the installation of the ICP Controller and the host drives in chapters B and C we now explain how to install the operating system Microsoft Windows NT For a successful installation we recommend that you take a close look at the manuals which came with your Windows NT package Transparency of Host Drives The structure of the Host Drives which have been installed with GDTSETUP
172. g systems using the INTI3 i e MS DOS Windows NT can be booted directly from a device RAID Array Drive connected to the ICP Controller The RAIDYNE firmware allows for the simul taneous operation of disk arrays with the RAID Levels 0 1 4 5 10 RAIDYNE is also capa ble of performing an online capacity expansion of an existing array by adding one ore more new hard disks During expansion the array is fully operational Another feature of RAIDYNE is the online RAID Level Migration of an existing array e g from RAID 0 to RAID 5 GDT7619RN and GDT7629RN are equipped with the Cluster RAIDYNE firmware which not only includes all necessary functions for supporting the Microsoft Cluster Server MSCS but is also ready for future Controller and Server Cluster concepts There is an op tional Cluster Module to upgrade GDT75x9RN to GDT76x9RN A 5 7 Configuration Program GDTSETUP GDTSETUP is either loadable from the Flash RAM of the ICP Controller press lt CTRL gt lt G gt after the ICP Controller shows its BIOS or from the command prompt under MS DOS GDTSETUP has a character oriented graphical user interface It provides besides others the following functions Configuration of SCSI and Fibre Channel devices connected to the ICP Controller and administrated by RAIDYNE These are normally all types of hard disks Other de vices like CDROM DAT DLT WORM MOD etc are either operated by means of the ASPI interface or are
173. gical Configuration Statistics Events Select a local or remote controller for further actions Show and or modify controller and device settings Show and or modify logical drive configuration Show statistics Show controller events Shows or hides the toolbar Shows or hides the status bar v Toolbar v Status Bar Intelligent Computer Peripherals 229 2 7 The Chart Menu The chart menu appears when you open the statistics window Here you can add and re move data sources from the chart and configure the chart i Options Add Remove Set the horizontal interval time int s and vertical max KB s scale Add a data source to the chart and define its line style Remove a data source fram the chart K 2 8 The Configuration Menu Commands This menu appears if you have selected the Physical Configuration window or the Logical Configuration window 41 RAID Navigator Physical Configuration ice RAID Navigator Logical Configuration J File View Window Help ad File View Window EIFE Help wl EAEN Controller Change Settings en EAEN Host Drive Ove Mane Create New Channel Save Information Array Drive gt Disk gt Firmware Update Log Drive gt st 2 Refresh Silence Refresh 60165378 SCSI AID 7 SCSI A ID 4 LUN 0 Host Drive D RAID1 Drive 0 SCSI B ID 1 Li SCSI Processor IBM Boot DISK_B1 DISK B1 IBM DCAS 33 0 32160 Log Drive 0
174. hange The elapsed time is reset when opening the window Progress Information Parity Verify x Elapsed Time 00 00 04 Estimated Time 00 00 44 Intelligent Computer Peripherals 247 K 5 10 Expansion of an Array Click the right mouse button on the Array Drive icon There are two fundamental functions which are available within this option Migrate the RAID level of the selected RAID Array Drive RAID 0 gt RAID 4 and vice versa RAID 0 gt RAID 5 and vice versa and or Expand the capacity of the selected Array Drive by adding one or several new hard disks Both functions can be selected at the same time E g migrate from RAID 0 to RAID 5 and add a new drive To initiate a migration or expansion with a RAID 4 5 Array Drive the state must be ready The data on the Array Drive remain intact and are not affected by the expan sion The additional capacity is introduced as new Host Drive If a Logical Drive fails during the expansion the expansion process continues until the expansion is finished The Array Drive changes into the fail state The new capacity is available as a new Host Drive Win dows NT Tool Disk Administrator and Novell NetWare Scan for new Devices and then Tool Install allow the online integration of new disk capacity Depending on the RAID level the current Array Drive has selecting a different one here will cause the Migration of the RAID level of the Array Drive If
175. hannel of the ICP Controller Host Drives are assigned in increasing order to the free coordinates bus number and target ID LUN is always 0 Configuration Example In the PCI computer are two ICP Controllers 0 Ist ICP HA 1 2nd ICP each with two SCSI channels 1 hard disk as Host Drive no 0 on HAO hard disk as Host Drive no 0 on HAI hard disk as Host Drive no 1 on HAI 1 Streamer SCSI ID 2 LUN 0 on SCSI channel A of HAO 1 CD ROM SCSI ID 3 LUN 0 on SCSI channel B of HAO 1 DAT SCSI ID 2 LUN 0 on SCSI channel A of HAI Intelligent Computer Peripherals 161 Result HA Bus Target ID LUN Device 0 0 0 0 ISt hard disk Host Drive no 0 boot drive Streamer CD ROM O0o0 hard disk Host Drive no 0 hard disk Host Drive no 1 DAT hard disk Host Drive no 2 oO Ooo WN OWN oooooo Important Note Not Direct Access Devices must not be connected to Bus 0 Target ID 0 LUN 0 This is reserved for the boot device under SCO Unix 3 2V5 0 H 5 Further Information From version 4 x of SCO UNIX V 386 3 2 a media change can be made with the UNIX commands MOUNT and UNMOUNT Please make sure that the removable hard disk keeps its GDTSETUP drive number when changing the media otherwise a separate ID LUN entry is necessary for each single media since the drive number depends on the media and not the device containing it SCO UNIX V 386 3 2v4 x and later versions support a maximum of
176. hard disks and removable hard disks To install and access these devices a special standard the so called ASPI Standard Advanced SCSI program ming Interface has been created While the manufacturer of the controller in this case ICP has to offer the ASPI Manager the manufacturer of the SCSI device CDROMs etc has to provide an ASPI Module note there are some companies which have specialized in the development of ASPI modules for example Corel Corp with its product corelSCSI the ICP Controller is certified by Corel Both units the SCSI controller and the SCSI device com municate through this ASPI interface It is not a hardware interface like for example Cen tronics SCSI or RS232 but a pure software interface The following illustration explains this interface Intelligent Computer Peripherals 123 CDROM Hardware SCSI CDROM drive ASPI Module Software driver for CDROM MS DOS Windows ICP ASPI Manager GDTASPI EXE Software ASPI Manager for the ICP Controller ICP Controller Hardware SCSI Controller With the following two examples we demonstrate how to install a CDROM drive for use with the ICP Controller under MS DOS and Windows The installation differs slightly de pending on whether you use the corelSCSI software or the ASW software Regardless of which software you choose to use the ASPI manager of the ICP Controller located on the ICP System Disk DOS has to be loaded from the CONFIG SY
177. has to make the appropriate transformations Configuration Example In the PCI computer are two ICP Controllers 0 Ist ICP HA 1 2nd ICP each with two SCSI channels 1 hard disk as Host Drive no 0 on HAO hard disk as Host Drive no 0 on HAI hard disk as Host Drive no 1 on HAI 1 Streamer SCSI ID 2 LUN 0 on SCSI channel A of HAO 1 CD ROM SCSI ID 3 LUN 0 on SCSI channel A of HAO 1 DAT SCSI ID 2 LUN 0 on SCSI channel B of HAI Result HA Target ID LUN Device 0 0 0 ISt hard disk Host Drive no 0 boot and installation drive 0 2 0 Streamer 0 3 0 CD ROM 1 0 0 hard disk Host Drive 0 1 0 1 hard disk Host Drive no 2 4 DAT Intelligent Computer Peripherals 160 H 4 Instructions on mkdev ADM for 3 2v5 x Open Server Whenever the program mkdev hd ADM is started you will be asked for the coordinates of the device you wish to install The driver does not automatically display all devices con nected so after the installation you will find a tool named GDTSCAN in the directory etc The scanning can take up to several seconds especially when there is more than one con troller in the system The devices are displayed together with their host adapter number target ID and LUN These values are to be used in mkdev ADM Let s have a brief look at how the HA no target ID and LUN are determined Please note that the UNIX driver al ways maps the first detected Host Drive with target ID 0 LUN 0 Exactly t
178. he controllers with powerful on board RISC CPUs can handle many I Os per second NetWare offers the option of adjusting the number of write I Os which are loaded on the mass storage subsystem In order to gain optimum performance and speed from modern high performance disk controllers the amount of the so called maximum concurrent disk cache writes has been increased with every further development of NetWare Looking back to NetWare 3 11 only 100 concurrent disk cache writes were possible With NetWare 4 10 this can be as much as 1000 The number of concurrent disk cache writes delivering the best performance is highly de pendent on the performance of the installed disk controller the amount of cache RAM on the controller and the hard disks The ICP Controllers can easily cope with up to 500 simul taneous requests The following command line enables the adjustment of a new number under NetWare default value 50 set maximum concurrent disk cache writes xxxx where xxxx represents the required number of concurrent disk cache writes E 5 2 cache memory allocator out of available memory in PCI ISA Sy s fems PCI Systems which are not equipped with an EISA Bus behave in the same way as an ISA mainboard with regard to the available RAM memory NetWare therefore does not auto matically recognize the available memory above 16 MByte The command Register Mem ory allows the registration of memory above 16 MByte Memory shortage can
179. he following table shows how various devices are integrated by different operating sys tems Please refer to the corresponding chapters of this User s manual and the operating system documentation for detailed installation information _______ HardDisk HDD CDROM Streamer WORM MOD MS DOS ASPIorGDT ASPI ASPI ASP GDT NetWare GDT ASPI ASPI ASP GDT UNIX LINUX UNIX UNIX UNIX UNIX GDT Win NT or GDT 05 2 OS 2 or GDT ASPI ASPI ASPI ASPI or GDT GDT Configurable with GDTSETUP some MODs are recognized as a hard disk see your MOD manual In this case they too can be configured with GDTSETUP ASPI Integration by means of an ASPI interface UNIX LINUX OS 2 Win NT Supported by the operating system A 5 10 ICP Controller GDT RN Series Board Layout The ICP Controller PCB Printed Circuit Board has several jumpers In the following illus trations all jumpers are shown in their factory setting No other jumpers except the TP TL TH and S4 jumpers are user serviceable and must remain in their displayed position An installed TP jumper means that the ICP Controller supplies the termination power on the SCSI cable of the Wide Ultra SCSI channel TL stand for Termination Low Byte and TH for Termination High Byte These two jumpers may be used to bypass the termination settings within GDTSETUP Intelligent Computer Peripherals 24 GDT7519RN and GDT7619RN
180. he i386 directory 1 Insert the first Windows NT setup disk Disk 1 into the boot floppy disk drive and reset the system After a while you are asked to insert Disk 2 2 Select Skip Detection 3 Select S Specify Additional Device 4 Choose Other Requires disk provided by hardware manufacturer and press lt ENTER gt 5 Insert the ICP Windows NT driver disk 6 Select the ICP Disk Array Controller and press ENTER IMPORTANT Install the driver for the ICP Controller before you install any other drivers for additional adapters e g IDE adapter for CD ROM 7 Setup tells you that it has recognized the ICP Controller Press lt ENTER gt to continue 8 Insert Disk 3 and press lt ENTER gt 9 Now you can adjust the other system configuration parameters of your Windows NT system graphics adapter mouse etc 10 Afterwards the installation program scans the system for existing hard disks which are identical to the Host Drives of the ICP Controller Choose the drive on which to install Windows NT and which you want to partition 11 Now the actual installation of the Windows NT operating system begins Follow the in structions of the Windows NT installation program 12 After successful installation switch the Delayed Write function of the ICP Controller ON again by using the GDTSETUP program or the GDTMON program F 4 2 The ICP Controller is the Secondary Controller in the System If you wish to use the ICP C
181. he installation The Delayed Write function has to be switched off via the GDTSETUP program in the ROM of the ICP Controller As soon as the Windows 95 98 driver of the ICP Controller is installed this function can be switched on again The driver checks whether the data in the cache of the controller is being written to the hard disks so called cache flush Step 2 Installation via a hard disk partition It is recommended to transfer the installation data from the Windows 98 CDROM onto a hard disk partition beforehand Therefore the access to the CDROM connected with the ICP Controller has to be configured on the boot disk delivered with Windows 98 It is recom mended to make a copy of the Windows 98 boot disk first and then to install the corre sponding files from the ICP CDROM see this chapter in order to setup the access to the CDROM drive under DOS With this modified boot disk a partition can be installed on the desired host drive e g a single hard disk or a RAID array of the ICP Controller data from the Win98 directory of the Windows 98 CD has to be transferred to a corresponding directory on the host drive by using the command xcopy In addition the setup exe file has to be copied from the root directory of the Windows 98 CD onto the host drive If not yet available it is now also time to generate an ICP Windows 95 98 driver disk from the ICP System CDROM Intelligent Computer Peripherals 130 The Windows 98 boot
182. he number of media defects which have occurred since the first time the device was operated with an ICP Controller A specific hard disk is in a good condition when it has 0 grown defects When this counter increases there is definitely something wrong with the device Intelligent Computer Peripherals 184 Controller Monitor v1 25 ICP C Copyright 1994 1997 anh sica ent Computer dpa E TH omputersysteme GmbH Size MB l 2868 Log Drive Size MBl 2068 Log Drive Size MB l 2068 Log Drive ER ogical Array Drive Saye Information aMpling Rate View Change Settings GDT6537RP in Local_Sys Sampling Rate 1 8 sec GDT Controller Monitor ICP Intelli ent Computer peripherals TH C Copyright 1994 1997 ICP na H omputersysteme GM t View Chy Control ATE Cache 5 ettings ar 9 Array Drive 5651 Features Save Information hare Last Status 000000000 Status KEATSE EEE Grown Defects Ok Cancel GDT6337RP in Local us Sampling Rate 1 If you select the SEP of a SAF TE subsystem GDTMON displays a list of the installed and configured slots in the subsystem Intelligent Computer Peripherals 185 GDT Controller Monitor yl 25 ICP ea H Computer TH Copyright 1994 1997 ICP vortex GmbH CONNER md size MB 004
183. he only hard disk controller in the computer system it will auto matically make the boot drive available If there are more hard disk controllers the con troller which makes the first drive available the drive containing the MS DOS partition C will be the boot controller In principle SCO UNIX is always installed on the hard disk with Target ID 0 and LUN 0 on host adapter 0 that is on Host Drive 0 of this controller If SCO UNIX is installed from tape streamer the streamer must have SCSI ID 2 and be connected with SCSI channel A of host adapter 0 For an installation from CD ROM the CD ROM device must have SCSI ID 5 and has to be connected with channel A of the ICP Controller Intelligent Computer Peripherals 157 When using 3 2v4 x or 3 2v5 x you have the option to link the driver to the kernel before starting the kernel btld ADM This will allow you to use the ICP Controller as the only controller in the system Use the ICP BTLD Disk During the installation whenever the NI floppy disk is inserted and the message Boot is displayed do not press ENTER immediately but type in link ENTER The system will then prompt you for the name of the BTLD driver Now type gdth It may be necessary to type in the complete boot string In this case you have to add the following command link gdth btld fd xx where xx is the Minor Device Number of the corresponding device file xx 60 for fd0135ds18 3 5 floppy as A
184. he suitable option from the configuration menu s on the SCSI bus SCSI Channel Possible choices are SCSI ID SCSI LUN Click on the popup menu items to get more information on them SCSI Parameters popup g Cache Settings itu Disconnect icon description doub Synchronous Transfer open Tagged Queues Select Controller Host Drives Settings Controller SIOP These are the drives visible to the operating system Silence the audible alarm Host Drive Host Statistics Window Inform create a new Create a new Host Drive Array Drives Array Drives or RAID drives consist of Logical Drives They can be fault tolerant depending on the RAID level The RAID level is displayed under the Array Drive icon Click on the icons to get more information on the different states of an array gt a Intelligent Computer Peripherals 255 K 9 ICP Service and ICP Mail There are further powerful tools which are part of the ICP RAID Navigator delivery ICP Service Allows remote access to an ICP Controller in a Windows NT server ICP CTRLSRV Allows remote access to an ICP Controller in a Novell Server ICP Mail Converts ICP messages into standard mails for Windows 9x NT MAPI format It is recommended to install the ICP Service ICP CTRLSRV and the ICP Mail tool on each server which is equipped with an ICP Controller Thus remote access to ICP Controllers in a network can be easily managed from one or several authoriz
185. highest performance and security requirements Due to our products outstanding performance our expertise and continuity in development ICP Controllers are accepted and known as top leading edge products all over the world ICP Controller prod ucts within the GDT RN Series are suitable for the most different platforms and applica tions All ICP Controllers of the GDT RN Series are pure bred hardware solutions All functionality required for the very complex tasks is hardware implemented on the con troller Thus RAID is fully independent of the computer system the host and the operat ing system Thanks to the wide operating system support and easy to use installation and maintenance utilities setting up and using high performance and fault tolerant mass storage subsys tems for almost every purpose is child s play We would like to thank you for purchasing an ICP Controller of the GDT RN Series ICP Intelligent Computer Peripherals A 1 Product Identification In order to meet the various customer and system requirements ICP vortex offers four 64 Bit Fibre Channel RAID Disk Array Controllers for PC based 32 Bit and 64 Bit PCI computer systems The main differences between the controllers lie in the number of Fibre Channel Interfaces and the Clustering Support Order ICP Controller Number of One Clustering Supported Number Name Fibre Channel Wide Ultra Support RAID Levels Interfaces SCSI Channel 7519 GDT7519RN 0 1 4 5 10
186. his drive would be used as a boot drive when the ICP Controller is to make the boot drive available As an al ternative for the following new mapping method of SCO UNIX V 386 3 2v5 x you may also use the mapping as described in section H 3 for 3 2v2 0 amp 3 2v4 x To enable this old mapping change in the etc conf pack d gdth space c gdth_mapping 1 into sdth_mapping 0 Host adapter Number HA The host adapter number assigned to the ICP Controller is derived from the PCI slot num ber ofthe ICP Controller Therefore ifthere is only one ICP Controller installed in the PCI bus computer system the host adapter number 0 If there are two ICP Controllers in stalled the ICP Controller with the lower PCI Slot number is assigned host adapter number 0 and the ICP Controller with the higher PCI slot number is assigned host adapter 1 Note After a cold boot the ICP BIOS displays a couple of messages each beginning with the controller s PCI slot number e g 0 3 4 MB RAM detected The number after the is the slot number of the controller This helps you to determine which is the order of the ICP Controllers and which host adapter number is assigned to them by UNIX See also chapter B Hardware Installation UNIX Target ID and LUN Target IDs and LUNs for Not Direct Access Devices devices like streamers tapes and CD ROMs and therefore not configurable via GDTSETUP are directly assigned to the SCSI ID and the c
187. ht Delayed Write Use the space bar to toggle setting to ON 8 Press ENTER two times Delayed Write is now enabled 9 Highlight Save Information and press ENTER 10 Type the file name ICP001 and press ENTER NOTE This creates a snapshot of your system configuration Anytime the configuration changes i e add a new hard drive hard drive failure change system parameters etc save the information again using the ICP header for the file and the next higher number i e ICPOO1 ICP002 ICP003 etc This information will be needed by ICP Technical Support personnel to sist you in troubleshooting problems with the controller 11 Press Ese two times to exit the GDTMON program D 8 2 The ICP Controller is the secondary controller 1 Transfer the WIN95 files from the ICP System CD to a 3 5 floppy disk The files are lo cated in the directory your CDROM drive letter DRIVERS WIN95 You will need this disk later in the Windows 95 Setup 2 In Windows 95 double click on My Computer icon Double click Control Panel icon 3 Double click the System icon Click the Device Manager tab 4 Double click Other Devices Double click PCI SCSI Bus Controller 5 Click Driver Click Change Driver Double click SCSI Controllers 6 Click Have Disk Insert the ICP Windows 95 driver disk you created in step 1 7 Click OK Click OK again Click OK again 8 Click Cancel Never click Test Windows 95 is unable to determine if th
188. in chapter C is not known to Windows NT I e the operating system does not recognize that a given Host Drive consists of a number of hard disks forming a disk array To Windows this Host Drive simply appears as one single hard disk with the capacity of the disk array This complete transparency represents the easiest way to operate disk arrays under Windows NT neither Windows NT nor the PCI computer need to be involved in the administration of these complex disk array configurations F 2 General Information on Windows NT Your ICP Controller may be operated in all operating system variants the Windows NT Workstation variant the Windows NT Small Business Server variant and the Windows NT Enterprise Edition variant The ICP Controller is integrated into the Windows NT operating system through the GDTX SYS driver which is the same for all Windows NT variants For some ICP Controllers there is a special and optional firmware available Cluster RAIDYNE which allows the setup and operation of Microsoft Cluster Server MSCS For further information on ICP clustering check our website or contact us directly F 3 Preparing the Installation The following steps have to be carried out and or checked before you can begin with the installation of Windows NT Step 1 Create an ICP Windows NT driver disk You need a 3 5 HD formatted floppy disk Create from the ICP System CDROM the ICP Windows NT driver disk you can copy file by file or wri
189. included in the disk array again If you decide to use the failed hard disk again it is best if you reconnect the drive to the power supply and do a cold boot After loading GDTSETUP select the Configure Array Drives menu Select the Replace Array Component menu Press ENTER GDTSETUP recognizes the previously failed drive again it was not really defective and asks if it should be integrated into the disk array again GDISETUP Version 3 84D M 1998 C Copyright 1997 98 ICP vortex Computersysteme GmbH Array Drive Change Drive Name Array Drive Add RAID L Component ETE TT elect Drive to replace Status Attrib Capacity Type 14 to The failed drive is available again Do you want to install it in the array m Parity Verify Parity Recalculate Build Rehuild Progress Answer lt Yes gt and the disk array changes its state into rebuild After leaving GDTSETUP the controller begins the reconstruction of the data of the failed drive After the completion of this process the disk array s state changes into ready again A few words on the replacement of a defective hard disk of a disk array If a hard disk belonging to a disk array for which no Hot Fix drive had been assigned should fail you should replace this defective hard disk with a new one as soon as possible Always be aware of the fact that this disk array does not have any redundancy until the defective hard disk has been substituted
190. ing the right mouse button on the Host Drive and then selecting progress information Note User traffic on an Array Drive which is in the build rebuild state slows down the build rebuild process Intelligent Computer Peripherals 251 The fail state raD Ba RAID 4 5 The Array Drive changes to the fail state whenever a Logical Drive fails Redundancy infor mation is still present thus allowing the remaining hard disks to continue working This state should be eliminated as soon as possible by replacing the defective hard disk This can be done by using a Physical Drive which is already connected with the controller but not yet used for a Logical Drive with the replace drive function or by using the Hot Plug Replace Drive function If a Hot Fix Drive has previously been assigned to an Array Drive the ICP Controller will automatically replace the defective drive and start the reconstruction of the data and the redundant information Therefore under these circumstances the fail state is only temporary and will be eliminated by the controller itself Whenever an Array Drive enters a fail state the ICP Controller s audible alarm is turned on You can silence the audible alarm in the physical configuration window To analyze the reason for the drive failure the last status from the Physical Drive informa tion is very helpful Additionally you should check for retries and or reassigns A drive failure may also be the result of b
191. ion will highly appreciate this Flash RAM resident GDTSETUP For our example it is not relevant whether we load GDTSETUP from the Flash RAM or from disk Now load GDTSETUP The first menu asks you to select the desired ICP Controller In our example there is only one ICP Controller installed in the system Therefore simply press ENTER and then lt F2 gt to select the Advanced Setup GDISETUP Version 3 84D Apr B2 1998 Copyright 1997 98 ICP vortex GmbH o Position Features Firmware mem m NT loggle Colors The main menu gives you the following options As mentioned before we have to go through levels to 4 Intelligent Computer Peripherals 88 GDISETUP Version 3 84D Apr B2 1998 Copyright 1997 98 ICP vortex Contes s ee GmbH Configure Controller onfigure hysical Devices onfigure Logical Drives Configure Array Drives conf igure Host Drives Level 4 Save Information Express Setup Step 2 Configure Physical Devices Now activate the menu Configure Physical Devices level 1 A list appears showing all hard disks found on the ICP Controller s I O channels If you have an ICP Controller with a differ ent number of I O channels the existing channels are displayed Note This screen will al ways report all devices that are found even though GDTSETUP only allows you to work on Direct Access Devices and therefore not on tape drives DATs CD ROMs
192. it appears The IO bus scan is completed and the built in GDTSETUP configuration program is loaded It al lows you to configure RAID Array Drives B 7 3 Trouble Shooting If these messages do not appear on the screen or if other problems occur after switching on the computer system screen remains dark etc you should check the entire installation over again Intelligent Computer Peripherals 51 Are you using a genuine ICP ECC SDRAM Module ESM Try another one ESM plugged firmly into the socket Unplug it and plug it in again lt the ICP Controller plugged into a PCI bus master Slot Check this If necessary try another slot Is the Fibre Channel cable Check length and connectors Try another cable 5 the SCSI cable Check the length and connectors Try another cable If the PCI System BIOS is not PCI 2 x compatible see above the ICP Controller BIOS may display one or more of the following messages i The DPMEM has not been installed correctly Error System BIOS not PCI compliant contact your mainboard supplier Controller at x y has invalid DPMEM address 012345 Trying to allocate a free address Found free address at 678901 accept Yes No Abort Caution this address must not be used by another expansion card In this case the system BIOS has not installed the Dual Ported Memory of the ICP Con troller correctly Therefore the ICP Controller will search for an
193. l Physica He Fe Drive Information Disk 0 176 HE 4 Dive 2 Disk k Size MB 288 Fa Drive Information If you press once more lt F2 gt you get detailed information on the physical hard disk t GDT Controller Monitor ICF Intelli ent Computer A TH C Copyright 1994 1997 ICP vortex H rra omputersysteme GM Drives Physical Disks Con ch A ID 6 SEAGATE ST92168N 12 2068 og Drive ok 200 Master og rive 1 0 Log Drive 2 Disk ok Size MBI 288 Fa Drive Information J 3 6 1 Parity Verify This option verifies online the parity information of the selected RAID 4 or RAID 5 Array Drive Pressing lt ESC gt terminates this process If this option is selected for several Array Drives the processes are put into a queue and performed one after the other Intelligent Computer Peripherals aan 203 GDT Controller Monitor ICF Intelli ent Computer TH C Copyright 1994 1997 ICP vortex H rra omputersysteme GM t View Chy Control Physica pray Settings Lo D 4 ecalculate Expand Array Drive Pool Hot Fix Access Hot Plug Replace Drive mE Hot Fix Drive 1x Drive NES Hot Plug Add priv poqness Information Wu ix Drive psed Time GDT6937RP in Local 5us Sampling Rate n sac J 3 6 2 Parity Recalculate If the parity verify option reports a
194. l Drive you want to remove This is done by selecting a Logical Drive from a box where you see all members of the RAID 1 Array Drive After confirmation the Logical Drive is removed If the RAID 1 Array Drive consists of two drives like usual the RAID 1 Array Drive disappears and only one Logical Drive will be left You can create a new RAID Array Drive by selecting add RAID 1 Intelligent Computer Peripherals 250 K 5 16 Replace a Logical Drive Click the right mouse button on the Logical Drive icon If a Logical Drive of an Array Drive without a Hot Fix Drive should fail or is very likely to fail soon you should replace the defective hard disk with a new one as soon as possible because the Array Drive is without redundancy The replacement Logical Drive has to have at least the same capacity as the failed one The replacement is carried out either interac tively with GDTSETUP or online with the GDTMON utility program or the ICP RAID Naviga tor Before the Logical Drive can be removed you have to select a new Logical Drive from the box with available Physical Drives which is shown after this option is selected If no Physical Drive is offered you have to use the Hot Plug Replace Drive function to add a new drive After the confirmation the old Logical Drive is removed Next the data is rebuild on the new Logical Drive During this process the array is in the rebuild state and therefore not redundant K 5 17 The Different State
195. limit the capacity of each drive to 8000 MB Any new 9 GB drive must have at least Intelligent Computer Peripherals 94 this capacity The difference in our example would be lost For this example we use the full capacity and press ENTER GDTSEIUP Version Apr 1998 Copyright 1997 98 ICP v putersysteme GmbH Configure Controller _ Configure Physical Device elect Status Attrib Capacity Type belongs to A DISK Al ok Drive Size 1 8538 MB 8538 ele chn ID LIN Vendor P 1 a FCAL A 2 Mi SEAGATE STISI71FC RU 8682 FCAL A 124 SEAGATE STI9L71FC Ru 8538 SPACE Select Deselect drive ENTER End selection GDTSETUP Version 3 04 Apr 1998 C Copyright 1997 98 ICP vortex Computersysteme GmbH eTup Configure Controller Configure Physical Devic elect Logical Drive Mame Status Attrib Capacita Type belongs to A DISK_Al ok RU 1 2800 Disk Host 1 _DISK_BB ok RW 8538 MB Disk As you can see we have already created a new Logical Drive of the type Disk The name of the Logical Drive is assigned automatically and contains the I O channel description and the FCAL ID after the This can serve as a reminder when you install a complex system with many drives Naturally you may change the name Now configure the remaining Logical Drives one by one After having completed these procedures for all three Logical Drives you will see the fol
196. ll files are written immediately to the Host Drive dur ing the Windows installation Press Esc A message appears Do you want to save changes Press Y Install Windows 95 per instructions provided with the program After installation double click My Computer icon Double click the Control Panel icon Double click the System icon Click the Device Manager tab Double click Other Devices Double click PCI SCSI Bus Controller Click Driver Click Change Driver Double click SCSI Controllers Click Have Disk Insert the ICP Windows 95 driver disk you created in step 1 Click OK Click OK again Click OK again Click Cancel Never click Test Windows 95 is unable to determine if the ICP BIOS can be removed Using the Test option may cause the system to freeze Remove the ICP Windows 95 driver disk Restart the system Intelligent Computer Peripherals 128 Upon completion of the Windows 95 installation you will need to load the GDTMON program to Windows 95 The following steps will take you through this process 1 Find the GDTMON EXE file in the DRIVERS WIN95 directory on the ICP System CD 2 Copy GDTMON EXE to your Host Drive Start the GDTMON program 3 Press ENTER to select the Controller Press ENTER to select the Protocol 4 Press ENTER to select the Controller installed 5 Highlight View Change Settings and press ENTER 6 Highlight Cache Settings and press ENTER 7 Highlig
197. lowing screen Intelligent Computer Peripherals vance Configure Controlle pnfigure Physical Devic oylca elect Logical Drive Status Attrib Capacita Type belongs to DISK_Al ok RU 1 2888 MB Disk Host ost 0338 MB Disk Host 1 8538 u Host 2 reate new Logical Drive F2 Drive Information Refresh This concludes the installation on level 2 Now press the lt ESC gt key to leave this screen Step 4 Configure Array Drives We now leave level 2 by pressing the lt ESC gt key and are back in the main menu Now with the cursor keys T and 4 select Configure Array Drives and go to level 3 by pressing lt ENTER gt Since we want to create a new Array Drive press lt ENTER gt Note The first entry in the next list has no relevance for our example Intelligent Computer Peripherals Advanced Setup Configure Controller onfigure Physical Devices figure Logical Drives elec au ct Dr Status attrib di Type belongs to DISK Al ok IR 1 2000 ME Disk Host B a 05 3 DISK_B2 ok RU 1 8682 MB Di ch Host 3 SPACE Select Deselect drive F2 Select master ENTER End selection Move the selection bar to the second entry and press the lt SPACE gt bar The entry is marked with an M for Master This means that the disk array begins with this Logical Drive GDTSETUP Version 3 04 Apr 1998 Copyright 1997 98
198. lu Luuuuu Uwe the fantastic rest of this incredible company It is not only a pleasure to work here it is a passion Intelligent Computer Peripherals FCC Compliance Statement Information for the User NOTE This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in residential installations This equip ment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communica tions However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular instal lation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures Reorientate or relocate the receiving antenna Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver Plug the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is powered If necessary consult the dealer or an experienced radio T V technician for additional suggestions The use of a non shielded interface cable with the referenced device is prohibited Changes or modifications not expressly appro
199. ly well suited for disk arrays RAIDYNE uses this hardware with extreme efficiency and therefore allows you to config ure disk arrays that do not load the host computer whereas all software based RAID solu tions more or less reduce the overall performance of the host computer The basic concept of the RAIDYNE is strictly modular and consequently in its functioning it appears to the user as a unit construction system Intelligent Computer Peripherals a nn 2 1 The Different RAID Levels RAID 0 Data Striping According to the adjusted stripe size e g 16 KB and the number of hard disks the data blocks are split into stripes Each stripe is stored on a separate hard disk Especially with sequential read and write operations we can observe a significant improvement of the data throughput RAID 0 includes no redundancy at all i e when one hard disk fails all data is lost ABCDEF GM ICP vortex GDT Disk Array Controller Data Striping RAID 0 Host Drive RAID 1 Disk Mirroring Disk Duplexing data is stored twice on two identical hard disks When one hard disk fails all data are immediately available on the other without any impact on the performance and data integ rity We talk about Disk Mirroring when two hard disks are mirrored on one I O channel If each hard disk is connected with a separate I O channel this is called Disk Duplexing addi
200. main valid after the update process B 8 3 Additional Notes Before the computer is switched off or a hard reset is carried out the ICP Controller first has to write the current contents of its cache RAM back to the hard disk s flush The computer may only be switched off or reset after all hard disk accesses have been completed If this is not observed there is a high risk of data corruption and data loss A good indication for hard disk activity is the front HDD LED of your computer system presuming it is connected with the corresponding pin grid header of the ICP PCB In addition all ICP drivers i e for all supported operating systems are designed to perform a cache flush when a regular system shutdown is initiated e g Under NetWare Down and Exit Under DOS CTRL ALT DEL Un der UNIX Shutdown They will show a message similar to the following Flushing Controller Cache As long as this message is displayed you must not switch off or reset your PCI com puter For Windows 95 Windows NT and OS 2 you may switch off or reset the computer as soon as the operating system message is displayed which indicates that it is safe to turn off the computer now The RISC CPU of the ICP Controller is equipped with a cooler The cooler keeps the oper ating temperature of the CPU within the specified limits The air intake is on the top of the fan The air flows through the fins of the heat sink and leaves it on the left and right side In additi
201. mple 4 RAID 5 Disk Arrays With a Hot Fix Drive What we call Hot Fix drives is referred to as Host Spare drives in some literature Most part of the installation is carried out as in our third example so we do not repeat the ex planation Do Step I Step 2 Step 3 and Step 4 as described in example no 3 In addition initialize the fourth Seagate drive and make a Logical Drive out of it Step 5 Creating a Hot Fix Drive Select the Array Drive in the Configure Array Drives menu and press ENTER Move the se lection bar to the Add Hot Fix Drive menu GDTSETUP Version 3 04 Apr 1998 C Copyright 1997 98 ICP vortex Computersysteme GmbH Array Drive Change Drive Name Array Drive Add RAID 1 re a omponent Replace Array Remove RAID 1 Co Remove Array Drive A Z Rt ih unis LE a to Er Nu k T Component Hot Fix Pool Access e Information FIA Refresh J Paritu Verify Parity Recalculate uild Rehuild Progress Press lt ENTER gt GDTSETUP now displays a new dialog box containing all the Logical Drives apt to serve as a Hot Fix drive one criterion for this suitability is the drive s capacity i e it has to be large enough So do not be surprised if you do not find all the drives you would have expected during later installations GDTSETUP knows which drives are suitable to be used as Hot Fix drives Intelligent Computer Peripherals 107 GDTSEIUP Version 3 04 Apr AZ 1998
202. mples for SCSI cablings 43 Expanded Memory Manager 121 Express Setup 62 Factory setting of jumpers 23 Fast SCSI Bracket 43 FC Connectors and Cables 32 FC Hard Drive Enclosures 31 FC AL 31 FCC Compliance 7 Fibre Channel Interface 21 Firmware updating the ICP Controller 55 First Initialization of a SCSI device 72 90 Flash RAM 17 19 21 55 Flushing the Controller Cache 56 GDT ASPI Manager GDTASPI EXE 125 GDT_RPFW file 55 GDTASPI EXE Parameters 125 GDTMON Disable Audible Alarm 193 GDTMON Expand Array Drive 204 GDTMON Grown Defects 183 GDTMON Hot Plug function 181 GDTMON Hot Plug mechanism 181 GDTMON Hot Plug RAID1 10 187 Intelligent Computer Peripherals GDTMON Hot Plug RAID4 5 209 GDTMON Intelligent Fault Bus 182 GDTMON Last Status Information 183 GDTMON Parity Recalculate 203 GDTMON SAF TE 184 GDTMON Save Information 223 GDTMON The Diagnosis Program 168 GDTRP310 DSK Driver vor NetWare 3 10 132 GDTRP311 DSK Driver for NetWare 3 11 132 GDTRP312 DSK Driver for NetWare 3 12 132 GDTRP400 DSK Driver for NetWare 4 133 GDTX SYS Driver for Windows NT 140 GDTXOOO EXE Driver for MS DOS 120 HAM Driver 133 Hardware Installation of the ICP Controller 28 Hierarchy Level 1 Physical Devices 66 Hierarchy Level 2 Logical Drives 66 Hierarchy Level 3 Array Drives 67 Hierarchy Level 4 Host Drives 67 Host Drives 67 Hot Fix Drive Creation 106 Hot Fix Drive Mechanism 10
203. mportant point to con sider when choosing FC devices These adapters provide a very cost effective method to connect FC devices which are located far from one another Example for a MIA and a SC fiber optics cable with a GDT7519RN MIA and fiber optics cable plugged into the female DB9 connector of the GDT7519RN Intelligent Computer Peripherals 35 MIA and fiber optics cable plugged into the female DB9 connector of the subsystem Intelligent Computer Peripherals 36 Example for a copper cable between a GDT7519RN and a FC AL subsystem DB9 connector of copper FC AL cable plugged into the female DB9 connector of the GDT7519RN ad EF SAI T E EDIT Intelligent Computer Peripherals 31 Example for a Dual Loop Configuration MIA ICP Controller nn Media Interface with DB9 Adapter Copper Cable Hard Disk subsystem Il UN Server with ICP Controller Two Fibre Channel Arbitrated Loops with Multi mode optical fiber cables Up to 500 meters and 100MB sec One loop can fail and the system continues to operate Intelligent Computer Peripherals 38 B 5 The Basics of SCSI It is very important for you to observe the information and notes given in this section of the User s Manual because it helps to ensure that the SCSI devices that are used in connection with the ICP Controllers are operated in a successful long lasting and trouble fr
204. n MB Drive FCAL A 124 A SEACATE STI9171FC RU 8538 SPACE Select Deselect drive ENTER End selection The dialog box is closed and we are back in the main menu of level 2 Intelligent Computer Peripherals 82 GDTSETUP Version 3 040 Apr 1998 Copyright 1997 98 ICP vortex Computersysteme GmbH Advanced Setup Configure Controller Configure Phusical Devices lect Log 10 Status Attrib Capacita Type belongs to B DISK Al ok 2000 ME Disk Host B Ru MEC ND 7 8538 ME Disk Host NeW Loyical F2 Drive Information F3 Load All Refresh As you can see we have created another Logical Drive of the type Disk The name of the Logical Drive is assigned automatically and contains the channel description and the I O channel ID after the This can serve as a reminder when you install a complex system with many drives Naturally you may change the name This concludes the installation on level 2 Now press the lt ESC gt key to leave this screen In the next step it is our objective to add the third Logical Drive in this list as a mirroring partner to the second Logical Drive of the list thus configuring a RAID 1 disk array Step 4 Configure Array Drives We now leave level 2 by pressing the lt ESC gt key and are back in the main menu Now with the cursor keys and 4 select Configure Array Drives and go to level 3 by pressing ENTER Intelligent Compu
205. n critical boot messages of ing Level the ICP Controller during the system boot phase Supported Adjust the number of Host Drives which are supported by the ICP BIOS Drives Controller s BIOS This is the number 2 or 7 of Host Drives which are available under DOS without loading a special driver Memory Test Configures the strategy and duration of the ICP Controller cache memory test during the boot phase A more intensive test re quires more time Intelligent Computer Peripherals Disabled _ Cancel dyanced Intensive 232 Save Information After the selection of this option a file dialog is opened which allows you to specify the path and name of the Save Information file This file has a standard ASCII format and can be viewed or printed with a normal editor e g notepad or word processing system The Save Information file contains all relevant information on the ICP Controller including firmware version cache size connector assignment termination assignment the con nected devices e g firmware version SCSI parameters selected transfer rate number of grown defects last status information the Logical Drives Array Drives and Host Drives Thus it represents a very easy and effective way to create a detailed documentation of the ICP Controller s and disk array s The Save Information file can also be very helpful for a remote diagnosis of a system If a trained support person has a copy of
206. n or oral Except as expressly set forth above no other warranties are made with respect to ICP vortex products ICP vortex expressly disclaims all warranties not stated herein including to the extent permitted by applicable law any implied warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose In no event will ICP vortex be liable to the purchaser or to any user of the ICP vortex product for any data loss data corruption damages expenses lost revenues lost savings lost profits or any other incidental or consequential damages arising from the purchase use or inability to use the ICP vortex product even if ICP vortex has been advised of the possibility of such damages ICP vortex is not liable for and does not cover under warranty any costs associated with servicing and or installation of ICP vortex products This manual has been validated and reviewed for accuracy The sets of instructions and descriptions were accurate for ICP Disk Array Controllers at the time of this manual s production Ho wever succeeding Controllers software and manuals are subject to change without notification Therefore ICP vortex assumes no liability for damages incurred directly or indirectly from errors omi ssions or discrepancies between the Controller software and the manual Intelligent Computer Peripherals Pick up the phone if you need technical support and dial the numbers For Europe 49 0 7131 5972 30 F
207. n our example the address space begins at D000 0000 and ends at D000 3FFF D000 is the segment address As with the ICP Controller BIOS this mapping is also automatically carried out by the PCI system BIOS This information is essential when installing Expanded Memory Managers under DOS and Windows The ICP DPMEM address space has to be excluded from the control of such a manager For more details see chapter D of this manual Furthermore this messages tells us that the PCI INT A of the ICP Controller has been assigned to the system IRQIO This as signment is also carried out automatically if the PCI system BIOS is 10096 PCI 2 X com patible GDT7519RN HWLO 32 MB SDRAM ECC 2048kB Flash RAM GDT7519RN HWLO stands for the type of ICP Controller found by the ICP BIOS HWL means Hardware level 32 MB SDRAM ECC indicates that the installed ECC module has 32MB De pending on the size of the installed ECC SDRAM Module ESM the following messages are possible xx 16 32 64 xx MB SDRAM ECC MB ECC SDRAM Module 2048kB indicates the size of the installed Flash RAM SCSI A indicates the SCSI devices connected with the controller s separate Ultra Wide SCSI channel FCAL A or FCAL B with a GDT7x29RN indicates the Fibre Channel devices connected with the controllers Fibre Channel Arbitrated Loops lt lt lt Press CIRL 6G to enter GDTSETUP gt gt gt After pressing this hot key the message Enfering GDTSETUP Please wa
208. nd RAID 5 drives contain parity information which is used in case of a drive fail ure The parity information is calculated from the user data on the disk array On RAID 4 disk arrays the parity data is stored on a single disk parity disk on RAID 5 disk arrays the parity data is being distributed over all drives parity striping This option verifies online the parity information of the selected RAID 4 or RAID 5 Array Drive If this option is selected for several Array Drives the processes are put into a queue and performed one after the other Intelligent Computer Peripherals 246 Parity Verify completed Parity is ak If a parity error is detected you should try to find the reason for this data corruption A good indication for data corruption can be retries on the SCSI bus If the retry counter shows high numbers this might be the problem Possible reasons for parity error are bad cabling or termination or a hardware error like a defective drive or a drive which is over heated After removing the reason of the data corruption you can carry out parity recalcu late to ensure that the parity information of this disk array becomes again valid K 5 8 Parity Recalculate Click the right mouse button on the Array Drive icon A parity recalculate can be used to repair parity errors which have been previously detected with a parity verify A parity recalculation initiates the same process as used for a build on an Array Drive The
209. nectors for FC AL ports A B CPU cooler for i960RN SDRAM module not included TP Terminator Power Jumper for Wide Ultra SCSI channel TL TH Jumpers for manual termi nation of Wide Ultra SCSI channel L Low Byte H High Byte LEDs S green Status T green DMA transfer SCSI FCA FCB yellow Activity on FC AL and Wide Ultra SCSI Connectors for secondary acoustical and temperature alarm Loudspeaker Connector for 50 pin SCSI cable Connector for 68 pin SCSI cable 10 Jumper 4 Normally closed 11 64 Bit PCI Bus connector Can also be plugged into a 32 Bit PCI slot 12 Connector for external LEDs Sum All FC AL and Wide Ultra activities FCA Activity on FC AL port A FCB Activity on FC AL port B SCSI Activity on Wide Ultra SCSI channel Cathodes near the 50 pin SCSI connector 13 Terminator key if DRAM Battery Power Module not installed Key can be also installed 180 degrees clockwise rotated 14 Socket for optional Cluster Module Not required for GDT7629RN When installed on a GDT7529RN controller appears becomes Intelligent Computer Peripherals Intelligent Computer Peripherals Chapter Hardware Installation 28 Hardware Installation B 1 Before Installation The ICP Controller is designed for minimum power consumption and maximum opera tional security It therefore contains delicate electrical components CMOS In orde
210. nfigure Physical Devices Configure Logical Driyes TNR elect Arr Status Attrib mii RH LI read Ru i No Nane Status M r 1 i 5 DISK B2 ok U B Hi Disk 4 DISK_B3 ok RU 89538 MB Disk Priv Hot Fix F2 Drive Information After pressing lt F2 gt we get detailed information on the structure of the disk array The last entry refers to the Priv Hot Fix drive We have already seen this form before with the only difference that DISK_B3 has been as signed to be the Hot Fix drive We now leave GDTSETUP as described in example no 3 in order to allow GDTSETUP to send all relevant information to the controller and let RAIDYNE create and store the redundant information Intelligent Computer Peripherals 109 Step 6 Leaving GDTSETUP We are now back in the main menu of GDTSETUP The installation is completed and we therefore leave GDTSETUP by pressing the lt ESC gt key The following message appears GDISETUP Version 3 84D Apr B2 1998 Copyright 1997 98 ICP vortex GmbH onfiguration of drive s was modified System will he rebooted Press any key to reboot As we are done with the installation and therefore definitely want to leave GDTSETUP we press any key IMPORTANT Always end GDTSETUP by leaving the program in the regular way do not warm boot with CTRL ALT DEL or cold boot by pressing the RESET button Certain information is only tran
211. nformation Change Settings 7 ended Rescan ID s Hot Plug Add Disk SCSI processor LVD SE gt low voltage differential single ended FC processor gt FC AL fibre PS channel arbitrated loop Channel Info Rescan ID s x Type scsi Processor 3 875 narrow wide term i68p i50p e68p e50p i0707 Choose ID Carel i cme Hot Plug ID x Termination Auto ID Channel Settings Choose ID 0 Termination C Off C On Auto Cancel Intelligent Computer Peripherals 234 Channel Settings Termination The termination for this channel of the ICP Controller can be set to three different states AUTO The termination of the lower low byte and upper data lines high byte is en abled or disabled depending on the occupied SCSI connectors of this channel OFF No lines are terminated ON All 8 16 data lines are terminated ID Changes the SCSI ID of the SIOP 0 7 Warning The SCSI bus termination of the ICP Controller must match the existing SCSI ca bling and cable termination If the ICP Controller represents one end of the SCSI bus its termination must be ON or AUTO If you change the termination to OFF it is very likely that the SCSI bus is longer stable and the connected devices fail Due to the different technol ogy these settings cannot be changed with an FC I O processor fibre channel Rescan ID
212. nge in etc lilo conf lilo must be loaded once Driver parameters may also be entered at the LILO boot prompt e g gdth reserve_list 1 0 6 0 Intelligent Computer Peripherals 153 Further driver parameters irgl irq2 etc Only for ICP EISA Controllers with disabled BIOS irql irq2 etc correspond with the IROs of the ICP Controllers disable Y deactivates the ICP driver disable N activates the ICP driver reserve mode 0 reserves no SCSI devices 1 reserve mode 1 reserves all not initialized removable hard disk 1 reserve mode 2 reserves all not initialized SCSI devices 1 reserve_list h b t l h b t l reserves SCSI devices at the corresponding coordinates with h Hostadapter b SCSI Bus t Target ID I LUN reverse scan Y reversed scanning order of the PCI controllers reverse scan N normal scanning order of PCI Controllers according to the system BIOS max ids x x number of target IDs per SCSI channel accelerates the boot process rescan Y rescan all SCSI channels IDs rescan N scan only those SCSI devices found during system power up 1 1 The driver parameters reserve mode and rescan N require ICP Controllers with firm ware version FW 1 23 00 2 23 00 or higher The current default settings of the driver are gdth disable N reserve mode l reverse scan N max ids 127 rescan N If gdth is loaded as a module these parameters can also be added with a special syntax IRQ parameters are entered
213. nosis Programs ICP RAID Navigator and 60 22 5 9 Operating System Driver Software nnns 23 A 5 10 ICP Controller RN Series Board 23 B HARDWARE UU 28 B 1 Before Installation 28 ESAO TD E E 28 Installing the ICP ECC SDRAM Module 28 B 4 Fibre Channel Arbitrated Loop Topology Facts 29 B 4 1 Fibre Channel Hard Drives une 30 B 4 2 FC Hard Drive EGGS BS ande 3l B 4 3 FC Connectors and Olli 32 B 4 4 Media Interface Adapter MIA ICP Order No 8950 33 8 5 This S 38 38 42 NE REOR 43 Intelligent Computer Peripherals B 5 4 ICP oorr utri t Muir Essa ua E er eL dS sedie eL o DE 43 BA M MM M LM E pM 43 Two Internal SCSI Devices 16 Bit and 8 46 B 6 ICP Controller Installation nnnc 4 B 7 ICP Controller Function Check
214. not the length of the entire cable as is the case with SCSI Because the laser power necessary for the extremely long distances poses a threat to the human eye a protective system called Open Fiber Control OFC has been defined The re ceiver normally sends continual acknowledgments of receipt of the laser signals If the POE does not receive this acknowledgement the laser signals are immediately stopped There is also a non OFC system used when the power of the laser is not dangerous to the eye no receipt acknowledgements are sent OFC and non OFC systems are not com patible Example for a fibre optics cable B 4 4 Media Interface Adapter MIA ICP Order No 8950 MIA adapters transform the electrical signals used by copper cables into optical signals transmitted by optical fibers One end of the adapter has an FC DB 9 male connector and the other end has an SC duplex female connector for the optical fiber Intelligent Computer Peripherals 34 MIA Media Interface Adapter m y js gt fill i3 SC Duplex Optical IE Connector for the DB9 Interface for the DE Copper Cable Connector Fiber Cable 5 i i UBI iai u le The adapter uses a laser diode to transform electrical signals into light signals and an opti cal sensor to perform the reverse function The necessary electricity for the adapter must be delivered by the DB 9 connector Compatibility with MIAs is an i
215. nt Computer Peripherals 19 Software License Agreement Please read this Software License Agreement before opening the CD disk packaging and before starting to use the programs Each loading of a program covered by this license agreement each transmission within any existing network to another computer as well as each copy on a mass storage system regardless of what kind floppy disk hard disk CD MO etc represents a duplication of the program according to copyright regulations Du plication is permitted only with the authorization of ICP vortex This authorization will be granted only on the condition that the Software License Agree ment stated hereafter is observed By opening the CD disk packaging you expressly acknowledge the Software License Agreement of ICP vortex 1 You are authorized to use the software contained on the enclosed disks CDROMs and EPROMs Flash RAMs on a single computer system only The restriction to this one computer system also applies if the disk packaging contains a double set of soft ware for example one set of 3 5 floppy disks and a CDROM It is further valid if the package contains several versions of software adapted to different operating systems A multi utilization of the software is only permitted when a multi user license has been purchased The number of further computer systems authorized for usage under a multi user license is evident from and limited by that license 2 It is permi
216. nt configuration data to floppy disk or hard disk Sets up or removes RAID 1 Disk Arrays while maintaining full operational conditions Performs Hot Plugs on RAID 4 RAID 5 disk arrays Allows to add or remove a dedicated or pool Hot Fix drive while maintaining full op erational conditions Intelligent Computer Peripherals 169 J 1 Loading GDTMON As mentioned before the GDTMON program is available for various operating systems It can be used either locally or remotely This means that all ICP Controllers in a network can be monitored and serviced from one or several workstation s The communication between the ICP Controller s and the GDTMON program is based on the NETBIOS or NCPE protocols Thus for example it is possible to monitor the ICP Controller in an OS 2 workstation or the ICP Controller in the Novell NetWare fileserver from a Windows 95 98 workstation In order to be able to access a certain computer system with its ICP Controller remotely on the network a special communication module has to be loaded first which routes the in formation through the network For a Novell NetWare fileserver this is the CTRLSRV NLM module NCPE For Windows NT server and workstation Windows 95 98 and OS 2 server and workstation this is the NBSERVx EXE module NETBIOS While the module is loaded it searches for a CTRLSRV CFG Novell NetWare or NBSERV CFG Windows NT Windows 95 98 and OS 2 file which includes the definition of the acce
217. ntelligent Computer Peripherals 186 Controller Monitor v1 25 ICP Intelli C Copyright 1994 1997 a 691 ens Computer TH omputersysteme GmbH Drives 09 Drive 1 Disk 0 zelMbl ZUM Array Drive og Drive Disk 0 izelMbl 2098 Array Drive 5 Log Drive Disk ok SizelMBl 200 Array Drive log Drive Disk ok Size MB 200 Array Drive 5 Uiew Log Drive Cont Cach Phus Disk ok Size MB 200 Array Drive 5 i Fa Drive Information Pha Save Information aMpling Rate View Change Settings GDT6937RP in Local 5us Sampling Rate 1 8 sec GDT Controller Monitor v1 25 ICP VET C Copyright 1994 1997 ICP vortex Computersysteme GM logical Drives oy Drive 1 Disk 0 12 1 Array Drive oy Drive 2 Disk 0 1ZeLMBI 2008 Array Drive 3 Loy Drive 3 Disk ok SizelMBl 200 Array Drive Log Drive 4 Disk ok Size MB 200 Array Drive Disks 208 Array Drive 5 Con Ch A ID 6 SEAGATE ST32160M Size MD 2868 5 ent Computer a TH 18W Lnange settings GDT6937RP in Local_Sys Sampling Rate 1 8 sec Press ENTER to select a Logical Drive The following options become available J 3 5 1 Set Logical Drive Name Change the name of the Logical Drive This name was defined within GDTSETUP either automatically or ma
218. nually Intelligent Computer Peripherals 187 1 3 5 2 Hot Plug Replace Mirror Drive If a RAID 1 or RAID 10 Host Drive has already been set up a defective drive can be replaced Hot Plug while the system continues to be fully operational t Controller Monitor v1 25 ICP Intelli C Copyright 1994 1997 a n 691 ent Computer TH omputersysteme GmbH 18 Array i Array Drive 5 208 Array Drive 5 200 Array Drive 5 Logical Drive Settings et Log Drive Hot Plug Replace Mirror Drive is iut i duh m ot Plug Remove Mirror Drive Hot Plug Add Pool Hot Fix Drive Hot Plug Remove Pool Hot Fix Drive Pool Hot Fix Access GDT6537RP in Local Sus Sampling Rate 1 There are typically two different applications where a Hot Plug becomes necessary Application 1 The RAID 1 10 Array Drive is in the fault tolerant both drives are valid vv It is likely that a drive will fail soon for example when there is a loud operating noise As a preventative measure this drive ought to be exchanged now that is in a moment when the Array Drive is still in a ready state and still has redundancy Application 2 The Array Drive is no longer fault tolerant because a drive of the Array Drive has actually failed The Array Drive is still fully operational but it does not have redun dancy any more If another drive should fail too the Array Drive s functionality is impaired Int
219. o operate disk arrays under NetWare neither NetWare nor the computer need to be involved in the administration of these complex disk array configurations E 2 Novell NetWare 3 10 3 1 3 12 and 3 20 The ICP Controller and the Host Drives previously configured with GDTSETUP are inte grated by means of the ICP driver software located on the ICP System CDROM The driver belongs to the category of so called NLMs NetWare Loadable Module GDTRP310 DSK for NetWare 3 10 GDTRP311 DSK for NetWare 3 11 GDTRP312 DSK for NetWare 3 12 and 3 20 ASPITRAN DSK ASPI manager CTRLTRAN DSK Module for GDTMON Note More information about the GDTMON diagnosis tool can be found in a separate chapter of this manual The installation of the fileserver itself is carried out following the Novell NetWare documentation According to your NetWare version copy the appropriate driver the ICP ASPI Layer ASPITRAN DSK and the ICP CTRLTRAN DSK module to the boot disk or the DOS boot partition During installation type in OAD GDTRP310 ENTER NetWare 3 10 or GDTRP311 ENTER NetWare 3 11 or OAD GDTRP312 ENTER NetWare 3 12 3 20 The ICP ASPI Manager ASPITRAN DSK and the CTRLTRAN DSK module will then be auto matically loaded by the ICP NetWare driver GDTRP310 GDTRP311 or GDTRP312 If more ICP Controllers are installed in the fileserver i e for controller duplexing the above men tioned driver has to be loaded several times But as it i
220. omputer A TH C Copyright 1994 1997 ICP vortex H rra omputersysteme GM t Controller Cache Sett Physical D Logical Del F2 Drive Information aMpling Rate View Change Settings GDT6537RP in Local us Sampling Rate 1 8 sec J 3 6 4 Pool Hot Fix Access This function enables or disables the access of a certain RAID 4 or RAID 5 Array Drive to the Hot Fix Pool Controller Monitor v1 25 ICP V e a Computer TH C Copyright 1994 1997 ICP vortex Computersysteme GmbH rra K control Cache e The access to the Hot Fix Pool is enabled i Physical Do you want to disable it Logical aaa E ave In en ot Plug Tiv ot Fix Drive Hot Plug Add Pool Hot Fix Drive Hot Plug Remove E Hot Fix Drive Hot Plug Remove Pool Hot Fix Drive GDT6337RP in Local 5us Sampling Rate a sac If the access had been enabled before you would be able to disable it now Intelligent Computer Peripherals 209 J 3 6 5 Hot Plug Replace Drive In a similar way as was described a few pages before with the RAID 1 Array Drives this func tion is designed to replace a defective drive of a RAID 4 or RAID 5 Array Drive while the sys tem continues to be fully operational GDT Controller Monitor v1 25 ICP Intelli ent Computer ee DE TH Copyright 1994 1997 ICP vortex omputersysteme GmbH t TRET er Control Physical D 0 a Dr Array Set
221. on it is necessary that the whole ICP Controller is positioned in a constant airflow Normally good server enclosures have extra fans for the motherboard expansion slot area In case of over temperature the ICP Controller sends a message to the operator The cooler on your ICP Controller may look different from the one on pages of this manual Depending on the type of i960 Rx CPU installed on the ICP Controller with some models the cooler is completely missing This is intended All variants fully comply to the specifications laid down in this User s Manual Intelligent Computer Peripherals Chapter Quick Setup 28 Quick Setup C1 What is the Aim of Quick Setup In the previous chapter we installed the ICP Controller in a PCI computer and connected the SCSI and FCAL devices Now these devices must be prepared in order to run with your operating system This Quick Setup chapter should help you to get started quickly Quick Setup shows four examples on how a single hard disk a Mirroring Array Drive RAID 1 a RAID 5 Array Drive and a RAID 5 Array Drive with a Hot Fix drive are installed Example 1 Installing a single hard disk Example 2 Installing a Mirroring Array Drive RAID 1 consisting of 2 hard disks Example Installing a RAID 5 Array Drive consisting of 3 identical hard disks Example 4 Installing a RAID 5 Array Drive consisting of 3 identical hard disks and adding one Hot Fix hard disk With example
222. on is that partitioning makes no sense when there is not an operating system loaded and the INT13H extension of the ICP Con troller has not yet been activated Step 6 Leaving GDTSETUP We are now back in the main menu of GDTSETUP The installation is completed and we therefore leave GDTSETUP by pressing the lt ESC gt key The following message appears Intelligent Computer Peripherals 78 GDTSETUP Version 3 84D Apr B2 1998 Copyright 1997 98 ICP vortex Coupitercucteue GmbH Configuration of drive s was modified System will he rebooted Press any key to reboot As we are done with the installation and therefore definitely want to leave GDTSETUP we press any key IMPORTANT Always end GDTSETUP by leaving the program in the regular way do not warm boot with CTRL ALT DEL or cold boot by pressing the RESET button Certain information is only transferred to the controller when you leave GDTSETUP in the regular way The Host Drive we have configured in this example is now ready for the installation of the desired operating system Intelligent Computer Peripherals 79 C7 Example 2 Installing a Mirroring Array RAID 1 It is our intention to install a Mirroring Array consisting of two identical hard disks In the classical terminology of the RAID levels this is called a RAID 1 disk array We presume that the controller and the hard disks have been properly installed Step 1 of the installation is th
223. on on the very al left side of the window If you want sem so select an ICP Controller via IBM NetBIOS TCP IP sockets type in the corre sponding TCP IP address or the server system s name You are then asked to enter a user name and a password This information is transmitted with encryption 7 Kns Z KA GE TER Chal Lente inane Alter the protocol was selected select the system which File View Window Help contains the ICP Controller and afterwards the ICP Control wl lm epe ler itself The selection and de Dem selection is done by double un xl clicking on the ICP Controller TCP IP SPX IPX ET The selected protocol system idis ND and ICP Controller are shown in Name or IP Address a dashed yellow frame Cancel No more action be done in Sockets this menu sam aM NetBi s DEMOMACHINE3 K 4 Physical Configuration Window ll This window shows the physical configuration of the SCSI or Fibre Channel busses of the selected ICP Controller and the devices connected with these busses The complete configuration is shown as a tree starting from the left with the ICP Controller To get detailed information on the single devices double click on the icons The windows that open depend on the type of the selected device To change the physical configuration of the devices click the right mouse button on the desired device or select the corresponding item from the Configur
224. ontroller will automatically replace the defective drive and start the reconstruction of the data and the redundant information Therefore under these circumstances the fail state is only tem porary and will be eliminated by the controller itself 11 5 Rebuild State The disk array will assume this state after the automatic activation of a Hot Fix drive or af ter a manual replacement carried out with GDTSETUP The data and the redundant infor mation are reconstructed and stored to the new drive 11 6 Expand State If the capacity or RAID level of an existing disk array is changed the disk array changes its state into expand As soon as the expansion or migration is completed the state changes back to ready C 11 7 Error State If a second hard disk should fail while the disk array is in the fail or rebuild state it is not possible to continue the working session without restrictions The disk array is still avail able for I Os but data loss and error messages on the host level are possible The following state diagram of the disk array summarizes the states described above and the transitions from one state to another Some of these states may become the addendum patch e g build patch ready patch This word indicates that the original Array Drive went through a significant procedure Le the parity information was recalculated anew Or the Array Drive has been patched from the error state into the fail state This m
225. ontroller as a secondary controller in your Windows NT system e g Windows NT is installed on an IDE hard disk follow the instructions a to h below a Double click the My Computer icon b Double click Control Panel Intelligent Computer Peripherals 144 c Double click SCSI Adapters d Click on Drivers e Click on Add f Click on Have Disk g Insert the ICP Windows NT driver disk and click OK h Select ICP Disk Array Controller At the next system boot the ICP driver is loaded and the existing Host Drives are ready to be partitioned under Windows NT F 4 3 Using the Hot Plug Function with RAID Host Drives In order to be able to use the Hot Plug function under Windows NT it is necessary to load the GDTMON or RAID Navigator utility programs F 4 4 Installation of a new GDTX SYS Driver Version If it should become necessary to install a new version of the GDTX SYS driver the proce dure is as follows a Double click the My Computer icon b Double click Control Panel C Double click SCSI Adapters d Click on Drivers Select ICP Disk Array Controller f Click on Add g Click on OK Windows NT informs you that this driver is already on the system and asks if you want to use the currently installed driver or a new one h Click on Mew and insert the ICP Windows NT driver disk i Click on Continue and NT copies the new driver to the disk At the next system boot the ICP driver is loaded
226. or the USA 602 353 0303 or send us a FAX fox For Europe 49 0 7131 5972 31 For the USA 602 353 0051 or send us an E Mail For Europe support vortex de For the USA support icp vortex com or call our BBS 19200 8NT 24h 49 0 7131 5972 15 or check our Website http www icp vortex com Important Note Using modern RAID Systems significantly increases data security and availability Under no circumstances does it relieve you from a careful and daily backup on tape or a similar backup media This is the only method to protect your valuable data against total loss e g through fire or theft accidental deletion or any other destroying impacts Thursday M co Tuesday Wednesday Saturday DDS Data Cartridge DDS Data Cartridge Many Thanks to all my Friends Monika amp Wolfgang the grandmasters AnnDee Lois Frank Ken and Andreas the Phoenix Crew Achim Dieter Giinter Hooshiar Norbert Otto Ralph Sam Steffen Winfried they are the real wizards Alfred AB We need I say we have it Andreas AK or Kopf nur mit 6 Michael Mipf where is my CPU J rgen Jogo Hi is Jurgen there Ruth RA she had to proof read that thing Johannes JS I want my ice with a red cap or Dr Oops Click Click J rgen JB diesbez glich amp hinsichtlich or probably Klaus KLM not an Airline Markus Ma
227. or xx 61 for fd1135ds18 3 5 floppy as B see SCO UNIX system Administrator s Reference Hardware Dependence floppy devices When re quested enter the IRQ which has been assigned to the PCI INT of the ICP Controller see chapter B Hardware Installation In addition the ICP BIOS must not be disabled and the boot drive must be connected with the ICP Controller having the lowest PCI slot number When the UNIX installation has been completed the driver is installed too and you may install further devices with mkdev hd ADM If the ICP Controller is an additional controller the installation of the driver is carried out with installpkg H 3 Instructions on mkdev ADM for 3 2v4 x Whenever the program mkdev hd ADM is started you will be asked for the coordinates of the device you wish to install The driver does not automatically display all devices con nected so after the installation you will find a tool named GDTSCAN in the directory etc The scanning can take up to several seconds especially when there is more than one con troller in the system The devices are displayed together with their host adapter number target ID and LUN These values are to be used in mkdev ADM Let s have a brief look at how the HA no target ID and LUN are determined Please note that the UNIX driver al ways maps the first detected Host Drive with target ID 0 LUN 0 Exactly this drive would be used as a boot drive when the ICP Controller is to make
228. oring update is automati cally carried out in the background simultaneously with the normal operation ent Computer TM ee GmbH Drives Controller Monitor v1 25 ICP Intelli C Copyright 1994 1997 a a oyica Scanning SCSI channels target ID s lease wait Hot Plug Add Mirror Drive Hot Plug Remove Mirror Drive _ Hot Plug Add Pool Hot Fix Drive Hot Plug Remoye Pool Hot Fix Drive Pool Hot Fix Access GDT6937RP in Local_Sys Sampling Rate 1 In this example there was already a spare hard disk available on Channel B SCSI ID 3 This drive must not be a Logical Drive Otherwise it will not be available for this function Intelligent Computer Peripherals 196 GDT Controller Monitor v1 25 ICF Intelli Computer TH Copyright 1994 1997 H omputersysteme GM Disk Drive Positions Position Chn ID Status Vendor Type PCI Ww QUANTUM 21855 310 10 34 RH Atte Size MB Drive 1 SEAGATE 216 1 PCI 6 9 4 i 2068 PCI 9 9 2 PCI 6 9 4 r elect the position of the new disk drive 1 After selecting the new hard disk the following message appears t GD Controller Monitor v1 25 ICP Intelli C Copyright 1994 1997 E IE 091 ent Computer ds TH omputersysteme GmbH e have to he stopped le inti the Hot Plug is completed This affects Host
229. ost Drives followed by the Array Drives if RAID is config ured the Logical Drives and the Physical Drives To get detailed information on the single devices double click on the icons The windows that will open then depend on the type of the device To change the logical configuration of the drives click the right mouse button on the de sired drive or select the suitable option from the configuration menu Host Drives These are the drives visible to the operating system Icon Description double click right click opens opens an Tost test ie be i nd m Create Hew z B Remove Create a Create a new new Host Drive Host Drive Normal Host Drive This Host Drive belongs to the selected ICP Controller on a non clustering I O channel Local mounted Cluster Drive A Cluster Drive is a Host Drive on a clustering I O channel This Host Drive is mounted on the selected ICP Controller Clustering means that two or more servers share resources In case of one server failing these resources move over to another valid server The hard disks used for clustering are physically not connected with just one ICP Controller but with several ICP Controllers in different servers shared I O channels Only one server can own a Host Drive at the same time so a Host Drive configured for clus tering may either be controlled by the selected ICP Controller i e local mounted o
230. ot Fix Drive Hot Plug Remove Hot Fix Drive Hot Plug Remove Pool Hot Fix Drive GDT6937RP in Local 5us Sampling Rate a sac A list of the Array Drive s components is displayed For our example we choose 1 for the Hot Plug GDTMON scans the ICP Controller s I O channels for drives which are still free not yet as signed to Logical Drives and free i e not occupied I O channels and IDs GDT Controller Monitor 25 H June Computer Peripherals TM isk Drives Position Chn ID Status Vendor Atte Size MB Drive Q 9 A 6 1 SEAGATE 67521609 20 nu 00 Scanning SCSI channels target ID s lease wait ot Plug Ada l Hot Plug Add Pool Hot Fix Drive Hot Plug Remove Beil Hot Fix Drive Hot Plug Remove Pool Hot Fix Drive GDT6337RP in Local 5us Sampling Rate a sac Intelligent Computer Peripherals 211 GDT Controller Monitor 25 i Computer Peripherals TM isk Drives Position Chn ID Status Vendor Type Atte Size MB Drive SEAGATE 5152160 ME NAE Disk Drive Positions Position Chn ID Status Vendor Type Atte Size MB Drive 1 PCT 8 9 i i 21055 910 10 94 RH QUANTUM SEAGATE 216 RH 2068 Select the position of the new disk div 3 mm in TET mM m The list of Disk D
231. ot yet redundant l e you could immediately start installing your desired operating system without having to wait until this process has finished At the end of this build process the disk arrays state becomes ready fully redundant GDTSETUP Version 3 04 Apr H2 1998 Copyright 1997 98 ICP vortex Computersysteme GmbH up Configure Controller Configure Physical Devices Configure Logical Drives p Status Now press ENTER and move the selection bar to the Parity Verify menu Press ENTER Intelligent Computer Peripherals 103 GDTSETUP Version 3 84D Apr B2 1998 Copyright 1997 98 ICP vortex Coupitercucteue GmbH rray Drive Array Drive He Mem Replace Ar Remove RAI Remove Arr Elapsed Time BB 81 35 Press Fati to a Add Hot Fix Remove Hot Fix Drive Hot Fix Pool Access e Information Refresh arity Recalculate Build Rebuild Progress RAIDYNE now checks the correctness of the redundancy information i e calculates the redundancy information anew and compares it with the already existing information Depending on how large the disk array is this check may take quite a long time however it can be aborted by pressing lt ESC gt Parity Verify is a diagnosis function which enables you to verify the consistency of a disk array every now and then We interrupt the verification by pressing lt ESC gt N
232. ote The ICP monitor program GDTMON and the ICP RAID Navigator also include the parity verify function Unlike in GDTSETUP the disk array s parity can be checked while the disk array is fully operational e g in a NetWare file server Step 7 Simulating a Drive Failure This part of our example is optional Nevertheless we recommend that you go through it It gives you a better understanding of how RAIDYNE reacts in the event of a drive failure and what you have to do in such a case Important To carry out the drive failure simulation the disk array must be in the ready state Only in this state has the disk array redundancy In order to make the simulation as realistic as possible we suggest creating an MS DOS partition on the disk array with FDISK To create disk activity write a small batch program which copies data from one directory of this partition to another While the copy process is going on we simulate a drive failure of drive DISK BI by removing the drive s DC power supply cable Now we can observe how RAIDYNE reacts 1 After a short time the acoustical alarm of the ICP is activated Note this alarm is only activated when the RAID 5 Array Drive is being accessed 2 RAIDYNE activates the so called fail operation state during which the disk array re mains fully operational The data of the failed drive is calculated by means of the redun dant data stored on the other drives The alarm signal does not switch o
233. ourse once this drive has been used by one of the Array Drives it is no longer available for the others t GDT Controller Monitor v1 25 ICF Intelli ent Computer ea TH Copyright 1994 1997 IE H omputersysteme GM Phys un ogical Drive Settings Saye Information EE Set Log Hot Plug Replace Mirror Drive Hot Plug Ad Mirror Drive t Pug t Remove Mirror Pool Hot Fix Access GDT6537RP in Local Sus Sampling Rate 1 After selecting this option GDTMON scans the ICP Controller for drives which are suitable GDT Controller Monitor v1 25 ICP He Computer TH Copyright 1994 1997 iP omputersysteme GM Disk Drive Positions Position Chn ID Status Vendor Type Attr Size MB Drive 09 B 8 i QUANTUM Pins 218 18 94x RH 9 PCL A a 2 SEAGATE 1521608 NES 1 105 A j Ma A 2 A 3 MW A 4 A 5 elect the position of the new disk drive AM in for becoming a Pool Hot Fix drive i e they belong to no Logical Drive and for free coordi nates SCSI Channel SCSI ID We choose Channel C and SCSI ID 4 for the new Hot Fix Drive Intelligent Computer Peripherals O 200 GDT Controller Monitor v1 25 ICP vi at Computer da E TH Copyright 1994 1997 Er E omputersysteme GmbH e haye to be stopped Forala until the
234. parity problem it is advisable to recalculate the parity of the selected Array Drive anew GDT Controller Monitor v1 25 ICF Intelli ent Computer TH C Copyright 1994 1997 ICP H rra onp utere de ENE GM t Do you really want to recalculate the parity of the array union No tes i pug d lace ar D ENERO Ho riv ot Fix Drive Hot Plug Add pir Hot Fix Drive Hot Plug Remove mir Hot Fix Drive Hot Plug Remove Pool Hot Fix Drive GDT6937RP in Local Sus Sampling Rate n sec The state of the Array Drive changes into build patch and the build process is started immediately The word patch indicates that the parity of this Array Drive was calculated anew After this procedure the Array Drive assumes the ready patch sate Intelligent Computer Peripherals 204 GDT Controller Monitor ICF Intelli Copyright 1994 1997 ICP vortex herals TM ent Computer Peri omputersysteme mi t View Chy EIE aMpling Rate View Change Settings GDT6937RP in Local 5us Sampling Rate 1 8 sec J 3 6 3 Expand Array Drive There are two fundamental functions which are available within this option Migrate the RAID level of the selected RAID Array Drive RAID 0 gt RAID 4 and vice versa RAID 0 gt RAID 5 and vice versa Expand the capacity of the selected Array Drive by adding one or several new hard disks Both functions can be selected at
235. partition with GDTSETUP more information later in this manual or FDISK for more information on FDISK please refer to the MSDOS user s manual A As already mentioned before you can load GDTSETUP in two ways For the partitioning GDTSETUP has to be loaded from disk under MS DOS Boot the MS DOS operating system either from a boot floppy or from an already existing boot drive i e IDE hard disk etc B In order for GDTSETUP to work properly you have to load the device driver GDTX000 first This can be done in two ways Load GDTX000 from the MS DOS command level by typing in GDTX000 lt ENTER gt or load GDTX000 automatically through the CONFIG SYS file DEVICE GDTX000 EXE Load GDTSETUP from the MS DOS command level by typing GDTSETUP lt ENTER gt Intelligent Computer Peripherals 117 Note GDTSETUP EXE as well as GDTX000 EXE on the System Disk DOS C Now in the program GDTSETUP select the menu Configure Host Drives GDTSETUP Version 3 04 Apr 1998 Copyright 1997 98 ICP vortex Computersysteme GmbH Advanced Setup Configure Controller Configure Physical Devices Configure Logical Driyes Configure Array Drives Configure ost Drives Information Express Setup Pressing ENTER leads you to the following sub menu In our example the Host Drive list contains two Host Drives The first drive in the list is not relevant for our example GDTSETUP Version 3 04 Ap
236. patible Problems may occur if the motherboard and or System BIOS are not fully PCI 2 x compati ble The best remedy is to update the PCI system BIOS to the latest version Furthermore we have integrated into our ICP BIOS various routines tricks which remedy the incompatibilities of some PCI system BlOSes at least with regard to the ICP Controller B 7 2 Switching On the PCI Computer System Now after having installed the ICP Controller and the devices check whether the controller is working correctly If the ICP Controller is the only controller in the computer system set hard disks C and D to not available in the System BIOS setup program of the computer Make sure that the boot priority starts with A then C etc Normally you can start the BIOS setup program by pressing a certain key combination af ter switching on the computer After switching on the PCI computer system pay attention to the LEDs of the ICP Controller If everything is installed correctly the green LED S will light up when switching on the PCI computer system The green LED S S for status shows that the ICP Controller is online If this green LED does not react as described above switch off the computer and double check the correct installation of the ICP Controller The electronic loudspeaker of the ICP Controller gives forth a series of 4 sig nals with a pause between the first two The other green LED T may flicker sometimes it alwa
237. r 1998 Copyright 1997 98 ICP vortex Computersysteme GmbH V ptup Configure Controller Configure Physical Devices Configure Logical Drivas Configure Array Drives TER Se ost Drive Name Status imu E acity Type belongs to A Al ok de M Disk Logical reate new Host Drive F2 Drive Information Refresh We select this Host Drive by moving the selection line with the cursor keys T and 4 and confirm our choice with lt ENTER gt Then the following screen comes up Intelligent Computer Peripherals 118 GDTSEIUP Version 3 04 Apr AZ 1998 Copyright 1997 98 ICP vortex Computersysteme GmbH Host Drive Change Drive Name Swap Host Drives Remove Host Drive Split Host Drive Merge Host Drives BT Partition Drive ae acity Type belongs to i AA MB Disk Logical 8 B verur Master Boot Code QU E NR Information F efresh We now select Partition Drive and then View Partitions The following screen appears In our example there is no entry yet GDTSETUP Version 3 04 Apr H2 1998 Copyright 1997 98 ICP vortex Computersysteme GmbH Host Drive Change Drive Name Swap Host Drives Remove Host Drive Split Host Drive Merge Host Drives Select Host Drive Attrib Capacita Type belongs to artition Drive 2 ME Logical A artition Status Start Cy End Cyl Ca MB Press lt ESC gt select Create Partition
238. r by a different ICP Controller i e remote mounted You may only change the configuration of a local mounted Host Drive Intelligent Computer Peripherals 240 Ne Remote mounted Cluster Drive nd A Cluster Drive is a Host Drive on a clustering 1 channel This Host Drive is mounted on an ICP Controller in a different server Clustering means that two or more servers share resources In case of one server failing these resources move over to another valid server The hard disks used for clustering are physically not connected with just one ICP Controller but with several ICP Controllers in different servers shared I O channels Only one server can own a Host Drive at the same time so a Host Drive configured for clus tering may either be controlled by the selected ICP Controller i e local mounted or by a different ICP Controller i e remote mounted You may only change the configuration of a local mounted Host Drive Private Host Drive belonging to another ICP Controller 4 This is a Host Drive on a clustering I O channel i This Host Drive is configured as a Private Host Drive and does not belong to the selected ICP Controller Clustering means that two or more servers share resources In case of one server failing these resources move over to another valid server The hard disks used for clustering are physically not connected with just one ICP Controller but with several ICP Controllers in different servers shared I
239. r the ICP Con troller uses MEM corresponds with the DPMEM address of the ICP Controller which is displayed in the BIOS message of the ICP Controller after power up In both cases you have to carry out a cold boot in order to use the new ICP Controller under UnixWare Example etc scsi pdiadd d 0 v 12 m c8000 gdth After that a reboot of the UnixWare system is necessary No kernel link is required because the driver will be dynamically loaded 1 5 Coordinates of SCSI devices a Host adapter Number HA The host adapter number assigned to the ICP Controller is derived from the PCI slot num ber of the ICP Controller Therefore if there is only one ICP Controller installed in the PCI bus computer system the host adapter number 0 If there are two ICP Controllers in stalled the ICP Controller with the lower PCI Slot number is assigned host adapter number 0 and the ICP Controller with the higher PCI slot number is assigned host adapter 1 Note After a cold boot the ICP BIOS displays a couple of messages each beginning with the controller s PCI slot number e g 0 3 4 MB RAM detected The number after the is the slot number of the controller This helps you to determine which is the order of the ICP Controllers and which host adapter number is assigned to them by UnixWare See also chapter B Hardware Installation b UnixWare Bus number Target ID and LUN Target IDs and LUNs for Not Direct Access Devices devic
240. r to avoid damages caused by electrostatic charges the following warning must be observed during installation Never take the ICP Controller out of the anti static bag unless this is done at an anti static work place and the person handling the ICP Controller is secured against elec trostatic charge through wrist bands If these instructions are not observed the user risks damage or destruction of the CMOS components of the ICP Controller B 2 Tools Before installing please switch off the complete computer system and remove all cables including the power cable Open the case of the host computer with an appropriate screw driver usually a medium sized Philips screwdriver B 3 Installing the ICP ECC SDRAM Module ESM It is not possible to operate the ICP Controller without an ESM The ICP Controller is delivered without ESM OMB Proper operation is only granted when using an original ICP ECC SDRAM Module Please order an ICP ESM when you order your ICP Controller 16MB 32MB or 64MB If the ICP Controller is not yet equipped with cache RAM or if another ESM is to be stalled we recommend adding it before you install the ICP Controller in your computer sys tem As mentioned before the ICP Controller can be run with three different cache RAM sizes The minimum cache RAM size is 16MB The maximum cache RAM size is 64MB The ICP Controller provides one socket for an ICP ECC SDRAM Module SDRAM stands for Synchrono
241. ra DAN enes FENE GmbH t r1 hale to be stopped takoren ly untl the Hot Plug is completed This affects Host Driye s Please u the new disk drive with SCSI ID 4 hus terminators have to he added or removed Check if 565 The new disk drive must have at least 288 MB capacity Eres RETIMI to stop the SCSI channel for unplugging plugui PCI 6 9 PCI 9 9 PCI 9 9 AM In cuc m GDTMON adds the new drive to the selected Array Drive Intelligent Computer Peripherals 221 Controller Monitor v1 25 ICP Ve a Computer TH C Copyright 1994 1997 ICP vortex Computersysteme GmhH rra stoppe in nthe disk drive at Ha channel SCSI ID 4 MUST NOT DO ANY UNPLUGGING OR PLIICCING ON ME SCSI CHANNELS DOING 0 MIGHT CAUSE SERIOUS HARDWARE D data on the new disk drive will be destroyed After confirming unplugging or plugging is not allowed cause serious hardware damage AM in m sac If we now look at the Array Drive s structure press F2 we can see the new drive added as a Hot Fix Drive to the Array Drive Controller Monitor v1 25 ICP Computer TH C Copyright 1994 1997 ICP vortex Computersysteme GmhH rra View Chy Control Physica Lo un Det F2 Drive Information jize MB 200 Size MB 2868 Hot Fix priv Fa Drive Information J 3 6 7 Hot Plug Add Pool Hot Fix Drive A Pool Hot Fix Drive is a spare drive within the
242. rals TH omputersysteme GmbH t Cont Cach Do you want to remove Phys the missing drives lai 2 JRR Save Information Hot Plug Drive Hot Plug 5 Add Pool Hot Fix Drive Hot Plug Remove Pool Hot Fix Drive Pool Hot Fix Access GDT6537RP in Local us Sampling Rate 1 After confirming here with Yes you can follow the next paragraph 3 5 3 Hot Plug Add Mirror Drive to add a new mirror drive to the remaining drive out of the previously failed RAID 1 Array Drive J 3 5 3 Hot Plug Add Mirror Drive This option allows you to add another Logical Drive as a mirroring drive to another Logical Drive The new hard disk can be plugged onto the I O channel while the system continues to be fully operational If a spare and suitable hard disk is already connected and not yet Intelligent Computer Peripherals 195 assigned to a Logical Drive or Host Drive it will be displayed in the list of Disk Drive Posi tions There are two cases which make this function very interesting 1 An existing hard disk should be given 100 redundancy but there is no time to shut down the system and interrupt the normal operation 2 An existing hard disk has a high probability of failure because it makes for example a strange noise or generates a lot of grown defects but there is no time to shut down the sys tem and interrupt the normal operation Once the new hard disk is added the data synchronization mirr
243. rameters Device To do so follow these instructions l Load the Registry Editor regedf 32 exe in system32 2 Select the window HKEY LOCAL MACHINE on Local Machine 3 Choose the Key 9 in the directory SYSTEM CurrentControlSetServices 4 Enter by means of Edit function Add Key the name Parameters Select Parameters 5 Enter by means of Edit function Add Key the name Device Select Device 6 Enter by means of Edit function Add Value the name DriverParameter 7 Use data type REG 52 Now enter the parameter string e g reserve 0 0 4 0 This string causes the SCSI device connected with ICP Controller 0 SCSI channel 0 SCSI ID 4 LUN 0 to be reserved as a Raw Device ICP Controller 0 is the ICP Controller which is detected and configured first after switching on your computer system 8 Thereservation of the SCSI device becomes active after completing regedt32 exiting and rebooting the system F 6 Tips amp Tricks F 6 1 ICP Controller not Found During Windows NT Installation We have observed situations where Windows NT can not find the ICP Controller when in stalling the ICP driver This problem is usually caused by one of the standard drivers which Windows NT loads automatically during the first installation phase If this is the case we recommend that Windows NT Setup be started again and carried out in the mode user defined If this process is carried out correctly the scan for hard disk controllers
244. rate disk arrays under UNIX neither UNIX nor the PCI computer need to be involved in the administration of these complex disk array con figurations 1 2 General Installation Notes In the following description we shall explain the installation of UnixWare in connection with the ICP Controller step by step Apart from the UnixWare floppy disks the CD ROM and the UnixWare documentation you also need the ICP floppy disk can be created from the ICP System CDROM UnixWare BTLD Disk In the following discussion when we speak of a boot drive we refer to the drive which is first integrated upon system power up For the ICP Controller this drive is the first Host Drive in the list of ICP Host Drives i e the Host Drive with number 0 see GDTSETUP menu Config ure Host Drives During the installation you will have to decide whether you want the ICP Controller to make the boot drive available or whether you want to operate the ICP Con troller as an additional controller in the computer system If the ICP Controller is the only hard disk controller in the computer system it will automatically make the boot drive avai lable If there are more hard disk controllers the controller which makes the first drive the drive containing the MS DOS partition C available will be the boot controller If the ICP Con troller does not make the boot drive you can skip the following paragraph 1 3 ICP Controller as Boot Controller There must be a Host
245. re GUI style application designed for the operation under Windows 95 98 and NT The main features are Setup of hard disks controlled by the ICP Controller Setup and initialize Physical Drives change the SCSI parameters and cache settings Easy setup and installation of single disks or Array Drives consisting of one or more Physical Drives chaining RAID 0 1 4 5 or 10 Online installation of Host Drives based on a single disk or an Array Drive Maintenance and tuning of existing Array Drives Host Drives and the ICP Controller Configure the cache memory Update the controller firmware Change the device parameters Check or recalculate the parity data of RAID 4 and RAID 5 Array Drives Online capacity expansion of Array Drives Split and merge Host Drives Hot Plug Replace a failed member of an Array Drive Hot Fix Configure a spare disk for an Array Drive Configure SAF TE compliant enclosures Monitoring of the whole subsystem Watch the performance and throughput of virtually every part of the subsystem Simply drag and drop the device on the statistics window Check the hard disks for retries and reassigns replacements of defective sectors on a hard disk to trace problems which might become potential in the future Check the grown defect table of the hard disks to replace a defective drive in time Remote configuration and maintenance Except the Hot Plug function all of the above features can b
246. revents disruption of the Arbitrated Loop While using a sys tem with PBCs one must take care that the allowable cable lengths between devices speci fied for FC AL are not exceeded In addition pay attention to whether the enclosure can support a dual loop configuration In order to provide the highest level of fault tolerance some FC enclosures have two completely independent redundant loops If the hard drives and controller also provide two FC ports the system can be completely redundant with redundant cabling If one loop fails completely the second can still carry all communica tions between controller and hard drives Another consideration is whether the enclosure supports Media Interface Adapters MIA PBC Hard Disk u P 32 These adapters transform the electrical signals from hard drives into optical signals In or der for these adapters to function however the DB 9 connectors must provide the neces sary electrical support MIAs allow a controller with copper cabling to be used with a fiber optic system A modern enclosure should also provide a management interface through which a RAID controller can communicate information regarding the status of the system For example the enclosure would communicate information about fan or power supply failure to the controller which would then notify the system administrator Similarly the controller communicates with the enclosure indicating which har
247. rivate Hot Fix Drive can only be used by the Array Drive it was configured for The Pool Hot Fix access can be changed by clicking with the right mouse button on the Array Drive icon RAID 4 5 10 Drive Info Drive No fi Drive Name RAIDS Fans Type RAID 5 Status ready Capacity 70478 Attributes Rw Striping Size 22 KB Pool Hot Fix Disabled K 5 3 The Logical Drive Information Window Double click on the Logical Drive icon This window shows information on a Logical Drive A Logical Drive can be either a single disk or a chaining group of disks concatenation or a stripe set of several disks Drive No The number of the Logical Drive Drive Name The name of the Logical Drive Type The type of the Logical Drive A Logical Drive can be either a single disk or a chaining group of disks concatenation or a stripe set of several disks Status This is the state of the Logical Drive It can be ready missing not available after reset or failed i e no longer available for the con troller Capacity The capacity which is available for Array Drives or Host Drives Attributes The attribute of a Logical Drive is usually read write RW If a component of a disk array is missing while startup and the op erator decides not to activate fail mode the array is set to the read only attribute RO When the missing drive is available again the Array Drive shows again the ready statu
248. rive B EST i 170 Processor FCAL RU 8538 FCAL Ru FCAL A 158 1 0 Processor Rescan for new device F2 Extended Information Important Moving to the next level Configure Logical Drives only makes sense if all three devices you need there are initialized Intelligent Computer Peripherals m 9 Step 3 Configure Logical Drives We now leave level 1 by pressing the lt ESC gt key and are back in the main menu Now with the cursor keys T and 4 select Configure Logical Drives and go to level 2 by pressing lt gt GDTSETUP Version 3 04 Apr 1998 Copyright 1997 98 ICP vortex Computersysteme GmbH ptup Configure Controller j Configure Physical Devices IKonfigure ogical Drives Configure Array Drives Host Drives IEEE nformation Express Setup The main screen of level 2 appears Move the selection bar to Create new Logical Drives and press lt ENTER gt GDTSETUP Version 3 04 Apr 1998 Copyright 1997 98 ICP vortex Computersysteme GmbH y j Configure Control ler Configure Physical Devices Fong Drives 1gure ogica a Status Attrib Capacita Type belongs to y DISK hi ok RU 2800 Mb Disk Host reate new Logical Drive Delve Information Load All FIG Refresh Note The already existing Logical Drive in this list has no relevance for our example Intelligent Computer Peripherals vance
249. rive Positions shows us the following No 0 This is the position of the drive which should be replaced Since it is still there the hard disk s state vendor type attributes size and Logical Drive number are displayed No 1 2 3 Free available i e not yet assigned to a Logical Drive drives 1 and 3 could also be used for the replacement No 4to These are free i e not occupied plugging positions for the new hard disk On No 17 the above screen you can t see positions No 9 to No 17 but you can scroll the list with the Page Down Up keys GDT Controller Monitor 25 ut Computer Peripherals isk Drives Position Chn ID Status Vendor Type Atte Size MB Drive AGATE 5152160 MEN NAE GD 1 e em to he stopped until the Hot Plug is completed This affects Host Drivels Please configure the new disk drive with SCSI ID 3 Check if 5051 bus terminators have to he added or removed The new disk drive must have at least 200 MB capacity ress RETURN to sto the SCSI channel for unplugging pluggi PCI 9 9 PCT 0 9 PCI 6 9 AM ln MET m sac Intelligent Computer Peripherals 212 For our example we now take the new hard disk which must have a capacity equal or larger than 200MB set it to SCSI ID 3 and observe the SCSI termination GDT Controller Monitor v1 25 ICP Intelligent Computer Peripherals TM isk Drives Position Chn ID Status Vendor Type At
250. rive can be smaller than the size of the Logical Drive or the Array Drive the Host Drive is a part of Partition Table The partition table of a Host Drive can contain up to four partition entries Information on the type of the partition it s location on the Host Drive it s size and the percentage of space used by this parti tion are shown Host Drive Info Drive No 1 RAIDS Capacity 70478 MB ers Default Partition Table No Type Start Cyl End Cyl Capacity Space used 1 IFS 0 8983 70473 100 2 3 4 K 5 2 The Array Drive Information Window Double click on the Array Drive Icon This window shows information on an Array Drive i e a disk array Drive No The logical number of the Array Drive Drive Name The name of the Array Drive Type This is the RAID level of the Array Drive It can be RAID 0 data striping no redundancy RAIDI mirroring RAID 4 striping with parity drive RAID 5 striping with striped parity or RAID 10 com bination of RAID 1 and RAID 0 Status The status of an array can be ready operational fail one drive missing still operational but not redundant error more than one drive failed not operational rebuild one drive is being inte grated build initial preparation of the array idle new defined array before build process has started expand one or several Intelligent Computer Peripherals 24
251. rogrammed into the Flash RAM of the ICP Controller The new firmware becomes active after the next cold boot Note All user specific settings concerning the ICP Controller and the disk arrays are not affected by the firmware update Intelligent Computer Peripherals 233 Turn off the Audible Alarm This option allows you to turn off the audible alarm of the ICP Controller manually After a significant event a drive failure or an overheat of the ICP Controller the audible alarm of the ICP Controller is turned on If the reason of the event is removed the audible alarm turns off automatically If a member of an Array Drive has failed you should replace the failed drive as soon as pos sible Read more about the fail state If the state of an Array Drive changes into error more than one drive has failed please con tact our hotline for further assistance If no drive failed you may also check the Controller Events to find out if the CPU of the ICP Controller is overheated If you hear an audible alarm but the silence function is not offered and there are no critical controller events check if the alarm is coming from a different source like the CPU cooler or the mainboard K 4 2 1 0 Processors These are the I O processors of the ICP Controller Each processor controls one I O chan nel Description double click opens right click opens SCSI processor Channel SE single I
252. roller Controller Settings and switch the Delayed Write function OFF After having completed the Win dows NT installation switch the Delayed Write function ON again GDTSETUP Version 3 04 Apr 1998 Copyright 1997 98 ICP vortex Computersysteme GmbH onfi 11 BOE Enabled ip al 8105 ii Level Fatal errors 0 F Supported BIOS Drives 42 Advanced Sett Memory Test Standard Chi 551 Termination Auto SCSI ID sss 07 Step 3 The partition size of the NT boot partition The size of a Windows NT boot partition is limited to a maximum capacity of 4GB this is a Windows NT restriction Step 4 Check the Master Boot Record In some cases Windows NT checks the virtual geometric parameters heads sectors of the ICP Controller BIOS Host Drives during the installation process This can cause Windows NT to calculate wrong parameters In this case the first part of the installation procedure text mode seems to work fine but after the first warm boot the installation terminates irregularly because the Windows NT boot loader is no longer available To avoid this problem which will inevitably occur with Host Drives larger than or equal to 1GB we recommend that you first re create the so called master boot record MBR of the given Host Drive and secondly to prepare the Host Drive with a little program named NTPREP for the Windows NT installation NTPREP EX
253. row Ultra Bracket internal 50 pin header and an exter SCSI subsystem with an internal Nar nal m pin HD SCSI connector fe row Ultra channel 8841 Wide SCSI TE 2 to 8 Bit SCSI adapter with a 50 Connection of Wide Ultra SCSI devices Adapter pin header and a 68 pin HD SCSI with an 8 Bit 50 pin flat ribbon cable connector male 8842 Wide SCSI External SCSI connector with an Connection of an external Wide Ultra Bracket internal and an external 68 pin HD SCSI subsystem with an internal SCSI connector female Wide Ultra channel 8843 Wide Ultra 80 cm Wide Ultra SCSI cable with Connection of up to 3 internal Wide Ultra Flat Ribbon four 68 pin HD SCSI connectors SCSI devices per SCSI channel Cable male 8846 Narrow Wide External SCSI connector with an Connection of an external Narrow Ultra Bracket internal 68 pin connector female SCSI subsystem with an internal and an external 50 pin HD SCSI con Wide Ultra channel nector female B 5 5 Examples Following are some examples of correct SCSI cablings SCSI terminations and SCSI ID set tings Intelligent Computer Peripherals 44 One Internal 16 Bit SCSI Device 0 1 1 9 1 9p ISIS ug 19 05u0 41 SAOJDUIWADE SNQ ISIS Intelligent Computer Peripherals 45 Several Internal 16 Bit SCSI Devices 1 15 5 ap ISIS 0 1 1 931A9p ISIS ug 4 4 I 01 15
254. rray Controller Data Striping Disk Mirroring Duplexing RAID 10 Host Drive Intelligent Computer Peripherals 62 C3 How the ICP Firmware Features Activated Any installation or maintenance procedures regarding the ICP Controller should be carried out with the configuration program GDTSETUP The monitoring programs GDTMON character oriented tool and ICP RAID Navigator GUI tool allow a continuous monitor ing and maintenance of the ICP Controller and the connected disk arrays These utilities also includes options to replace a defective drive with a new one Hot Plug and is available for most of the operating systems supported by the ICP Controllers GDTSETUP allows you to set up single disks or complex disk arrays with simple and user friendly installation pro cedures Little previous knowledge is needed to be able to use GDTSETUP efficiently It is only necessary to understand the hierarchy levels in the ICP Controller firmware For the user s convenience the GDTSETUP program is available in two different variants GDTSETUP loaded from the ICP Controller s Flash RAM after switching on the computer GDTSETUP loaded from disk under MS DOS The header of the GDTSETUP program indicates with a letter after the version number whether GDTSETUP was loaded from disk or from Flash RAM R for GDTSETUP loaded from the Flash RAM after switching on the computer D for GDTSETUP loaded from Disk
255. rsysteme GmbH elect Physical Deive Vendor Product ttr Cap MB Drive single Dis SEAGATE ST19171FC RU 0338 Chaining SEAGATE STL9171FC RALDA SEAGATE STIS171FC RAID FCAL 4 124 8 SEAGATE ST19171FC RW 9538 RAID HotFix SPACE Select Deselect Used Capacity per Drive 1 8538 8888 11 AIDIA AIDIA HotFix Intelligent Computer Peripherals 66 GDTSETUP Version 3 04 Apr B2 1998 Copyright 1997 98 ICP vortex Coupitercucteue GmbH lllQUPB 0 Drives 051 T Mane Status belongs to DISK_Al ok if Msk 1 18 rye F2 Drive Information FLA Refresh Express Setup delivers a fully operational RAID5 disk array After leaving GDTSETUP the parity information is generated For chapter C we do not use this function but give detailed instructions on how to set up a single disk and disk arrays with GDTSETUP and its Enhanced Setup C 4 Levels of Hierarchy Within the ICP Firmware RAIDYNE is based on four fundamental levels of hierarchy Each level has its own drives components The basic rule is To build up a drive on a given level of hierarchy the drives of the next lower level of hierarchy are used as components Level 1 Physical Drives hard disks removable hard disks some MO drives are located on the lowest level This can be either devices with a SCSI interface or devices with a Fibre Chan nel Arbitrated Loop FCAL port They are
256. rt while ICP s alarm signal is heard Note the alarm only goes on when the RAID 5 Array Drive is accessed 2 RAIDYNE activates the so called fail operation mode In this mode the disk array re mains fully operational The data of the failed drive is reconstructed by means of the re dundancy information stored on the other drives 3 RAIDYNE starts the motor of the Hot Fix drive 4 RAIDYNE includes the Hot Fix drive into the disk array and starts to reconstruct the data and redundancy information The disk array is now in the operation mode rebuild 5 The alarm signal is not turned off until a new Hot Fix drive is added to the disk array or until GDTSETUP or GDTMON is loaded and the missing Hot Fix drive is removed or re placed with a new one Obviously no other hard disk may fail until all data is entirely reconstructed on the Hot Fix drive because up to that moment the system operates without redundancy How is this situation reflected in GDTSETUP What has happened to the failed drive To answer these we load GDTSETUP and check We go directly to the menu Configure Array Drive menu As expected the disk array is in the rebuild state Request the drive information regarding the RAID5 disk array with lt F2 gt GDISETUP Version 3 te Apr B2 1998 Copyright 1997 98 CP vortex Computersysteme GmbH Advanced Setup Configure Controller Configure Physical Devices Configure Logical Drives nflgure rray Drives
257. s J 2 1 Select Controller This menu option yields a list of available ICP Controllers By selecting a protocol you have either access to the ICP Controller s in your local computer e g MS DOS Windows NT Windows 95 or OS 2 protocol or to an ICP Controller in another computer server or work station in the network NetWare NCPE or IBM NETBIOS protocol diagnosis and main tenance functions of GDTMON refer to the ICP Controller you have selected here and the hard disks connected with this controller Select Controller Intelligent Computer Peripherals 173 GDT Controller Monitor v1 29 ICP u Computer oe C Copyright 1994 1997 ICP vortex Computersysteme GmhH CIN Protocol 22 m ain Menu elect kontroller Host Drives Logical Drives Physical Drives Cache Statistics Sampling Rate View Change Settings MS DOS in the Select Protocol menu indicates that the GDTMON program was loaded on a MS DOS computer I e if GDTMON had been loaded under Windows NT we would see there Windows NT GDT Controller Monitor v1 25 ICP Vire uu Computer dra C Copyright 1994 1997 CP vortex Computersysteme Gm EE Menu TH Host Drives elect Controller Position Features Firmware Driver Serial Mo J 2 2 Host Drives This menu option leads to the list of available Host Drives level 4 We would like to recall that the operating system e g NetWare only recognizes th
258. s This feature enables modern hard disk drives to receive several commands at one time and then process them in an optimized order Few mainly older drives do not or not correctly support this feature You can change the tagged queues setting for a hard disk in the SCSI parameters Initialize menu SCSI read cache SCSI write cache These settings enable or disable the write and read caches of the hard disks Turning these caches off degrades the performance of the hard disk You can change the cache settings of a drive in the SCSI parameters Initialize menu Intelligent Computer Peripherals 231 Format Disk Format a Physical Disk Caution This function deletes ALL DATA on the selected Physical Drive The hard disk which you want to low level format may not be member of a Logical Drive if you want to start a low level format or a check surface This function sends a format unit command to the Physical Drive Everything else is done by the drive itself The ICP Con troller stands by to receive a good status back from the drive when it has successfully fin ished the low level format thus no progress information can be shown What the drive exactly does during the low level format and how long it takes depends on the manufac turer s format unit command implementation in the firmware of the drive the speed and capacity of the drive A low level format can take from seconds to hours or even days Be fore you confirm to start th
259. s i e attribute RW Intelligent Computer Peripherals 244 Last Status The last status information of a Logical Drive This is different to the last status information of Physical Drives RAID Com Ifthe Logical Drive is a member of a RAID 1 array it can be either ponent master or slave If a RAID 1 component is added to a Logical Drive the data is read from the master and written to the added Logical Drive the slave One master may have several slaves RAID 4 5 As a member of a RAID 4 or RAID 5 array a Logical Drive can be the Component master or a component Different to RAID 1 arrays this is only im portant for the internal structure of the array Log Drive Info Ea D veNo 1 Drive Name Piska Type Disk Status Capacity 35239 MB Attributes Last Status 0 m RAID1 Component Type ls Status RAID4 5 Component Type Master K 5 4 Change the name of a Drive Click the right mouse button on the drive icon This menu option opens a dialog where you can enter a new name for the selected drive up to 7 characters K 5 5 Remove a Host Drive Click the right mouse button on the Host Drive icon By selecting this menu item you can delete a Host Drive CAUTION By deleting a Host Drive all other Host Drives which are part of the same Array Drive or Logical Drive the Array Drive or Logical Drive itself and all its components are de leted ALL DATA WIL
260. s 3 and 4 some essential issues having direct impact on the structure and configuration of an Array Drive will also be discussed 1 How many physical hard disks are to be integrated in the Array Drive 2 Which redundancy level ought to be achieved 3 Should the ICP Controller automatically recover redundancy in the event of a disk failure Or in other terms Are Hot Fix drives needed Before we go through these examples step by step we would like to explain a few terms and relations important for the basic understanding of the ICP Controller firmware At the end of example 4 we will try to answer the three questions above 2 What is the ICP Controller Firmware We refer to firmware RAIDYNE as the operating system which controls the ICP Control ler with all its functions and capabilities The firmware exclusively runs on the ICP Control ler and is stored in the Flash RAM on the ICP Controller PCB The controlling function is entirely independent of the PCI computer and the host operating system installed for ex ample UNIX and does not drain any computing power or time from the PCI computer In addition to disk chaining RAID 0 and RAID 1 the firmware allows you to install and control Array Drives of the types RAID 4 data striping with dedicated parity drive RAID 5 data striping with distributed parity and RAID 10 a combination between RAID 0 and 1 All ICP Controllers are equipped with a hardware which is particular
261. s NT NTPREP 141 Windows NT Raw Devices 145 Windows NT Size of the boot partition 141 Windows NT Updating 3 51 to 4 146 Windows NT Updating the GDTX SYS driver 144 Intelligent Computer Peripherals
262. s Sampling Rate 1 8 sec After pressing lt F2 gt the new structure is displayed Intelligent Computer Peripherals 198 GDT Controller Monitor yl 25 ICP vi at Computer TH Copyright 1994 1997 Ey nm omputersysteme GmbH Phys i Saye Fa Drive Information GDT6937RP in Local_Sys Sampling Rate 1 8 sec The entry invalid for the second drive means that the data have not yet been completely copied from the first drive After the completion of the synchronization process this entry changes into valid J 3 5 4 Hot Plug Remove Mirror Drive This option allows the removal of a Mirror Drive from a RAID 1 or RAID 10 Array Drive Once the drive has been removed the data on the other drive are no longer redundant Controller Monitor v1 25 E Computer Peripherals isk Drives Position Chn ID Status Vendor Atty Size MB Drive PCI 9 A 6 1 SEAGATE 57321600 RH 2068 valid Select one of the disk drives for Hot Plus Hot Flug Add nive Hot Plug Remove Pool Hot Dive Pool Hot Fix Access GDT6337RP in Local_Sys Sampling Rate 1 Intelligent Computer Peripherals 00 J 3 5 5 Hot Plug Add Pool Hot Fix Drive A Pool Hot Fix Drive is a spare drive within the so called Hot Fix Pool A drive in a Hot Fix Pool is available for several RAID 1 and RAID 10 Array Drives as a Hot Fix drive Thus sev eral Array Drives can share one Hot Fix drive Of c
263. s menu thus we go directly to the Configure Host Drives menu and have no Step 4 Intelligent Computer Peripherals 77 Step 5 Configure Host Drives We are now back in the main menu of GDTSETUP and select Configure Host Drive The main screen of level 4 appears Press ENTER A list of available Host Drives is dis played Again the first entry is not relevant for our example At the second position we find our previously configured Logical Drive It was automatically transformed into a Host Drive thus for this example we have nothing to do in this menu Press ENTER to get a list of possible menu options GDTSETUP Version 3 84D Apr H2 1998 C Copuright 1997 98 ICP vortex Coup Lene ie ane GmbH Host Drive wap Host Drives Remove Host Drive Split Host Drive Merge Host Drives S ost Drive Partition Drive imu a acity Type belongs to i AO MB Disk Logical A MjOverur Master Boot Code Te th CD one RN Information Refresh We should not forget to mention that if you would have selected Create new Host Drive this would have lead you to the same menu as the Express Setup mode But this example is an exercise which should help you to gain a better understanding of how the ICP Controller and GDTSETUP work So don t believe we let you do redundant homework By the way if you have loaded GDTSETUP from the Flash RAM lt CTRL gt lt G gt the Partition Drive option will be missing in this menu The reas
264. s of an Array Drive The ready state RAD AG 45 The Array Drive is fully operational when in the ready state All redundant information is present that is a hard disk can fail without impairing the functionality of the Array Drive This is the normal state of an Array Drive The state ready expand indicates that the RAID level and or capacity are currently migrated expanded The idle state RAID 4 5 This state is characterized by the fact that the redundant information of the Array Drive has never been entirely created The Array Drive is in this state after its first configuration If an error should occur while the array is in the build state the array returns to the idle state exception if during build mode the dedicated drive of a RAID 4 Array Drive fails the state changes to fail The build rebuild state 09 RAD a RAID 4 5 After the Array Drive has been configured for the first time and the build process is started it assumes the build state While the Array Drive is in the build state redundancy informa tion is calculated and stored to the components of the Array Drive The disk array will assume the rebuild state after the automatic activation of a Hot Fix Drive or after a manual replacement Hot Plug The data and the redundant information are re constructed and stored to the new drive In both states the Array Drive is not redundant You can monitor the progress of the array build rebuild by click
265. s re entrant it is only loaded once A single ICP Controller can be chosen by selecting its PCI slot number Novell NetWare 4 x Using DSK Driver The ICP Controller and the Host Drives previously configured with GDTSETUP are inte grated by means of the ICP driver software located on the ICP System CDROM The driver belongs to the category of the so called NLMs NetWare Loadable Module Intelligent Computer Peripherals 133 GDTRP400 DSK for NetWare 4 x ASPITRAN DSK ASPI manager CTRLTRAN DSK Module for GDTMON Note More information about the GDTMON diagnosis tool may be found in a separate chapter in this manual if you wish to install NetWare 4 x from a CDROM you first have to set up the CDROM drive under MS DOS following the instructions given in chapter D section D 6 Then install NetWare following the instructions in the NetWare documentation During the installation the NetWare installation program asks you which hard disk driver you want to load show ing a list of available drivers As the ICP driver is not part of this list yet you have to boot it from the floppy disk insert the ICP Novell NetWare disk into the floppy drive Now select the drivers GDTRP400 ASPITRAN and CTRLTRAN Complete the installation according to the instructions given by the NetWare installation program Naturally you can also load the ICP driver directly from the system console just as with NetWare 3 x LOAD GDTRP400 ENTER AS
266. sed for Hot Plus m ot Fix Drive i Plus hdd ool Hot Fix Drive Hot Plug Remove Hot Fix Drive Hot Plug Remove Pool Hot Fix Drive GDT6337RP in Local 5us Sampling Rate a sac After pressing the lt ENTER gt key GDTMON scans the ICP Controller for free plugging posi tions Intelligent Computer Peripherals 215 GDT Controller Monitor 25 i Computer Peripherals TM isk Drives Position Chn ID Status Vendor Type Atte Size MB Drive RN SEAGATE 5152160 M NE 1 Scanning SCHI channels tanget IDs Please wait ot Plug Hot Plug Add Hot Fix Drive Hot Plug Remove Hot Fix Drive Hot Plug Remove Pool Hot Fix Drive GDT6937RP in Local 5us Sampling Rate n sac GMT Controller Monitor 25 i Computer Peripherals TM isk Drives Position Chn ID Status Vendor Atte Size MB Drive NOU A 6 ji SEAGATE 5152160 Disk Drive Positions Position Chn ID Status Vendor Type Attr Size MB Drive 1 PCT 0 9 i QUANTUM Plass 918 19 94 RM 9 i SEAGATE ST32160N 2068 KI A 5 y Select the position of the new disk drive 3 1 cm m FTT The list of Disk Drive Positions shows us the following GD but defective the hard disk s state vendor type attributes size and Logical Drive number are displaye
267. set correctly Are the SCSI flat ribbon cables connected correctly Intelligent Computer Peripherals 48 Step 8 After having checked all the points in Step 7 reconnect the PCI computer system to the power supply Do not close the computer case yet B 7 ICP Controller Function Check Before we put the ICP Controller into operation for the first time we would like to spend a few words on the PCI 2 x compatibility requirements a PCI computer system especially the motherboard and the motherboard s BIOS should meet B 7 1 PCI 2 x Compatibility Requirements A pre condition for a flawless installation of PCI bus master expansion cards the ICP Con trollers belong to this group of expansion cards in a PCI motherboard is a 100 PCI 2 x compatible System BIOS We have observed more than once that a motherboard declared fully PCI 2 x compatible was equipped with a System BIOS located in an EPROM or FLASH RAM which was not PCI 2 x compatible at all To make up for this many manufacturers of PCI motherboards or PCI computer systems offer their customers a special area on their website from where the latest PCI system BIOS version can be downloaded The System is fully PCI compatible If your PCI motherboard computer is 100 PCI compatible its PCI system BIOS will to a large extent automatically plug amp play carry out the configuration e g mapping of the ICP Controller s BIOS and DPMEM assignment of a proper system IRQ to a
268. sferred to the controller when you leave GDTSETUP in the regular way The question that arises now is When and how does the Hot Fix mechanism work Normally RAIDYNE puts Hot Fix drives in a stand by mode that is their motors are stopped However it may happen that certain operations such as loading drivers starting GDTSETUP and so on cause the Hot Fix drives to start their motors This takes a little Bit longer but it is necessary in order to enable RAIDYNE to check the consistency of the setup RAIDYNE substitutes a failed hard disk with a Hot Fix drive only if the array was in a ready state before the failure Or in other words a Hot Fix drive can only be activated if the corresponding disk array was in a state of data redundancy at the moment of failure Important The following partial step can only be performed if the disk array is in the ready state Step 7 Simulating a Hard Disk Failure When a Hot Fix Drive is Present This partial step is optional However we recommend that you carry it out in order for you to get an idea of how RAIDYNE reacts in such a situation and which steps need to be taken To have a very realistic simulation create a DOS partition and generate load on your disk array by using a batch file with copy commands During these copy operations we cause DISK_B2 to fail by plugging out its power supply Intelligent Computer Peripherals 110 We now observe how RAIDYNE reacts 1 After a sho
269. so called Hot Fix Pool A drive in a Hot Fix Pool is available for several RAID 4 5 Array Drives as a Hot Fix drive Thus several Array Drives can share one Hot Fix drive Of course once this drive has been used by one ofthe Array Drives it is no longer available for the others Intelligent Computer Peripherals 222 GDT Controller Monitor ICF Intelli ent Computer TH C Copyright 1994 1997 ICP vortex H rra omputersysteme GM t View Chy Disk Drive Positions Position Chn ID Status Vendor Attr Size MB Drive PCI 0 9 i SEAGATE STS2160N RH 208 PC 0 9 1 QUANTUM PLUSS 91B 10 94x RH 99 09 A 2 PCI 8 9 N a y 1 elect the position of the new disk drive ____________ 1 EM m sec GD We select SCSI Channel C and ID4 for the new Pool Hot Fix Drive Controller Monitor v1 25 ICP Computer dpa C Copyright 1994 1997 ICP vortex Computersysteme GmbH rra View Chy Control Physica Lo Det F2 Drive Information 08 1 NEN izel ME Bi Log Drive 2 Disk Size MD 288 Log Drive 1 Disk ok Size MB 2068 Hot Fix Pool Fa Drive Information You may disable or enable the access of a certain RAID 4 5 Array Drive to the pool of Hot Fix Drives with the option Pool Hot Fix Access see J 3 6 4 J 3 6 8 Hot Plug Remove Private Hot Fix Drive This function
270. solute maximum lengths Total length of internal and external cables per chan nel Avoid using SCSI cables with more connectors than actually needed Never select a SCSI mode or operate a SCSI device with a cable that is not appropriate for this mode The minimum distance between two connectors of a SCSI cable is 20 cm Avoid cable stubs If this is not possible keep the stub length below 10 cm Star cablings are not allowed Keep the number of transitions from flat to round cables and vice versa as small as pos sible It is usually best is to use flat or round cables only Check these points when routing SCSI cables Avoid kinks in the SCSI cable Do not roll the SCSI cable up on itself Avoid routing the cable next to other cables Avoid routing the cable in the vicinity of noise sources such as power supplies Avoid routing the cable over sharp edges and in areas where it could get caught up Avoid routing sticking the cable directly onto metal surfaces Following is a list of some manufacturers of high quality SCSI connectors and cables 3M AMP Amphenol Fujitsu Harting Honda Methode Molex Robinson Nugent Yamaichi When making home made SCSI cables make sure that the insulation displacement con nectors are properly aligned and firmly pressed into the flat ribbon cable Otherwise the whole cable might turn out to be a big short circuit Furthermore check carefully that PIN 1 of the cable connects to PI
271. some functions which allow the patch of this Array Drive from the error state into the fail sate Before the actual patch the defective drive has to be physically removed from the Array Drive Such a patch procedure is a real sheet anchor and should only be used after a detailed consultation with a trained support person a printout of the Save Information file is extremely helpful Intelligent Computer Peripherals 252 K 6 The Statistics Window The statistics window can display the throughput of Physical Logical and Host Drives The vertical axis show the throughput the horizontal axis the time You can add drives by drag and drop them from the physical and logical configuration windows into the statistics win dow If you want to change the layout of the lines adjust the scales of the axis or remove drives from the statistics windows you can do this using the chart menu You can scale the statistics window using the cursor keys E scale time down up scale throughput HICP RAID Navigator Statistics SCSI A 15 0 IBM 5360 SCSI C 15 0 IBM DRHS36D SCSI B 15 0 IBM DRHS36D SCSI A 15 0 IBM DRHS36D Intelligent Computer Peripherals 253 K 7 The Controller Events Window 218 This window shows the history of the events that occurred since the log was cleared the last time The first column in this window contains icons representing the severity of the events Icon Description
272. ss rights of the different users and their passwords The CFG file assigns every user to two different access levels Access level 0 gives the user all functions to view and change the controller disk drive and disk array settings Access level entitles the user only to view the various settings and per formance data The Windows NT Windows 95 98 and OS 2 driver disks on the ICP System CDROM in clude so called DLLs for the supported protocols Example If the MON4NETB DLL file is located in the same directory as GDTMON EXE file for Windows NT the NETBIOS protocol is automatically used for the GDTMON on this system As soon as the NETBIOS support of this operating system is installed during the network configuration the GDTMON on this system can communicate through this protocol with another system in the network which has an ICP Controller The following drivers for the remote GDTMONitor are currently available OS 2 GDTMON32 EXE MON2NETB DLL MON2NCPE DLL NBSRV2 EXE NBSRV CFG NBCLEAN2 EXE Windows NT GDTMON EXE MONANETB DLL ICPSRV EXE ICPSRV CPL NBCLEANA EXE Windows 95 98 GDTMON EXE MONS5NETB DLL NBSRV5 EXE NBSRV CFG NBCLEAND EXE GDTMONitor for OS 2 NETBIOS DLL for OS 2 NCPE DLL for OS 2 NETBIOS Server for OS 2 Configuration file for NetBios Server NETBIOS analysis program GDTMONitor for Windows NT NETBIOS DLL for Windows NT ICP Service for Windows NT for ICP Service NETBIOS analysis program GDTMO
273. sssneesseesssnees 12 DES Using To eae 3 II ae tee paren ea 121 D 6 Using a CDROM Drive under MS DOS or Windows 3 122 D 6 1 Example Using the ASW Software for the CDROM tnnt 123 0 6 2 Example Using corelSCSI for the 0 0 124 D 7 The ICP ASPI Manager GDTASPI EXE c sccssscesscssssseessscsssssecsscssssuseesesssseessssesssesesesssseessansssseesessssunees 125 D 7 1 Using ee ee dee 175 D 7 2 Using corelSCSl oes io tease dub eee dE De E 126 D 8 Installing Windows Ba a 127 D 8 1 The ICP Controller is the primary 127 0 8 2 The ICP Controller is the secondary controller 128 0 8 3 Update the ICP Windows 95 129 D 9 Installing Windows 98 see een 129 USING NOVELL nase 132 E Transparency of Host DIES 132 E 2 Novell NetWare 3 10 3 1 3 12 and 3 20 132 Novell NetWare 4 x Using DSK Driver 132 E 4 Novell NetWare 4 x Using Driver u 133 M M 135 E 5 Optimize Data Throughput
274. st reate neu Logica nm Physical Drive Chi 10 Vendar Product Attn MB Drive FCAL A 124 SEAGATE STI9171FC RU 8538 SPACE Select Deselect drive ENTER End selection Select the initialized hard disk with the lt SPACE gt bar it becomes marked with an and press ENTER Intelligent Computer Peripherals 81 GDTSEIUP Version 3 04 Apr AZ 1998 Copyright 1997 98 ICP vortex Computersysteme GmbH etup Figure Controller anfi igure Eh sical Devices A you want to create a SINGLE drive from the selected disk s CAUTION All data will he destroyed Y N Ch ID Vendor Product Attn Ca MB Drive FCAL A 124 B SEAGATE ST19171FC RU 8538 SPACE Select Deselect drive ENTER End selection For security reasons you will be asked again if you want to use the selected disk to create a Logical Drive As we are sure of our choice we confirm with Yes GDTSETUP allows you to limit the hard disk size for this Logical Drive This becomes interesting when you configure disk ar rays For this example we use the full capacity and press ENTER GDTSETUP Version 3 04 Apr 1998 Copyright 1997 98 ICP vortex Computersysteme GmbH Controller onfigure Physical Devices elec Logical Drive Status Attrib Capacity Type belongs to B ok 0 0 1 DISK BA ok Drive Size 1 8538 MB 8538 1 elec Chi ID LIN Vendor Product Att
275. ster RAIDYNE Firmware GDT7619RN and GDT7629RN include support for Microsoft Cluster Server MSCS A 2 Copyrights Patents Parts of the ICP GDT RN Series controllers are protected under international copyright laws and agreements No part of the product or the manual or parts of the manual may be produced in any form physical electronic photographic or otherwise without the ex pressed written consent of ICP vortex Computersysteme GmbH For this product a patent is registered at the Deutsches Patentamt in Munich with the official reference no 4121974 All special names and trademarks of manufacturers quoted in this manual are protected by copyright ICP Intelligent Computer Peripherals and RAIDYNE are registered trademarks of ICP vortex Computersysteme GmbH Europe ICP vortex Computersysteme GmbH Falterstra e 51 53 74223 Germany Phone 49 0 7131 5972 0 Fax 49 0 7131 255063 BBS 49 0 7131 5972 15 24h 19200 8N1 E Mail support vortex de WWW http www icp vortex com United States of America ICP vortex Corporation 4857 West Van Buren Street 85043 Phoenix Arizona Phone 602 353 0303 Fax 602 353 0051 E Mail support icp vortex com WWW http www icp vortex com ICP vortex is member of the RAID Advisory Board the PCI Special Interest Group PCI SIG and founding member of the 1 0 Special Interest Group LO SIG RAB RAID ADVISORY BOARD Intellige
276. t G gt key combination when the ICP BIOS message comes up shortly after switching on the computer and load GDTSETUP from the Flash RAM of the ICP Controller In this case no operating system is required If GDTSETUP was loaded this way there is an R ROM behind the version number 2 Load GDTSETUP from disk under MS DOS Boot the MS DOS operating system either from a boot floppy or from an already existing boot drive i e IDE hard disk etc In or der for GDTSETUP to work properly you have to load the device driver GDTX000 first This can be done in two ways a Load GDTX000 from the DOS command level by typing in GDTX000 lt ENTER gt b Load GDTX000 automatically through the CONFIG SYS file DEVICE GDTX000 EXE Note GDTSETUP EXE as well as GDTX000 EXE are on the System Disk DOS If GDTSETUP was loaded this way there is a D Disk behind the version number You may now ask what are the differences between the two GDTSETUP variants They are small The GDTSETUP variant loadable from disk under MS DOS also additionally allows the partitioning of Host Drives which is not possible with GDTSETUP loaded from the Flash RAM Loading GDTSETUP from the Flash RAM is pretty easy since there is nothing more required to configure the disk arrays User s who have for instance an NT installation without a DOS partition will highly appreciate this Flash RAM resident GDTSETUP For our example it is not relevant whether we load GDTSETUP
277. t this Hot Fix Drive is only available for the selected Array Drive and cannot be accessed from other Array Drives GDT Controller Monitor v1 25 ICF Intelli ent Computer on C Copyright 1994 1997 vortex H rra omputersysteme GM t View Chy Control Physica L Scanning C I channels tanget Is lease wait Add Poo lug Remove pn Hot B Drive lug Remove Pool Hot Fix Drive GDT6937RP in Local 5us Sampling Rate a sac After selecting this option GDTMON scans the ICP Controller for free positions where the new Hot Fix Drive can be plugged in Intelligent Computer Peripherals 220 GDT Controller Monitor ICF Intelli ent Computer TH C Copyright 1994 1997 ICP vortex H rra omputersysteme GM t View Chy Disk Drive Positions Position Chn ID Status Vendor Attr Size MB Drive PCI 0 9 i SEAGATE STS2160N RH 2068 PC 0 9 1 QUANTUM PLUSS 91B 10 94x 09 A 2 PCI 8 9 N A B A B i x elect the position of the new disk drive n In m sac For our example we choose the drive on Channel C and SCSI ID 4 If we would plug in now a new drive we would have to set the SCSI ID to 4 and make sure that the SCSI termination is set properly GD GDT Controller Monitor v1 25 ICF Intelli ent Computer in TH C Copyright 1994 1997 ICP vortex r
278. t with other components in the PCI slot area There are no further settings required to operate the ICP Controller in a 32 Bit or 64 Bit PCI bus master slot Step 4 Push the ICP Controller firmly into the correct PCI bus master slot Make sure that the con troller fits tightly into it and that the external connectors stick out of the computer case Now fix the ICP Controller by tightening the screw of its bracket Step 5 To connect the Fibre Channel enclosure use either a copper round cable or an optical fiber cable with MIAs Make sure that cables are fastened with the corresponding connectors To connect internal SCSI devices use the internal SCSI connectors of the ICP Controller You need 50 pin or 68 pin SCSI flat ribbon cables with appropriate connectors Please ver ify that the colored core of the SCSI flat ribbon cable connects PINI of the ICP SCSI connec tor to PINI of the SCSI device Step 6 If required you can connect the HDD front LEDs of the PCI computer system to the LED connectors of the ICP Controller Step 7 Before the PCI computer system is switched on check the following points over again Have you installed an genuine ICP ECC SDRAM Module Is the ECC SDRAM Module into the socket 5 the ICP Controller plugged firmly into one of the PCI bus master slots 5 the Fibre Channel enclosure properly connected with the ICP Controller Are the SCSI IDs set correctly Are the SCSI bus terminators plugged
279. te Size MB Drive SEAGATE 5152160 MEN NAE 1 H 1 Li E 1 RE lug in the e new disk dri at sr channel B SCSI ID 3 QU MUST NOT DO ANY OR PLUGGING SCSI CHANNELS DOING 0 MIGHT CAUSE SERIOUS HARDWARE DAMAGE All data on the new disk drive will be ies oyed After confirming unplugging or plugging is not allowed cause serious hardware damage Plu f PCI 9 9 PCI 0 9 PCI 6 9 AM ln cm v m sac After this message we can unplug the old drive and plug in the new one again and confirm this procedure GMT Controller Monitor 25 i Computer Peripherals TM isk Drives Position Chn ID Status Vendor Type Atte Size MB Drive Bel 09 A SEAGATE 5152160 MEN NAE The new disk drive is built into the disk array lease wait PCI 6 9 AM ln m Sat If everything was OK GDTMON displays the following message Intelligent Computer Peripherals 213 GDT Controller Monitor v1 25 ICP Intelligent Computer Peripherals TM isk Drives Position Chn ID Status Vendor Type Atte Size MB Drive SEAGATE STo2160N RH 2068 0 GLO A 1 hot Flug was shed suc The disk amaj 5 du has changed t REBUILD The time the disk array needs to assume the READY status depends on the utilization and the disk apray s capacity PC 0 3 KI 0 9 PCI 6 9 AM ln cux m If the new drive which we
280. te an image If you copy file by file do not use the Explorer because it may not copy all files from the ICP System CDROM If you intend to install Windows NT 3 50 on your system please observe the following The ICP driver for NT 3 50 is located in the subdirectory DRIVERS of the ICP Windows NT driver disk Its name is GDTX350 SYS This file has to be renamed into GDTX SYS and copied into the root directory of the ICP Windows NT driver disk Step 2 Disable the Delayed Write Cache of the ICP Controller during the NT installation When you do a warm boot by simultaneously pressing the CTRL ALT DEL keys some PCI motherboards carry out a hard reset of the PCI bus As a consequence all expansion cards and devices that are connected to the PCI bus including the ICP Controller are reset Dur ing the installation procedure of Windows NT this anomaly can cause the contents of the ICP cache RAM to be deleted before the data can be written to the disk s If this happens the installation cannot be completed correctly Such a warm boot automatically takes place after a FAT partition is converted into an NTFS partition at the end of the Windows NT in stallation procedure In order to avoid this problem and prevent the risk of data corruption the Delayed Write function of the ICP cache must be disabled during the complete in Intelligent Computer Peripherals 141 stallation To do so use the GDTSETUP program choose Advanced Setup Configure Cont
281. ter In tlallz 0 nitialize Dis Lo Tay Initialization of disk will destroy all data Un Continue Y N F FCAL A 2 A SEAGATE STI9171FC FCAL A 124 B SEAGATE ST19171FC FCAL 129 FC 1 0 Processor Rescan for new device Press lt Y gt and we are back on the main screen of level and see that the initialization status of the device has changed Intelligent Computer Peripherals GDTSETUP Version 3 04 Apr H2 1998 Copyright 1997 98 ICP vortex Computersysteme GmbH elect Physical Drive Cho ID LUN Vendor Product Atty Cap MB Drive SCSI h 6 ESG SHU SCA HSBP M3 SCSI h A B i FUJITSU MABSBILSC RU 8782 Drive B SCSI 7 i SCRI 170 Processor FCALA 2 A SEACHTE STIS171FC RU 6693 FCAL A 124 B SEAGATE STI9171FC RU 8538 FCAL A 125 B FC 1 0 Processor Rescan for neu device F2 Extended Information Initialize the next two SEAGATE drives as described above that is Select the device with the cursor keys T and J and press the lt ENTER gt key Choose the settings shown above Carry out the initialization When the initialization completed the screen should look as follows a small i i initial ized must follow the ID of each hard disk GDTSETUP Version 3 04 Apr 1998 Copyright 1997 98 ICP vortex Computersysteme GmbH p ure Controller onfiqure hysical Devices elect Physical Drive Chn t Atty Cap MB Drive 5051 SHY SC 2 4 SBP M SCSI FUJITS RW 8702 D
282. ter Peripherals 83 GDTSEIUP Version 3 04 Apr AZ 1998 Copyright 1997 98 ICP vortex Computersysteme GmbH Configure Controller _ Configure Physical Devices Configure Logical Drives elec au Since we want to create a new Array Drive press ENTER Note The first entry in the following list has no relevance for our example GDTSETUP Version 3 04 Apr 1998 C Copyright 1997 98 ICP vortex Computersysteme GmbH y etup Configure Controller Configure Physical Devices Configure Logical Drives ne rau Imre REN elec Status Array Driye Mane Status Atirih Capacity Type belongs to Al ok LRU 1 2080 Disk Host B Move the selection bar to the second entry and press the lt SPACE gt bar The entry is marked with an for Master This means that the data from this Logical Drive are copied to the second Logical Drive which we will select next Intelligent Computer Peripherals Advanced Setup Configure Controller onfigure Physical Devices figure Logical Drives elec au ct Dr Status attrib oil Type 1 ok UNE Disk helongs to Host Move the selection bar with the cursor key 4 to the next entry and press the lt SPACE gt bar again It is marked with an TSEIUP Version 3 04 Apr Ha 1998 pressing the lt SPACE gt bar again undoes your choice GD
283. tings Parity Verify Sedat Recalculate Expand Array Drive Pool Hot Fix Access ot Plug Ade Tm i i Hot Plug Add Pool Hot Fix Drive Hot Plug Remove pru Hot Fix Drive Hot Plug Remove Pool Hot Fix Drive GDT6937RP in Local 5us Sampling Rate sac There are typically two different applications where a Hot Plug is necessary Application 1 The RAID 4 5 Array Drive is in the ready state It is likely that a drive will soon fail for example when there is a loud operating noise As a preventative measure this drive ought to be exchanged now that is in a moment when the Array Drive is still in a ready state and still has redundancy Application 2 The RAID 4 5 Array Drive is no longer fault tolerant fail state because a drive of the Array Drive has actually failed The Array Drive is still fully operational but it does not have redundancy any more If another drive should also fail the Array Drive s functionality is impaired Example Session for Application 1 We assume that there is a RAID 5 Array Drive which is fault tolerant Its state is ready all drives are valid After selecting the Array Drive we choose the Replace Drive option Intelligent Computer Peripherals 210 GDT Controller Monitor 25 i Ara Computer Peripherals TM isk Drives Position Chn ID Status Vendor Type Atte Size MB Drive A 6 208 not Plug Add Hot Plug Add P H
284. tional security RAID 1 represents an easy and highly efficient solution for data security and system avail ability It is especially suitable for installations which are not too large the capacity avail able is only half of the installed capacity ICP vortex GDT Disk Array Controller Disk Mirroring RAID 1 Host Drive Intelligent Computer Peripherals 60 ICP vortex GDT Disk Array Controller ll Disk Duplexing RAID I Host Drive RAID 4 Data Striping With a Dedicated Parity Drive RAID 4 works in the same way as RAID 0 The data are striped amongst the hard disks Ad ditionally the controller calculates redundancy data parity information which are stored on a separate hard disk P2 Even when one hard disk fails all data are still fully available The missing data is recalculated from the data still available and the parity in formation Unlike in RAID 1 only the capacity of one hard disk is needed for the redun dancy If we consider for example a RAID 4 disk array with 5 hard disks 80 of the installed hard disk capacity is available as user capacity only 20 is used for redundancy In situations with many small data blocks the parity hard disk becomes a throughput bot tle neck With large data blocks RAID 4 shows significantly improved performance ABCDEF ICP vortex GDT Disk Array Controller
285. trical current to the hard disk When using such adapters a loop back connector must be used to com plete the communication loop If the hard drives are used in a dual loop configuration they must have two NL_Ports Intelligent Computer Peripherals 31 When choosing FC hard drives those with the shortest seek times and highest RPMs usu ally provide best performance The seek time refers to the amount of time the drive read write head needs to access specific data sectors on the disk The shorter the seek time the less time spent waiting during random reads writes Higher RPMs translate into better sequential data transfer rates and better read write times B 4 2 FC Hard Drive Enclosures A FC hard drive enclosure functions not only to physically house the drives but must also control electrical current and temperature In choosing an enclosure important features to consider are redundant and hot swappable power supplies and fans These components have a relatively high failure rate and if they are not redundant their failure can lead to hard drive failures The FC hard drive enclosure assigns to each hard drive a unique ID in the Loop Enclosures for RAID systems must also support the interactive change out of a hard disk during system operation Hot Plug To achieve this the enclosure must have Port Bypass Circuits PBC which are located on the backplane and redirect data paths while the failed hard drive is exchanged This p
286. tted to produce one single copy disk of the software for back up purposes only Furthermore it is permitted to copy the software onto the hard disk of one sin gle computer It is not permitted to duplicate the contents of the EPROMs and or Flash RAMs on the ICP Controller 3 The permanent conferring by sale or donation of the software is permitted The new proprietor must be registered with ICP vortex and must assume all rights and obliga tions resulting from this Software license agreement Each and any other kind of transfer especially leasing is not permitted Copies made by the first user for security reasons must be destroyed upon transfer 4 It is not allowed to change the software in its functions or its appearance especially trade mark firm name and copyright reference or to edit it in any other way Neither is it permitted to de compile or disassemble the software 5 The enclosed software has been carefully copied on floppy disks and or CDROM s However if the floppy disks and or CDROM s should prove to be faulty ICP vortex will exchange them within 4 weeks from the date of purchase 6 ICP vortex makes no warranties express or implied including without limitation the implied warranties of merchantability functionality and fitness for a particular pur pose In particular ICP vortex is not liable to you for any consequential incidental or indirect damage arising out of the use of this product 7 This agreement is su
287. uld fail the data of the defective drive can be reconstructed on the basis of the normal user data and the previously calcu lated parity data RAID levels 4 5 and 10 can tolerate the failure of one drive just as RAID 1 but in comparison to the latter RAID 4 RAID 5 or RAID 10 are less expensive As already mentioned before the entire disk array controlling function is carried out at controller level and therefore does not load the host computer Let us have a look at the following table which explains the correlations between the RAID level usable disk capacity and number of physical hard disks To make things easier we consider identical 1 GB hard disks RAID Level 2 disks 3harddisks 4harddisks 5harddisks 368 468 568 Intelligent Computer Peripherals 112 It is quite obvious that the redundancy of level RAID 1 soon becomes very expensive when more than 2 hard disks are used Only with RAID 4 and RAID 5 have you a reasonable rela tion between storage capacity and expenses for the disk array 10 3 Do we Need Hot Fix drives In other words Should RAIDYNE automatically reconstruct the lost data after a hard disk failure One of the reasons that have led you to choose RAID disk arrays definitely lies with the re dundancy that is the data security you still preserve even in the event of disk failure thus resting assured against loss of data and time Hot Fix drives are possible with all RAID 1 4
288. us Dynamic RAM technology The ESM is correctly plugged into the ESM socket of the ICP Controller if it is engaged correctly into the socket s retaining clamps and if all contacts of the ESM are equally contacting the corresponding pins of the socket To release an installed ESM carefully press the retaining clamps to the side Each time you switch on the computer system the ICP Controller automatically recognizes how much cache RAM is available and configures itself accordingly Intelligent Computer Peripherals 29 B 4 Fibre Channel Arbitrated Loop Topology Facts The GDT75x9RN and GDT76x9RN support the Arbitrated Loop Topology The Arbitrated Loop AL allows up to 127 ports to be connected in a circular daisy chain Data is transferred from one device to its neighbor in the chain The ports in an AL are designated as NL_Ports and two ports can be active simultaneously The other ports func Node A Node B tion as repeaters and simply pass the signal along This means of course that the band width of 100MB sec is shared among all devices Just as in a token ring each device on the Arbitrated Loop sees every message keeps those meant for it and passes all others along Fibre Channel Arbitrated Loop FC AL is a subset of a Switched Fabric ICP controllers are available either as single port controllers GDT7519RN GDT7619RN with one FC channel or dual port controllers GDT7529RN GDT7629RN with two inde pendent channels
289. user data on the drives is read parity information is calculated from this user data and the parity information is written anew While the parity recalculate is in progress the array is in the build state During this time the Array Drive is not redundant You can view the progress of the build process by when you click the right mouse button on the Array Drive icon and select progress information After the parity recalculate is completed the Array Drive s state changes again into ready with the addition patch This notification has no relevance for the operation of the Array Drive but is a reminder that the parity information of this Array Drive has been recalculated once K 5 9 Progress Information Click the right mouse button on the Array Drive or Physical Drive icons The progress information window shows the progress elapsed time estimated time per centage of completion of a parity verify a disk array build or a surface check During an Array Drive rebuild the information user data and or parity of a specific Logical Drive is calculated from the user data and parity information of the other Logical Drives and written to this new Logical Drive During a build of an Array Drive parity information is calculated and written to a specific Logical Drive RAID 1 4 or striped over the Array Drive RAID 5 The estimated time indicates the time needed by the controller to finish this process if the user load on the controller does not c
290. ve been previously loaded on the fileserver console In addition the module CTRLSRV NLM has to be loaded This module searches for a file named CTRLSRV CFG This file must be located in the same directory as CTRLSRV NLM The system administrator has to set up a user group named GDT OPERATOR All users belonging to this group are given access through GDTMON to the ICP Controller s in this specific fileserver Access level 0 Now the GDTMON program can be loaded from one or more workstation s GDTMON lt ENTER gt By selecting the menu Select Controller of the GDTMON main menu you can now choose ei ther a fileserver equipped with an ICP Controller or an ICP Controller in your workstation J 1 2 Loading the GDTMON Program Under 05 2 The GDTMON program for OS 2 is part of the ICP System CDROM To load the program un der OS 2 enter GDTMON32 ENTER J 1 3 Loading the GDTMON Program Under Windows NT The GDTMON program for Windows NT is part of the ICP System CDROM To load the pro gram under Windows NT enter GDTMON ENTER J 1 4 Loading the GDTMON Program Under Windows 95 98 The GDTMON program for Windows 95 98 is part of the ICP System CDROM To load the program under Windows 95 98 enter GDTMON ENTER Intelligent Computer Peripherals 171 J 1 5 Loading gdtmon under SCO UNIX In order to be able to use the gdtmon program under SCO UNIX 2 x 4 x and 5 x it be comes necessary to substitute the stan
291. ved by ICP vortex Computersysteme GmbH could void the authority to operate the equipment Intelligent Computer Peripherals Table of Contents 16 A 1 Product Identification 16 A 1 1 Key Features of the ICP Controllers of the RN 17 A 2 Copyrights Patents REIN RR ERN RS 18 A 3 Software License Agreement sstttt ttn 19 General Information ttt nnnc 20 A 4 1 Unpacking the ICP Comin oll eh succus cett tisse ente a 20 A4 2 Delivery Contents ccsezssscsssssscssssssssvssssscsssssosssssesssssosssssssscasssusessasesssssesensessseossnscsssessnnsavssessasssssess 20 A4 3 Contents of the ICP CDROM tnnt 20 You T RR 20 A5 Product Description iai cocer tret eben rectae etie e dcos 2 A 5 1 Intel Q6ORN 1 0 2 5 2 64 Bit 2 A 5 3 Cache RAM Expandable to 64MB snnt 2 2 5 5 Up to 2 Fibre Channel Interfaces plus 1 Ultra Wide SCSI 2 5 6 ICP Controller Firmware RAIDYNE PCI BIOS and 6 2 A 5 7 Configuration Program GDTSETUP 22 A 5 8 Diag
292. ves which have been installed with GDTSETUP in chapter C is not known to UNIX Le the operating system does not recognize that a given Host Drive consists of a number of hard disks forming a disk array To UNIX this Host Drive simply ap pears as one single hard disk with the capacity of the disk array This complete transpar ency represents the easiest way to operate disk arrays under UNIX neither UNIX nor the PCI computer need to be involved in the administration of these complex disk array con figurations H 2 General Tips for Installation In the following description we shall explain the installation of SCO UNIX V 386 3 2v4 x and 3 2v5 x step by step in combination with the ICP Controller Apart from the SCO UNIX floppy disks and the SCO UNIX documentation you also need the ICP floppy disks they can be created from the ICP System CDROM ICP SCO UNIX BTLD Disks for 3 2v4 x 3 2v5 x for the installation In the following discussion when we speak of a boot drive we refer to the drive which is first integrated upon system power up For the ICP Controller this drive is the first Host Drive in the list of ICP Host Drives i e the Host Drive number 0 see GDTSETUP menu Configure Host Drives During the installation you will have to decide whether you want the ICP Controller to make the boot drive available or whether you want to operate the ICP Controller as an additional controller in the computer system If the ICP Controller is t
293. vice driver automatically by means of the CONFIG SYS DEVICE GDTX000 EXE Note GDTSETUP as well as GDTX000 are on the ICP CDROM The header of the GDTSETUP program indicates with a letter after the version number whether GDTSETUP was loaded from disk or from Flash RAM R for GDTSETUP loaded from the Flash RAM after switching on the computer for GDTSETUP loaded from Disk i e under MS DOS The main menu appears Select Controller Intelligent Computer Peripherals GDTSETUP Version 3 030 Mar 11 1998 Copyright 1997 98 ICP vortex Computersysteme GmbH Press the lt F2 gt key for the Advanced Setup Intelligent Computer Peripherals 24 GDTSETUP Version 3 83D Mar 11 1998 Copyright 1997 98 ICP vortex Computersysteme GmbH Configure ontroller onfigure Physical Devices Configure Logical Drives Configure Array Drives Host Drives Save Information F2 Express Setup Select Configure Controller and press lt ENTER gt GDTSETUP Version 3 030 Mar 11 1998 Copyright 1997 98 ICP vortex Computersysteme GmbH 11 PL aye Wri te gl gr gg g BIOS a abled E hi BIOS laming Level P messages Co atali yen F Supported BLOS Drives SalAdvanced Sett Memory Test Standard The fields can be selected by moving the cursor keys and The values can be changed by pressing ENTER and selecting a new setting Leav
294. ws NT offers the opportunity of specifying an additional device driver Now insert the floppy disks with the Windows NT driver for the ICP Controller If the whole process described above has been carried out correctly a win dow is displayed in the middle of the screen with the message ICP Disk Array Controller If the function key F6 was not pressed at the correct point the procedure can be easily re peated by rebooting the computer hard reset Otherwise Windows NT restarts the driver of the ICP Controllers after confirming by press ing the lt ENTER gt key Installation can be carried out in the usual way The ICP driver disk will be needed again later to allow Windows NT to copy the gdtx sys to the boot partition F 6 3 Adding Additional Capacity After An Online Capacity Expansion The additional capacity resulting from an online capacity expansion of an existing Array Drive is introduced to the system as a new Host Drive In order to be able to make use of the new capacity without having to down the server use the Disk Administrator When load ing it detects the new Host Drive Intelligent Computer Peripherals 147 F 6 4 Windows NT Error Messages and Possible Reasons Setup did not find any hard disk drivers installed in your computer Possible reasons The automatic hardware detection was not skipped or the driver for the ICP Controller was not installed as the first driver NT Setup always expects the partition on whi
295. ws a list of Host Drives In this example there are two Host Drives installed GDISETUP Version 3 84D Apr B2 1998 Copyright 1997 98 ICP vortex tei GmbH Advanced Setup onfigure Controller onfigure Physical Devices onfigure Logical Drives onfigure Array Drives ost Driy Name Status acit Type belongs to DISK AL ok Ru der H Disk Logical A rye F2 Drive Information Refresh Therefore the first Host Drive has target ID 0 LUN 0 and the second target ID 0 LUN 1 The formula for determining target ID and LUN from the existing Host Drive numbers yields the following possible combinations for Direct Access Devices Host Drive Target ID LUN Host Drive Target ID LUN number number 0 0 0 8 1 0 1 0 1 9 1 1 2 0 2 10 1 2 3 0 3 11 1 3 4 0 4 12 1 4 5 0 5 13 1 5 6 0 6 14 1 6 7 0 7 15 1 7 This conversion is necessary because the single SCSI devices are not declared to the host operating system in the order of their SCSI IDs anymore but according to the Host Drive numbers they have in GDTSETUP Host Drives are a prerequisite for the ICP Controller to be able to link several SCSI devices to form a higher structure i e RAID 5 The sequence of the single Host Drives can be changed very easily by having GDTSETUP sort them in its Configure Host Drives menu In this way it is also possible to change the boot Intelligent Computer Peripherals 159 drive it had previously been selecte
296. ype belongs to DISK Al ok ER 2 MB Disk Host B Note The already existing Logical Drive in this list has no relevance for our example Intelligent Computer Peripherals 72 GDTSETUP Version 3 04 Apr AZ 1998 Copyright 1997 98 ICP vortex Computersysteme GmbH figure Control ler onfigure Physical Devices 1gure ogica Status Attrib E i Type belongs to y DISK hi ok RU 2800 Mb Disk Host 0 eate new Logica m Physical Drive Chn Vendor Product Attn Cap MB Drive FCAL A 2 0 SEACATE STI9171FC RU 8683 FCAL A 124 8 SEAGATE ST19171FC RU 8538 SPACE Select Deselect drive ENTER End selection Select the initialized hard disk with the lt SPACE gt bar it becomes marked with an and press ENTER Figure Controller fi jure Phy sical Devices Do you want to create a SINGLE drive from t CAUTION All data will he destro FCAL A 2 SEACATE ST19171FC RU 8683 FCAL A 124 A SEAGATE ST19171FC RU 8538 SPACE Select Deselect drive ENTER End selection For security reasons you will be asked again if you want to use the selected disk to create a Logical Drive As we are sure of our choice we confirm with Yes GDTSETUP allows you to limit the hard disk size for this Logical Drive This becomes interesting when you configure disk ar rays For this example we use the full capacity and press ENTER Intelligent Computer Peripherals 76
297. ys lights up during BUS Master DMA transfers the brighter it lights the more DMAs The yellow LEDs indicate accesses the devices They also may flicker sionally as the ICP Controller scans the I O channels for existing devices The ICP boot message appears In the following example a GDT7519RN Controller has been detected in PCI slot 3 and it has 32MB of ECC SDRAM 16 MB RAM detected On the SCSI channel is a Quantum drive and a DLT2000XT streamer On the Fibre Channel port four Seagate Barracuda drives are detected They form one RAID 5 host drive GDT PCI Disk Array Controller BIOS Version 3 00 Copyright C 1991 98 by ICP vortex Computersysteme GmbH Dec 7 1998 All rights reserved BIOS located at 0x000E0000 0x000ETFFF I Controller s found Selftests OK scanning 1 0 channels PCI 0 3 DPMEM at 0x000D0000 0x000D3FFF INTA 1 010 PCI 0 3 GDT7519RN HWLO 32 MB SDRAM ECC 2048kB Flash RAM PCI 0 3 Serial No 00123412 RAIDYNE FW Version 2 21 00 RFFF Dec 7 1998 PCI 0 3 SCSI A ID 0 LUN 0 QUANTUM XP34300W PCI 0 3 SCSI A ID 1 LUN 0 DLT2000XT PCI 0 3 Initializing Fibre Channel Link PCI 0 3 FCAL A Fibre Channel Private Loop initialized PCI 0 3 FCAL A 10 0 LUN 0 SEAGATE ST19171FC PCI 0 3 FCAL A ID 1 LUN 0 SEAGATE ST19171FC PCI 0 3 FCAL A 10 2 LUN 0 SEAGATE ST19171FC PCI 0 3 FCAL A ID 124 0 SEAGATE ST19171FC PCI 0 3 RAID 5 Host Drive 1 installe

User`s Manual 64 Bit PCI Fibre Channel RAID Controllers

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents